18D-001 (14) kMPTON,MA
CANOPY UPGRADE
JECT N°.05013031
1,2005
below)where tested with a 500 VDC potential at 70o F ambient temperature with a
reasonably dry atmosphere between conductors and between conductors and grounds, as
required by'the local electrical inspector and the NEC.
21 MI CABLE—NOT USED
A. Type MI cable shall be used for exposed and concealed except as limited by the following
general requirements and the NEC. Type MI cable shall be permitted for the following
applications:
1. Lighting and power branch circuiting home runs for all emergency feeders run exposed
in areas where fire resistive enclosures are not provided,and the cable must be part of
an assembly having a 2 hour fire resistive rating when required by the local codes.
B. The MI cable shall be supported and secured at intervals not exceeding 6'-0". Cables
shall be supported using support channels and approved clamps. Cables shall be bundled
in groups of four or less.
C. All bends shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged, and the inner edge radius
of any bend is not less than five times the external diameter of the metallic sheath for
cable less than 3/4" in diameter.
D. Fittings used for connecting cables to boxes,cabinets, or other equipment shall be
identified for use with MI cable.
E. All cables shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or
intersections of vertical planes. Cables shall be installed with a minimal amount of
interlacing and twisting when bundled,to enhance tracing and identification. Cables shall
be supported using bridle rings that are fastened to the bottom of consecutive roof joists or
girders. Cables shall not be interwoven through the open web steel joists and shall not be
suspended by the ceiling grid or tiles. Any cabling installed in violation of this paragraph ..
shall be corrected by the Electrical Contractor without additional expense to the Owner.
F. Cables shall be transitioned after extending into rooms with 2-hour fire resistive
construction with appropriate fittings. The cable shall extend into the fire rated area a
minimum of 12 inches.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL 16050-34
F
NORTHAMPTON
RETAIL CANOPY UPGR
EK PROJECT N°.0501;
JUNE 17,2
w
3.16 TEMPERATURE RECORDERS—NOT USED
A. Irreversible temperature recorder decals shall be installed on all panel feeders at the pane
lugs or main breakers. The decals shall be installed so that they are readily visible when
the panel cover is removed. Decals installed on Type THW conductors shall change color
permanently to indicate when a temperature of 70o C has been reached. Decals installed
on Type THHN or Type XHHW conductors shall change color permanently to indicate
when a temperature of 85o C has been reached.
B. The decals shall be installed on all feeders#6 and larger which feed electric heating
equipment, motors, and air conditioning equipment.
3.17 WARNING TAPES —NOT USED
A. Warning tapes shall be placed above all buried electrical and communication utility lines.
All tapes shall be highly visible, color-coded, and imprinted with the appropriate warning
legend. The tape width shall vary from a 2-inch wide tape buried 10 inches below the
surface to an 18-inch wide tape buried 50 inches below the surface.
3.18 WORKMANSHIP
A. The Electrical Contractor shall at all times have a foreman or superintendent on the
project authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Contractor
himself were present. The foreman or superintendent shall not be removed or replaced
after construction work begins without the expressed acceptance of the Engineer.
B. All electrical equipment and work installed as shown on the drawings and stated in the
specifications must be installed in strict accordance with the requirements of all state,
local, and other departments having jurisdiction;the utility companies; the requirements
of the Underwriters' Laboratories;National Bureau of Fire Underwriters;National Electric
Code; and/or similar codes applied thereto. Where code requirements exceed those shown
on the drawings and in the specifications, code requirements shall prevail.
3.19 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL MANUALS
A. Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall furnish instruction manuals, data, warranties,etc., and instruct the Owner or his
representative as to the arrangement, location, and operation of all equipment and systems
furnished and installed under Division 16 of the specifications.
3.20 GENERAL WIRING TESTS
A. At the time of the final inspection and test, all wiring at the exact location throughout the
building must be completed; devices and equipment properly operating; all lighting
fixtures installed; and power and lighting circuit and control wiring clearly identified with
acceptable tags, ready for acceptance. Each system must test free from short circuits and
have an insulation resistance of not less than 50 megohms(for systems 600 volts and
16050-33 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
signs shall be steel, a minimum size of(10")ten by (14") fourteen inches in size, and 30-
gauge in thickness. The signs shall be per OSHA specifications.
3.13 SAFETY SWITCHES—NOT USED
A. Each motor, motor controller, and other hardwired pieces of electrical equipment shall
have a safety switch which is in sight of the equipment and is capable of disconnecting the �.
equipment from the circuit. Controllers or starters which have an integral disconnect
switch, as in the case of combination starter/disconnect units, are not required to have a
separate disconnect means. Motors or other equipment which have remote-mounted
controllers shall have a separate safety switch as close as possible and within sight of the
motor or equipment served. Where more than one motor is connected to a single-branch
feeder, each motor shall have a disconnect switch even if within sight of the feeder branch
breaker. Two-speed motors shall have separate disconnect switches for each set of motor
windings.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install disconnect switches for motors and/or power
equipment to meet applicable code requirements. Disconnect switches, unfused or
fusible, for motors larger than 1/2 HP shall be as specified in this section. Disconnect
switches for motors under 1/2 HP shall be of the thermal trip,toggle switch type for the
motor involved.
3.14 STARTERS—NOT USED
A. In general, motor starters shall be furnished as an integral part of the equipment they serve
and be installed under the division under which they are supplied.
B. The electrical subcontractor shall furnish all power wiring for all motors and motor
starters and provide the disconnect switches required.
C. Individual motor starters and/or combination starter/disconnect units not an integral part .,,.
of equipment shall be furnished and installed under the division of these specifications
where equipment is specified.
D. Control voltage shall be 120 volts. All starters shall have integral control transformers
where required, be fused as necessary, and be furnished with appropriately sized heater
elements.
3.15 LOAD BALANCE
A. The electrical subcontractor shall balance the loads on the three phases in the electrical
switchgear and panelboards insofar as physically possible and report each panel loading to
the Engineer.
ELECTRICAL 16050-32 ,,.�
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
208/120V - 3-Phase -4-Wire - 60 HZ
Usage Color
Phase A Solid Black
Phase B Solid Red
Phase C Solid Blue
Neutral Solid White
Grounding Conductor Solid Green
Isolated Grounding
Conductor Green with White Stripe
480/277V - 3-Phase- 4-Wire - 60 HZ
Usage Color
Phase A Solid Brown
Phase B Solid Orange
Phase C Solid Yellow
Neutral White with Gray Strip or Solid Gray
Grounding Conductor Green
B. Where more than one neutral conductor of the same derived system is installed in the
same conduit, each wire shall be identified at both ends with an identification number or
color code.
C. Plastic-coated wire markers of the wrap-around, self-adhesive type with factory-printed
numbers, letters, and symbols shall be used to identify all feeders, mains, and branch
circuit conductors. The same or equivalent wire markers shall be in all function boxes,
panels, switchgear, etc.
D. All conductors shall be tagged in cabinets at the time wires are pulled in and tested;
markers shall not be removed for any reason.
E. The Contractor shall furnish and install nameplates designating the service controlled
adjacent to all disc switches,panelboards, and controls wired by him.
F. Nameplates shall consist of laminated black and white plastic with 5/16-inch engraved
white letter on black background,lamacoid, or acceptable equivalent.
G. Nameplates shall be securely attached in place by sheet metal screws.
H. All light switches and duplex receptacles shall have panelboard circuit identification with
Panduit Write-on Markers within their coverplates as directed by the Engineer.
I. Provide warning signs on the exterior of all electrical room doors with the following
wording: DANGER- HIGH VOLTAGE -AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY -. The
16050-31 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
.w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Sleeves through interior partitions shall be 22-gauge galvanized sheet steel set flush with
finished surfaces or partitions.
D. Inserts shall be individual or strip type, of pressed steel construction, and with
accommodation for removable nuts and threaded rods up to 3/4-inch diameter to permit
lateral adjustment. Individual inserts shall have an opening at the top to allow reinforcing
rods up to 1/2-inch diameter to be passed through the insert body. Strip inserts shall have
attached rods having hooked ends to allow fastening to reinforcing rods. Inserts shall be as
manufactured by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.; Grinnell Co., Inc.; or acceptable
equivalent.
3.11 FIRE-STOPS, SEALS, AND SPECIAL FITTINGS ,
A. Penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceiling, or floors in which cables or conduits pass
shall be sealed by a UL-approved fire-stop fitting classified for an hourly rating equivalent
to the fire rating of the wall, ceiling, or floor.
B. Seal fittings, which are in or pass through hazardous areas, shall be installed on conduits
and cables, as required by the NEC. Fittings shall be UL-listed for the specific hazard
class and group environment in which they are to be used. The hazard class and group
shall be as defined by the NEC.
C. Cable terminator fittings shall be used wherever the jacket or sheath is removed from a
multi-conductor cable and wherever the cable ends must be sealed.
D. Sealing bushings shall be used on conduit and cable ends to effectively prevent the
intrusion of water, a damp or corrosive atmosphere, hot or cold air, or dust. Conduit
sealing bushings shall be used for sealing the ends of conduits where cables emerge in
applications involving higher fluid or gas pressures than can be handled by standard
bushings.
E. Thruwall and floor seals shall be used to provide a positive means of sealing pipes or
conduits, which pass through concrete foundation of a structure below grade or below
ground water level. Seals shall also be used at entry points through concrete walls or
floors, which must be sealed.
F. Expansion type fittings shall be used on all conduit runs subject to expansion and
contraction due to temperature change and building movement. Deflection and expansion
type fittings shall be installed where conduit crosses building expansion joints.
3.12 IDENTIFICATION
A. Conductors: All branch wiring or feeders#6 and smaller shall have color-coded
insulation. All other sizes shall be identified through the use of colored tapes and banded
at all connections, terminations, or splices. This means of identification shall be
permanently posted at each panelboard per NEC 210-4. The color-coding shall be as
follows:
ELECTRICAL 16050-30 .,
an
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
4
not more than 24 inches above the ceiling, and are readily accessible from a stepladder.
Access to the junction boxes shall not require a high lift or extension ladder. Junction
N boxes installed in violation of the paragraph will be evaluated for a credit back to the
Owner.
go J. In-floor junction boxes shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's
guidelines and/or the following:
1. After the floor is poured, adjust height of the flanged ring to match the level of the
a finished floor(including any floor covering material).
2. Grout around the flanged ring using a concrete sealant to effectively prohibit the
entrance of water into the floor box underneath the coverplate.
3. Install the factory provided gasket into the flanged ring.
4. Install the coverplate and fasten using the screws provided,tightening to 10 in.-lbs.
5. After wiring is pulled in install the pedestal box assembly or conduit transition using
silicone sealant on the threaded joint.
3.9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Individual conduits, especially large conduits, shall be supported by means of adjustable
malleable hangers of acceptable design placed not more than 8'-0" on center.
B. Parallel groups of conduit shall be supported by means of horizontal angle irons or
channel systems equivalent to Uni-strut below the conduit with vertical hanger rods at
both ends. Individual small conduits may be held in place by single-hold malleable clips.
C. Supports for conduits or raceways on concrete masonry walls may be attached to walls
with all-metal expansion shields. Explosive-type inserts will not be allowed.
wr D. All hangers, clips, and accessories for supporting conduit shall be UL-listed.
E. 3/4-inch plywood backboard shall be used for mounting all surface-mounted disconnect
switches, starters, and other equipment. Backboards shall be given two (2) coats of black
paint on all sides before installation. Paint shall be applied by Division 16000.
3.10 SLEEVES AND INSERTS
A. Sleeves through outside walls shall be cast-iron with intermediate, integral flange.
Sleeves shall be set with ends flush with each face of the wall. The space between sleeve
and conduit shall be packed with oakum to within two(2") inches of each face of the wall.
The remaining space shall be packed and made watertight with a waterproof compound.
B. Sleeves through concrete floors or interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 black steel
pipe set flush with finished walls or ceiling surfaces but extending two (2") inches above
finished floors.
16050-29 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
L. After the w 1 Fk is complete,the entire wiring system shall be tested for grounds in
accordance ith the requirements of the NEC and these specifications. Resistance to
ground me rements shall be taken for the grounding electrode system and the results ..�
reported to the Engineer.
3.8 OUTLET,JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Outlet boxes for light fixtures in concrete walls or slabs shall be four(4") inch octagonal
mud boxes not less than 2-1/8 inches deep. Include fixture studs where required.
B. Switch and receptacle outlet boxes in walls and partitions where wiring is concealed shall
be standard four(4") inches square, 1-1/2 inches deep, galvanized, with a cover for the
particular device they will receive. Use device extensions not less than 1/2-inch deep for
boxes installed in partition walls with slatwall attached to the wall surface. Provide 1-1/2-
inch deep square corner tile wall extension for boxes installed in tiles, exposed brick, or
exposed block masonry walls. Outlet boxes in existing masonry walls shall be furnished
with switch box extensions.
C. Switch or receptacle outlet boxes or fixture outlet boxes where conduit is exposed shall be
Crouse-Hinds Type FD or equivalent, with covers to fit devices used. See paragraph 2.15
- Wall Plates.
D. All boxes shall be securely fastened to the building structure. Suitable means shall be
provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. Recessed outlet boxes
shall be set flush with face of finished wall but in no case set greater than 1/4-inch behind
finished face of wall. Provide heavy duty ceiling fan style support boxes for all ceiling
fans, and for all light fixtures mounted to a recessed box for support.
E. Provide solid-gang switch boxes for all group-mounted light switches.
F. Receptacle boxes shall be approximately 18 inches on center above the finished floor
unless otherwise noted. Switch outlets shall be 48 inches on center above finished floor
unless otherwise noted. The Contractor shall check with the Architectural Drawings for
possible interference.
G. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be
threaded hub-type and provided with watertight screw-on covers and gaskets. Floor
outlets shall be adjustable type and waterproofed where required. `•'
H. In accordance with the NEC,pull boxes shall be of adequate size to accommodate the
conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would
damage the conductor insulation. Extension rings or boxes will not be allowed. If more
room is required to accommodate conductors, a larger size pull box shall be provided. A
credit shall be issued back to the Owner for any larger size pullboxes that are not installed. "'
I. Junction boxes shall be marked with indelible marker and labeled with the branch circuits
contained within. All junction boxes above the ceiling shall be mounted so that they are ow
ELECTRICAL 16050-28 .,.,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
ew RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
or other grounding electrode conductors shall be made with Cadweld-type, exothermic
weld process. Connection to pipes shall be made with acceptable clamps.
H. Bonding shall be provided where necessary to assure electrical continuity and the capacity
to safely conduct any fault current likely to be imposed. Bonding shall be accomplished
through the use of the following:
1. Pressure connectors or clamps.
2. Wrench-tight,threaded couplings on enclosures when used with rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit.
3. Tight, threadless couplings and connectors when used with rigid metal conduit,
intermediate conduit, and electrical metallic tubing.
4. Bonding jumpers when used around concentric or eccentric knockouts.
5. Bonding-type lock nuts and bushings.
I. Bonding jumpers shall be copper or other corrosion-resistant material. Bonding jumpers
on the supply side of the main service disconnect switch shall be sized in accordance with
Table 250-94 of the NEC. Bonding jumpers on the load side of the service shall be sized
in accordance with Table 250-95 of the NEC.
J. If available on the premises, each of the following items shall be bonded together to form
the grounding electrode system:
1. Incoming metal underground water service pipes in contact with the earth for more
than 10(10') feet.
on 2. Metal frame of building.
3. Concrete-encased reinforcing steel '/2"diameter or larger located near the bottom of a
concrete foundation.
If none of the above is available, one or more of the following electrodes shall be used:
4. Local, metal underground systems or structures.
5. Ground rods or plate electrode.
In all cases, a metal underground water pipe shall be supplemented with an additional
grounding electrode. In all cases, a ground rod driven into the earth shall be used as a part
of the grounding electrode system.
K. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel not less than 5/8-inch in diameter, eight(8') feet
long and driven full length into the earth. The maximum resistance of a driven ground
shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be
obtained with a single rod,two (2) additional rods shall be installed in a triangular
configuration not less than six (6')feet on center.
16050-27 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE r
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
provide the minimum grounding requirements, and the more specific or stringent
requirements shall be as stated in these specifications and as shown on the drawings.
B. The electrical system, which includes switchboard and panel enclosures; transformer and
motor frames; all metal conduit and raceways; metal enclosures (such as pull boxes,
junction boxes, or wireways) or enclosures for electrical devices; conductive, non-current-
carrying material; and other equipment, shall be made to form a continuous -conducting,
permanent ground path of low impedance to enhance the safe conduction of ground fault
currents and facilitate the operation of the circuit protective devices within the circuit.
The ground path between all grounded items shall be installed and arranged to prevent
objectionable, continuous current flow over grounding conductors or grounding paths.
C. Each electric service shall have a grounding electrode conductor which is connected to a
grounded electrode and the grounding service conductor at the main service disconnect at
a convenient point on the line side of the disconnect. Where the transformer supplying the a,
service is located outdoors, the grounding electrode conductor shall be run to at least one
grounding electrode, which is located outside of the building. The grounding electrode
conductor shall be sized according to Table 250-94 of the NEC or as shown on the
drawings.
D. Transformers, generators, converters, or other separately derived systems which do not
have a solidly grounded circuit conductor or other direct electrical connection with the
supply conductors originating in another system shall be grounded. A properly sized
bonding jumper shall connect the equipment-grounding conductors of the derived system ,
to the grounded conductor. A grounding electrode conductor, which shall be sized
according to Table 250-94 of the NEC or as specifically noted on the drawings, shall be
used to connect the grounded conductor of the derived system with the grounding
electrode. The grounding electrode of the separately derived system shall be the nearest
available effectively grounded structural steel member, metal water pipe, or other
grounding electrode as specified by the NEC, as noted within these specifications or on ..
the drawings.
E. Exposed, non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment likely to become energized
shall be grounded.
F. The grounding electrode conductor shall be of bare or insulated, stranded copper installed
in one continuous length without splice or joint. Equipment grounding conductors shall
be separate, solid or stranded copper conductors identified with green insulation. All
grounding conductors shall be installed in conduit or as part of a cable assembly and shall
be protected from physical damage. All grounding conductors shall be sized in
accordance with the NEC, as stated within these specifications or as shown on the
drawings.
G. Positive ground connections with the grounding conductors shall be made at each outlet
box, lighting fixture, motor, and other equipment components by means of a positively
secured grounding clamp, screw, or clip. Connections to grounding rods, building steel, dW
ELECTRICAL 16050-26 M
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.5 WIRING AND TERMINATIONS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, circuits of different phase legs may be combined with a
common neutral in home runs to the same panel so that, in some cases, four wires may be
run from three circuits back to panel. No more than three ungrounded conductors may be
run in any one conduit or cable assembly without permission of the Engineer, except
where otherwise specifically indicated. Any wiring installed in violation of the paragraph
shall be evaluated for a credit back to the Owner.
B. Wire sizes shall be as shown on the drawings, but where sizes are not shown, wire shall be
no smaller than the following minimum sizes:
1. Lighting and Power Wiring -#12 AWG with 600 volt insulation.
2. Control Wiring at 24 Volts - #16 AWG with 600 volt insulation.
3. Control Wiring at 120 Volts -#12 AWG with 600 volt insulation.
C. Splices for conductors or cables shall be made only in accessible splice boxes,junction
boxes, outlet boxes, or cabinets. No splice shall be pulled into the conduit.
D. Wiring in cabinets, panels, outlet boxes, or equipment shall have sufficient length to make
up circuit splices for extending circuits or connecting wiring termination devices.
Minimum wire length shall be six (6") inches.
E. Cable pulling lubricant shall be used for pulling#4 or larger conductors. The lubricants
shall be Dyna-blue Series lubricants as manufactured by American Polywater, Inc., with
the product type matched to the application. The lubricant shall have no flash point and
nonflammable dried residue. The lubricant shall have no deleterious effect on the
insulation.
3.6 SPLICES
A. Solid conductor splices for#10 or smaller wires shall be made with UL-listed solderless
connectors equivalent to 3M Scotchlok, spring-type or pre-insulated type, or T& B Sta-
,�,� Kon. Wiring nuts will not be permitted. Stranded wire conductor splices for#10 or
smaller wires shall be crimp-type equivalent to 3M Scotchlok.
B. Splices, cable taps, and terminals for#8 and larger wires shall be made with UL-approved
compression connectors equivalent to T& B "Color Keyed" compression"C" taps applied
with special tools according to manufacturer's recommendations or bolted pressure
connectors of bronze or copper construction as made by T & B, Burndy, or other
acceptable equivalent.
3.7 GROUNDING
A. All electrical systems shall be grounded and bonded in strict accordance with the 1999
edition of the NEC and as stated in these specifications. It is intended that the NEC
16050-25 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
A.
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
aw
E. All cables shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or
intersection of vertical planes. Cables shall be installed with a minimal amount of
interlacing and twisting when bundled, to enhance tracing and identification. Cables shall 04
be supported using bridle rings that are fastened to the bottom of consecutive roof joists or
girders. Cables shall not be interwoven through open web steel joists and shall not be
suspended by the ceiling grid and tiles. Any cabling installed in violation of this
paragraph will be corrected by the Electrical Contractor without additional expense to the
Owner.
3.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. All conductors and conduits on the drawings are sized for Type THWN copper conductors
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Type THWN copper conductors shall be used for all branch and feeder conductors.
C. Type THHN or Type XHHW copper conductors rated for 90o C shall be used for service
entrance feeders.
D. Type THHN copper conductors shall be used for light fixture wiring and when fixture is
used as raceway.
E. All panel feeder conductors and branch wiring shall be stranded, soft-annealed copper. .M
For all stranded copper conductors,provide insulated crimp-type terminals and
connectors as manufactured by 3M Scotchlok or equal for all conductor-to-conductor and
conductor-to-device connections. Submit shop drawings for approval.
F. Wire sizes and cable types for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer or as noted within these specifications or on the drawings.
G. Ground wires shall be copper with sizes as required by the NEC or as specifically noted
on the drawings. They shall be pulled with all phase conductors regardless of the use of
metal conduits.
H. Armored cable - Shall not be used. .,
I. Metal Clad Interlock-Type Cable(MC) - May be used for branch wiring in dry locations
and in places of assembly.
J. Mineral-Insulated Cable (MI) - Shall be used for emergency feeders as designated by local
codes.
K. Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable (NM)—May be used for branch wiring in dry locations of
stud wall construction with wiring concealed.
L. Modular wiring systems such as Lithonia Reloc or Dual-Lite E-Z Flex shall not be used.
M. Cables shall not be fastened to the underside of roof decking. ..
ELECTRICAL 16050-24
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Mechanical fire-stop fittings shall be used wherever conduits penetrate a fire-rated wall or
floor. The fittings shall have a UL-listed fire rating equivalent to the rating of the wall or
floor.
R. Pull boxes shall be installed after the equivalent of every four 90o bends.
S. Particular care shall be paid to drainage for conduit runs. Wherever possible, conduit runs
shall be installed so as to drain to one or both ends of the run. Where pockets or inverted
loops are impossible to avoid, low points in the conduit shall be drilled or tapped to allow
them to drain.
T. Connections to motor frames shall have a minimum of 18 inches of flexible conduit with
bonding jumper across to eliminate vibration and noise being transferred to other parts of
the building. Connections shall have UL-listed grounding fittings.
U. The Contractor shall secure in place all raceways, equipment, etc., prior to pouring floors.
V. Hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory bends shall be used for all bends in conduit
larger than two (2") inches in size. Conduit bodies may be used to make changes in
direction where elbows are not practical.
W. All conduit runs shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members,
or intersections of vertical planes.
X. All rigid steel and intermediate steel conduit joints shall be wrench-tight.
3.3 METAL CLAD CABLE—NOT USED
OR A. Type MC cable shall be used for exposed and concealed except as limited by the
following general requirements and the NEC. Type MC cable shall be permitted for the
following applications:
40 1. Lighting and power branch circuiting homeruns for all branch wiring run exposed in
non-finished areas, not subject to physical damage.
w 2. Branch circuiting concealed in walls.
3. Fire alarm,telephone, communications, special systems.
4. Feeders to panelboards, large pieces of equipment, etc.
B. Type MC cable shall be supported and secured at intervals not exceeding 6'. Cables shall
be supported using support channels and approved clamps. Cables shall be bundled in-
'" groups of four or less.
C. All bends shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged, and the inner edge radius
of any bend is not less than seven times the external diameter of the cable assembly.
D. Fittings used for connecting cables to boxes, cabinets, or other equipment shall be
identified for use with MC cable.
16050-23 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
F. RGS conduit shall be used in any case not specifically covered by the above conditions
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In no case shall EMT be used as a substitute
for rigid conduit nor AC cable for FMC.
G. Conduits shall be concealed below floors, above finished ceilings, and in walls in all
finished areas where possible.
H. Conduits shall be supported to prevent distortion and misalignment during wire pulls.
Conduits shall be secured using galvanized straps; lay-in adjustable hangers; clevis
hangers; or bolted, split, stamped, galvanized hangers. Perforated pipe straps or wire used
for pipe support will not be acceptable. Conduit supports shall be a minimum of ten(10')
feet on center and shall be located as stated in the NEC.
I. Conduits shall be grouped together and run in lines parallel or perpendicular to building
lines and as tight to the building structure as possible. Steel channel racks or struts shall
be used to support parallel runs. Provide space on the rack for 25 percent additional
conduit.
J. Exposed conduits passing vertically through floor slabs shall be grouped together, and in .r
no case shall the conduits block openings or work areas.
K. Conduits shall not be installed in structural concrete floors or slabs. All conduits installed
below slabs shall be located in the sub-grade at a sufficient depth to permit a uniform
thickness when the floor or slab is poured.
L. A minimum of six (6") inch clearance shall be maintained between conduit and piping. A
minimum of 12 inch clearance shall be maintained between conduit and heat sources such
as steam pipes, flues, or heating appliances.
M. All conduits shall be installed free of dents and be fished before pulling wires. All
conduits shall be suitably protected against damage and the entrance of dirt and moisture
during construction. Provide a nylon pull string in every empty conduit run.
N. The ends of all conduits shall be cut square and reamed. Conduit connections to junction
boxes shall be with double-locknuts and malleable iron insulated bushings. Grounding ..
bushings shall be provided at panel connections. Conduit hubs or sealing locknuts shall
be used to fasten conduits to cast boxes or boxes located in damp or wet locations.
O. Conduits crossing building expansion joints shall be furnished with UL-approved .�
expansion couplings. Couplings shall be used with bonding jumpers when used in
outdoor locations.
P. Conduit penetrations through walls, floors, or ceilings in heated and unheated areas shall
be sealed.
Q. Conduits passing through built-up roofs or waterproof membranes shall be installed with
flashing and pitch boxes in order to provide watertight joints. Refer to Division 7.
.e
ELECTRICAL 16050-22
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
40 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
perpe}�/dicular and parallel to the front face of the equipment. Bracing of Switchboards
shall include cabling to structural members. See drawings.
3.2 CONDUITS
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) -May be used for wiring in the following locations:
Wo
1. Buried underground.
2. Below concrete slabs installed on grade.
go
3. Exterior walls.
4. Mechanical rooms.
ws
5. Building vertical risers.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) - May be used for wiring in the following locations:
1. Buried underground.
2. Below concrete slabs installed on grade.
3. Exterior walls.
4. Mechanical rooms.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC)- May be used for wiring in the following locations
unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings or in this section:
1. Buried underground for primary and secondary electric service conductors. This
specific use shall be type Schedule 40 PVC, rated 90o C.
2. Buried underground for communications wiring and all site lighting wiring.
3. Outside wiring when installed below concrete slabs installed on grade. All elbows,
sweeps, and vertical risers shall be RGS when PVC is used for wiring.
D. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT)- Shall be used for exposed and concealed work except
as limited by the above general requirements and the NEC. EMT shall be permitted for
the following applications:
1. Lighting and power branch circuiting home runs and for all branch wiring run exposed
in non-finished areas.
2. Equipment and panel feeders except when run underground.
3. Fire alarm,telephone, communications, and special systems.
E. Flexible Metallic Conduit (FMC) - Shall be used for all final connections to motors,
transformers, or vibrating machinery with an 18-inch minimum whip. Liquid-tight FMC
shall be used in damp or wet locations.
00
16050-21 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE so
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
op
D. All work sh 1 be installed in such a readily accessible manner for maintenance, repair,
and operati n. Deviations from the drawings must be acceptable to the Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades involved so that exact locations
may be obtained for all switches, outlets, apparatus, appliances, and wiring.
F. Where more than one switch is shown at one location, the switches shall be ganged under
one plate in an order appropriate to the location of the items controlled.
G. Location of light switches and electrical outlets shown on diagrammatic wiring drawings
shall be considered as approximate. All pertinent drawings shall be studied prior to
installation of items.
H. If so required or directed by the Engineer, it shall be understood that any light switch and
electrical outlet may be relocated within a distance of ten(10') feet from the location
shown on the drawings at no additional cost to the Owner.
I. Local switch outlets shown near doors shall be installed opposite the hinged side of the
door. The Contractor shall verify door swings from the Architectural Drawings. ..
J. Where ductwork,piping, radiation, etc., interfere with the exact location for outlets shown
on the drawings,the Contractor shall move the outlets where directed by the Engineer
without charge to the Owner.
K. The location of switches, outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only, and the
runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on
the drawings. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full
consideration has been given to work of other trades without changes in the design of the
systems.
L. The Electrical Contractor shall verify the orientation of receptacles in the field with the
Electrical Inspector prior to installation.
M. Electrical equipment such as junction and pull boxes, controls, and apparatus shall be
made accessible.
N. All junction boxes mounted above the ceiling shall be mounted within 24" of the ceiling
grid. In open ceiling areas mount junction boxes within 24" of the bottom of lighting
fixture mounting elevation in the surrounding area.
O. All vibration isolators used for mounting equipment shall incorporate seismic snubbers to
resist movement in any horizontal direction and restrict vertical movement. Vibration
isolators with separate seismic snubbers located adjacent to the vibration isolators would
be acceptable.
P. Freestanding equipment shall be braced along its sides and top to resist lateral movement
in any direction. Bracing shall consist of angle or channel iron members installed
ELECTRICAL 16050-20 MW
we
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
40 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
sw
2.25 HEAT-TRACE CABLING SYSTEM
go A. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Raychem Corporation
a. #GM-1 XT heating cable, self-regulating, 120 volt.
WN b. #FTC-P power connection.
c. #FTC-HST heat shrinkable splice kit.
d. #Ray Clic-E end seal
e. #GM-RAKE downspout hanger bracket.
f. #Ray Clic-SB-02 mounting bracket.
2. Delta Therm—with products equal to the above.
B. Provide and install a complete gutter and downspout de-icing system utilizing the
components listed above as indicated on the drawings. The heating cable shall be laid in
gutters; shall be suspended in downspouts either as a loop or a single length and shall be
held in place with the appropriate hanger or mounting bracket accessories.
C. The heating cable shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
D. All circuit breakers feeding heat trace cable circuits shall be 30 mA trip ground fault
circuit breakers. Circuits shall be wired through contactors controlled by the building
EMS system.
E. After installation,the dielectric jackets insulation resistance and continuity shall be tested
with a 2500 VDC megohmeter. Insulation resistance shall be greater than 1000 megohms.
F. The system shall have a complete 10 year warranty.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
"* A. This Contractor shall endeavor to lay out and perform his work in such a manner so as to
cause no delay in the construction work by other trades.
,ter B. This Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be held responsible for the
correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual
measurements and those shown on the drawings.
so C. If in laying out his work, this Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere
with his work and the problem cannot be resolved under procedures outlined in Section
16010 - 1.07,the Engineer shall be notified at once. If interference is found prior to
roughing in,the right is hereby reserved by the Engineer to make reasonable changes in
arrangement of equipment, piping, etc., without additional cost to the Owner.
16050-19 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE .r
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.22 WARNING TAPE—NOT USED no
A. Warning tape shall be a high-intensity, color-coded warning ribbon composed of a solid,
aluminum foil core encased in a protective plastic jacket. The tape shall be capable of ..
being detected with metal detectors when buried at 12" below grade minimum.
B. Standard legends shall be marked continuously along the entire length of the tape. A red No
safety tape imprinted with "CAUTION - ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW" shall be
used for all buried primary and secondary electric services. Orange safety tapes shall be
imprinted with "CAUTION- TELEPHONE LINE BURIED BELOW" or "CAUTION -
TELEVISION CABLE BURIED BELOW."
C. Warning tapes shall be as manufactured by Allen Systems, Houston, Texas, or acceptable
equivalent.
2.23 OCCUPANCY SENSORS—NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Office Areas:
a. Sensor Switch#CMR-9 (ceiling mounted)
b. Sensor Switch#WSD-W(wall mounted) .�
B. Occupancy sensors shall be of the passive infrared type and shall be ceiling mounted units
suitable for line voltage control of 120/277 volt lighting circuits. Units shall cover a 500
square foot area minimum and shall carry a minimum load of 600 watts. Operating range r.
14°to 85° F.
C. Units shall mount in a single gang or handy box and shall be white in color.
D. Units shall be adjustable from 30 seconds to 20 minutes. Initial settings shall,be at 3 - 5
minutes.
E. Units shall be rated for switching electronic ballast loads.
2.24 PADDLEFANS—NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Environfan Goldline Series Reversing Type#160C-7
B. Fans shall be 56"diameter, white, with reversing motor for up blowing and down blowing ®,
operation, power connection at 120 volts.
C. The fan shall be supported from the building structure. A UL approved fan support
electrical box shall be used capable of supporting 35 pounds.
D. Fans shall be pendant mounted at 24"below the ceiling. The fan shall not be mounted
below 10'-0"above finished floor elevation.
ELECTRICAL 16050-18 «
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
F. Weatherproof"While in Use" coverplates shall be by Taymac. Refer to the drawings for
specific models.
2.20 FIRE-STOPS, SEALS, AND SPECIAL FITTINGS
A. Fire-stop fittings for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings,or floors shall be O/Z
Gedney Fire Seal Type CFSF Series for conduit and mechanical piping and Type CAFS
Series for cable. Similar fire-stop fittings as manufactured by Appleton or Killark shall be
�. acceptable.
B. Seal fittings for use with conduit shall be O/Z Gedney Type EY, EYA, or EYAM Series;
threaded; malleable iron fittings. Type EYMC Series shall be used for MC cable. Similar
seal fittings as manufactured by Appleton or Killark shall be acceptable.
C. Sealing compound shall be O/Z Gedney Type EYC Series, and fiber shall be O/Z Gedney
Type EYF Series or equivalent.
D. Cable or conduit terminating fittings shall be O/Z Gedney Type CR Series or equivalent.
E. Compound bushing and sealing bushing fittings shall be as manufactured by O/Z Gedney
or equivalent and be suited for the specific application.
'* F. Conduit sealing bushings shall be O/Z Gedney Type CS or equivalent.
G. Thruwall and floor seals shall be O/Z Gedney Type WSK or FSK Series sealing fittings.
H. Conduit expansion fittings shall be O/Z Gedney Type AX or equivalent for use with rigid
metal conduit, Type TX or equivalent for use with EMT. Provide an external-bonding
,t jumper when used in an outdoor location.
I. Deflection type fittings shall be O/Z Gedney Type DX with internal bonding jumper or
acceptable equivalent.
2.21 TEMPERATURE RECORDERS—NOT USED
A. Temperature recorder decals shall be single-position templates P/N 200 as manufactured
by Wahl Instruments, Culver City, California, or acceptable equivalent. Decals shall be
constructed of mylar and furnished with a self-adhesive backing and a temperature-
indicating window.
B. Decals installed on Type THW feeder conductors shall change order permanently to
indicate when a temperature of 70o C has been reached. Decals installed on Type THHW
or Type XHHW feeder conductors shall change color permanently to indicate when a
temperature of 85o C has been reached.
16050-17 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 r
JUNE 17,2005
Duplex Receptacle NEMA 5-20R Hubbell #5362 .ft
(dedicated)/' Brown, Duplex Receptacle
Duplex Receptacle NEMA L5-15R Hubbell #IG4700A ..
with Isolated Ground Orange, Duplex Receptacle
with insulated/isolated ,
ground,twistlock
Duplex Receptacle NEMA 5-20R Hubbell#5362RDB
(Emergency) Red, Duplex Receptacle
Duplex Receptacle NEMA 5-15R Hubbell #GF5262
with GFCI Brown, Duplex Receptacle
with Class A ground fault
circuit interruption
Duplex Receptacle NEMA 5-15R Hubbell#SG62H
Tamper-proof Brown, Duplex Receptacle
with insertion of the correct
plug configuration to become
energized
B. Receptacles for special purpose applications shall be specified on the drawings.
2.18 SPEED CONTROLS—NOT USED
A. All rheostat switches, unless otherwise specified, shall be Lutron solid-state or acceptable
equivalent with the following ratings:
600 Watt Load = #FS-5E-1 V
1200 Watt Load = #FS-10E-1V
B. See the drawings for wattage requirements.
2.19 WALL PLATES—NOT USED
A. All plates for switches, receptacles, and clock outlets where wiring is concealed shall have
stainless steel finish equivalent to Mulberry Metal #97000 Series.
B. Plates on exposed conduit boxes shall be galvanized and zinc-coated with rounded edges.
C. Wherever switches are grouped, they shall be ganged and provided with one-piece gang
plates to suit installation.
D. Plates for Data/Communications shall be provided in conformance with the ..
Data/Communication specifications.
E. Blank plates shall be provided for unused telephone outlets and duplex receptacles.
ELECTRICAL 16050-16
IN
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
ear RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
protected from rust and corrosion by zinc galvanizing. All clamps and other component
parts shall be galvanized separately before assembly in the boxes.
C. Floor boxes shall be cast iron, fully adjustable, with 3/4" hubs and brushed brass cover
plates and accessories as specified on the drawings. Refer to the Execution section for
strict guidelines related to the installation of floor boxes.
2.16 LIGHT SWITCHES—NOT USED
A. All wall-mounted light switches shall be specification grade and rated for 20 amperes of
120/277 volts A.C. for flush mounting with the following additional requirements:
r TYPE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER
Wall Switch, Brown, Standard Toggle, Hubbell#1221
Single Pole Single Pole, Single Throw
Wall Switch, Brown. Standard Toggle, Hubbell#1222
Double Pole Double Pole, Single Throw
so
Three-way Brown, Standard Toggle, Hubbell#1223
Wall Switch Three-way
Four-way Brown, Standard Toggle, Hubbell#1224
Wall Switch Four-way
Key-Operated Lock Type with Black Key Hubbell#1221L
Wall Switch Guide, Single Pole, with#120G Key
Single Throw
Wall Switch Illuminated, clear handle, Hubbell#1221PLC (120 V)
with Pilot pilot light type, for light Hubbell#1221PL7 (277 V)
Light on with load on. Single
Pole, Single Throw
2.17 RECEPTACLES—NOT USED
A. All receptacles shall be 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 125 volt, specification grade, straight
blade devices suitable for flush mounting with the following additional requirements:
TYPE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER
Simplex Receptacle NEMA 5-15R. Hubbell#5261
Brown, Single Receptacle
Duplex Receptacle NEMA 5-15R Hubbell#5262
(convenience) Brown, Duplex Receptacle
16050-15 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Contactor Quantity Enclosure Size Barber Model #
1 - 4 18" x 18" x 6" #B18186HCWP
5 - 10 30" x 30" x 10" #BCT303010
11 - 15 30" x 36" x 10" #BCT363010
16 -20 36" x 36" x 10" #BCT363610
H. All enclosures shall be provided with inner mounting panels.
2.14 PULL BOXES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Weigmann ....
2. Square D Co.
3. O.Z. Gedney ..
B. Electrical boxes larger than 4-11/16" square shall be considered pull boxes and shall fulfill
the requirements of this section.
C. Boxes shall be provided suitably rated for the atmosphere in which they will be installed
and rated as called for by the drawings. Units designated with"WP" shall be MW
weatherproof to satisfy NEMA 3R classifications.
D. Boxes required for NEMA 1 classifications shall be fabricated of code gauge steel
meeting or exceeding the requirements of the NEC and UL 50-80. Units shall have a ..
gray, baked enamel finish, and shall have an industry standard assortment of knockouts
for conduits ranging from 1/2"to 2".
E. Boxes required for NEMA 3R classifications shall be fabricated of cast aluminum with a
neoprene gasketed cover and stainless steel cover screws for a dust tight, raintight and
watertight rating. Boxes shall have external mounting lugs. Provide weatherproof hubs
for all conduit penetrations of the box that will maintain the NEMA 3R classification.
F. Boxes smaller than 24"x 24"overall size shall have screw covers. Boxes 24"x 24"and
larger shall be provided with hinged covers.
2.15 SWITCH AND OUTLET BOXES —NOT USED .�
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: National, Russellstoll,Appleton, Steel City, Raco, Hubbell.
B. Switch and outlet boxes and box accessories shall be manufactured to accepted standard .�
industry dimensions. All boxes shall be made from 14-gauge, hot-rolled steel and shall be
ELECTRICAL 16050-14
MW
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class
L. I
E. Circuits 0 to 600 ampere shall be protected by current limiting,time-delay, dual-element
fuses. All fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. The fuse must
hold 500 percent of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and be listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.,with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS
symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK5.
F. Upon completion of the project, the Electrical Contractor shall provide the Owner with 10
percent (minimum of three) of each type and rating of installed fuses as spares. These
shall be provided in a wall-mounted cabinet in the electrical room.
2.13 CABINET ENCLOSURES
OR A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Barber Electric Manufacturing Co.
2. Hoffman
B. Units shall be fabricated of code-gauge steel meeting or exceeding the requirements of the
NEC. Units shall have a gray, baked enamel finish and be provided without. Boxes of
galvanized steel shall only be as specifically noted.
C. Winged cover, single-door units shall have formed hinges, flush ring handle, and friction
catches on 14-and 16-gauge enclosures on units up to 18" x 18". Units larger than 18" x
18" and all 10- and 12-gauge enclosures shall be furnished with butt hinges,padlock hasp,
and staple.
D. Two(2) door enclosures shall be furnished with butt hinges,handle and 3-point catch,
padlock hasp, and staple.
E. Enclosures which are recessed in finished walls shall be constructed of code-gauge steel
and finished with gray, baked enamel. They shall be furnished with conduit knock-out
holes and flush combination trim cover and door assembly, two (2") inches higher and
two (2") inches wider than the box dimensions. The door shall be furnished with a
continuous, concealed-type hinge. Enclosures shall be furnished with panelboard-type
•w latches for enclosures with a door dimension of 36 inches or less. Tee handles shall be
furnished for enclosures with door dimensions over 36 inches and up to 48 inches. Vault
handles shall be furnished on all single or double door cabinets where the height
dimension of the door opening is over 48 inches high.
F. All enclosures shall be UL-listed.
G. Enclosures that will be provided for use as contactor enclosures shall conform to the
following list and shall have space for two additional contactors for future use.
16050-13 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
ow
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 so
JUNE 17,2005
D. All contactors shall be mounted in enclosures as indicated on the drawings. Enclosures aw
shall be suitably sized to provide adequate wire bending space and access for ease of
maintenance.
aw
2.11 SAFETY SWITCHES—NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: ■"
1. General Electric
2. Square D Co.
3. Siemens
4. Cutler Hammer
B. Safety switches shall be UL-listed and of the heavy-duty type. The switches shall be in
enclosures suitable for the environment in which they will be installed, be furnished with �^
appropriate voltage ratings, and be equivalent to the following Square D Co. types:
1. Fused 2- and 3-pole safety switch—Class 3110#H321N (30A, 240V).
2. Non-fused safety switches—Class 3110#HU361 (30A, 240V).
3. Fused or non-fused outdoor type (WP) safety switches in NEMA 3R enclosures—Class
3110#H321NRB, #HU361RB (30A).
4. Fused or non-fused safety switches with water/dust-tight NEMA 4 and 4X stainless
steel enclosures—Class 3110#321 DS, HU361 DS. Am
5. Fused or non-fused safety switches with drip/dust-tight NEMA 12 enclosures—Class
3110 #321AWK, HU361AWK.
.e
6. Fused switches which accept Class R fuses shall be furnished with Class R fuse
rejection kits.
2.12 FUSES —NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussman, Gould-Shawmut, Littlefuse.
B. Fuses shall be furnished and installed in fused disconnect switches,motor starters,
panelboards, and switchboards where specifically noted on the contract drawings. All
fuses shat I be of the same manufacturer.
C. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. Final tests and
inspections shall be made prior to energizing of the equipment, which shall include a
thorough cleaning, tightening, and review of all electrical connections and inspection of
all grounding conductors.
D. Circuits 601 to 6000 ampere shall be protected by current limiting, time-delay fuses. The
fuses must hold 500 percent of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times
rated current in 0.01 seconds or less, and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. with ""
ELECTRICAL 16050-12
�w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
NEM ' 1 - General Purpose, Indoors
NEMA 3R- Rainproof, Outdoors or Located in Prep Areas
The circuit breaker shall be front operable and padlockable in the "OFF" position.
2.9 MOTOR STARTERS—NOT USED
" A. Acceptable Manufacturers: G.E., Square D., Siemens—ITE, Cutler Hammer
B. All electric motor starters shall conform to requirements of AIEE,NEMA, UL,NEC, and
shall be suitable for required load,duty, voltage phase, frequency, service,and location.
All starters shall be full voltage, non-reversing, Class A200. NEMA starter size shall be
as indicated on drawings.
C. All magnetic starters shall have hand-off-automatic selector switches in cover unless
otherwise indicated. Starters shall be surface-mounted except where flush- mounted in
finished areas. Furnish remote push buttons where noted. All starters shall be equipped
with fused 120 volt control circuits and transformers where necessary.
D. All magnetic starters shall include overload and low voltage protection and two (2) sets of
auxiliary make and break contacts unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All magnetic
starters shall have overload protection on all three.phases.
E. On all 208 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire starter circuits, the Electrical Contractor shall install the
neutral wire for the 120-volt control circuit.
* F. Combination fused disconnect switch/magnetic starters shall be provided with UL Class
RK5 fuses. The assembled unit shall be UL-listed to handle fuses sized at 200 percent of
the motor full load current that it serves. Actual fuses provided shall be sized at 125
percent of the motor full load current or as indicated on the drawings.
2.10 CONTACTORS —NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D
,k B. All contactors provided for lighting control shall be electrically held, normally closed,
rated for 600V -20 ampere tungsten, ballast, and general-use loads. All contactors shall
have open 4-pole forms with 120V -60Hz control coils. Provide Square D Class 8903,
Type LO.
C. All contactors provided for power control shall be definite purpose type, rated for
applicable voltage and amperage as indicated by the drawings. Amperage values given on
the drawings shall be interpreted as full load inductive values when selecting the
appropriate model. All contactors shall have open pole forms with 120V - 60Hz control
coils. Provide Square D Class 8910, Type DPA.
w.
16050-11 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
an
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ,W
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
am
G. Warranty
1. All pro4s shall be warranted for a period of one year from the date of acceptance.
2.7 ANTI-SWEAT INTERFACE CONTROL PANEL—NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Corn-Trol
B. Provide a low voltage relay control system utilizing solid state relays for control of all
refrigerated case anti-sweat branch circuits as indicated by the drawings and requirements
of this section. It is defined to include but not be limited to:
1. Anti-sweat interface panel, which shall provide the ability to control up to 20 internally
housed solid state relays for control of 120 volt branch circuits. Each panel shall have
(4) 4-pole relays and (2) 2-pole relays,terminal strips for branch circuit and control ..
wiring connections, (1) solid state relay output card with holder, 24 VAC transformer,
(2)cooling fans and separate high and low voltage wiring ducts. The control panel
shall be Com-Trol#40TD300G06.
2. Each relay shall be wired for control through a relay output of the solid state relay
output card.
3. Maximum rating per anti-sweat heater circuit is 16 amperes.
4. Where assemblies are indicated on the drawings as prefabricated within modular
panelboard systems enclosures, components of the system can be purchased separately
from Com-Trol.
2.8 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS—NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. General Electric
2. Square D Co.
3. Siemens
4. Cutler Hammer
B. All enclosed circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA, UL, and the NEC as approved ..
assemblies. The unit shall be suitable for required load, duty, voltage, phase, frequency,
service, and location. .�
C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded case, UL-listed, CSA-certified, IEC-
rated, and meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-37513. Frame size and trip
rating shall be as designated on the drawings.
D. The circuit breaker enclosure shall be surface mounted and be suitable for the appropriate
climate per the following NEMA classifications: AM
ELECTRICAL 16050-10 MW
MR
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
chassis with screw mount terminations for incoming line power and separate screw
terminations for line select tap. Power supply to be dual rated for 120/277 VAC,
60HZ, +10, -15 percent. Incoming line power to be fused with replaceable time delay
fuse. Output to be line filtered to reduce noise emissions and power line spikes with an
integral thermal magnetic breaker built-in to serve as protective device and on/off
switch. Provide surface mount enclosure with hinged, lockable door, which, shall
provide easy access to the low-voltage, Class 2 wiring area. High-voltage areas shall
be covered to protect operators and/or maintenance personnel. Provide low-voltage
relay control chassis- code gauge, zinc-plated or galvanized steel. The chassis shall be
mounted and secured in the enclosure leaving a wiring gutter of sufficient width to
provide ample space for relay and branch circuit wires and feeders. There shall be a
barriered wireway to isolate Class 2 equipment from the class 1 wiring gutter.
Mounting provisions for up to 48 relays with single plug-in connectors shall be
provided. Screw type terminations for low-voltage input switch wiring shall be
+ provided.
D. Submittals - Shall be furnished by manufacturer for approval by the engineer and must be
approved in writing before being shipped from the manufacturer and shall consist of:
1. Manufacturer shall submit in bill-of-material form an itemized list of all materials
supplied to meet the specifications.
2. Manufacturer shall submit dimensional drawings of lighting control panels.
E. Quality Assurance
1. The manufacturer of the lighting control equipment shall have been actively engaged in
the manufacture of the types and capacities required for the application for at least ten
years. The listing of a manufacturer as approved does not imply automatic approval of
the installation. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that
submittals of material meet the performance specifications contained herein. All
components and assemblies shall be factory pretested and burned-in as a system for 48
hours prior to shipping.
+ ► F. Customer Support Services
1. 1.Start-up service shall be available from the manufacturer by trained representatives
to program the system and to verify the proper installation and operation of the system.
2. 2.Manufacturer's trained factory representatives shall be available for on-site training.
3. 3.Technical support shall be available from applications engineers and field service
technicians for the duration of the warranty period.
4. 4.Extended service coverage shall be available through maintenance contracts.
W 5. 5.Replacement components shall be typically available within 24 hours from the
factory for the duration of the warranty period.
16050-9 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
so
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE an
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
.w
M. Circuit breakers used for controlling lighting circuits shall be UL-rated for switching duty
and be U.L.-labeled "SWD".
as
2.6 AUTOMATED RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM—NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers so
1. General Electric Type TLC.
2. Watt Stopper Smartwired Contactor Panel. dw
B. Provide a low voltage relay control system. Extent of relay control panel
C. work is indicated by the drawings and by the requirements of this section. It is defined to ■®
include but not be limited to:
1. Relay control panel, which shall provide the ability to control up to 48 internally
.w
housed relays for control of lighting and miscellaneous electrical loads. Each panel
shall have a low voltage control chassis, associated low voltage switch inputs,power
supply, assignable zone programming.
2. Relays shall be single pole, single throw mechanically latching devices with the
following ratings:
a. 1.0 HP at 125VAC, 20A, 125 VAC Tungsten.
b. 1.5 HP at 250VAC, 20A, 277 VAC Ballast.
c. Each relay shall contain an interlocked set of auxiliary contacts rated at 1 AMP at �..
30 VAC to report position feedback.
d. Zero- crossing type.
e. Capable of 200,000 operations.
3. Each relay shall be individually programmable up to 8 events per day. Any input
device or programmable parameter shall have the ability to be assigned to any relay
even if they exist are assigned to other zones to allow zone overlapping and a full
control matrix.
4. 4.Control features shall include:
a. Assignable time delay
b. Bypass on/off and normal .�
c. The relay shall respond to dry contact inputs from the Owner's building
management system (Com-trol).
5. Provide pre-assembled and pre-wired panels complete with low-voltage control
chassis, relays and associated wiring. Provide separate enclosures, chassis and trim to
allow shipment of enclosures for rough in. Provide a low-voltage lighting control ..�
module, of plug-in style for easy replacement and upgrade with screw type fasteners to
secure module to chassis. This module shall have a convenient pushbutton keypad and
LCD alphanumeric display. Provide integrally mounted power supply in removable .�
ELECTRICAL 16050-8 �•
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3. Si mens
4. Cutler-Hammer
B. The panelboards shall conform to standards of NEMA Publication PB-1,be UL-listed,
and shall be of the type and size as shown on the drawings. Each cabinet shall be
complete with a hinged, locking metal door and a cardholder for a directory. Panelboards
shall have distributed phase bussing throughout. Panelboard interiors shall feature bolt-on
circuit breaker mounting only. Where specific frame sizes or circuit breakers are listed,
..� the NEMA standard interrupting rating for this frame shall be minimum. All panels rated
at 100 amperes and larger shall have a door-in-door cover.
C. All panelboards shall be furnished with the appropriate lugs or main circuit breakers,
branch circuit breakers including spares, and circuit breaker space as noted on the panel
schedules. Any special devices, such as panelboard-mounted contactors, circuit breaker
locks, isolated ground bus, or sub-feed and through-feed lugs, shall be provided as called
for in the panel schedules on the drawings. Provide an oversized enclosure to
accommodate these special features as required.
D. All panelboards shall be furnished with tumbler locks on the doors. All locks shall be
keyed alike.
E. All trims shall be secured with machine screws.
F. All panels shall have an equipment ground bus.
G. A neatly typed index of circuits and loads fed that reflect as-built conditions shall be
inserted in each card holder on the back of each panelboard cover.
H. In general,the panelboards shall be mounted so that the top circuit breaker is no more than
six (6') feet above the floor.
I. All panelboards,transformers, and distribution switchboards shall be of the same
manufacturer.
J. Load centers shall not be used unless specified on the drawings or elsewhere in this
specification.
K. Branch circuit breakers shall be bolt on, quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic type
with visible trip position. All multi-pole breakers shall have a common trip. Do not use
single-pole breakers equipped with handle ties for multi-pole use. The minimum
integrated short-circuit rating shall be 10,000 AIC RMS symmetrical for 240 volt
panelboards; 14,000 AIC RMS symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards.
L. Branch circuit breakers with ground fault circuit interrupter shall be used where specified
on the drawings. GFI circuit breakers shall be provided for branch circuit overload, short-
circuit, and ground fault interruption. The circuit breakers shall be UL-labeled Class A.
4.
16050-7 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.4 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Acceptable/Manufacturers: Refer to the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the drawings.
B. Lighting equipment shall be furnished and installed as specified on drawings, complete
with lenses, glassware, and accessories and shall be ready for operation. Any fixture,
which is chipped, cracked, and/or otherwise defective shall be removed and replaced.
C. All lighting fixtures shall be UL-listed.
D. All metal surfaces of fixtures and plaster frames, except non-ferrous types, shall be treated ap
with rust inhibitor and finish coat adherence properties before finish coats are applied.
Finish coats shall be synthetic enamels and shall be baked on at approximately 320o F.
E. A 12-gauge iron safety wire shall be run from opposite sides of each fixture and be
connected directly to the building structure above. Grid clips shall be used to secure the
fixture directly to the grid.
F. Ceiling hung surface or pendant fixtures shall be screw-mounted to backboxes, which are
securely attached to building structure. A 12-gauge iron safety wire shall also be run from
the back box directly to building structure.
G. Recessed down-lights shall be supported by the grid using hanger bars and T-bar ••
mounting clips. A 12-gauge iron safety wire shall be run from each recessed fixture and
connected directly to building structure above.
H. Ballasts for linear T8 and T5 systems shall be instant start, UL listed, Class P, Type 1,
CSA certified and with audible noise rating of Class A. Ballasts shall have total harmonic
distortion less than 10%, shall provide for a minimum starting temperature of 0°F, and ..
shall be provided with .88 or 1.18 ballast factor as called for by the drawings. Input
voltage shall be 120/277 universal. Compact fluorescent T4 and T5 ballasts shall perform
to the criteria noted above and shall also incorporate end of lamp life sensing protection. ..
All ballasts provided for the project shall be listed on the Northeast Utilities eligible
ballast list for compliance with the rebate program.
I. All lamps for the project shall be provided and installed under Division 16. Lamps shall ..
be as listed in the lighting fixture schedule -No substitution.
J. Lamps shall be warrantied for a period of one year starting on the date of substantial .A
completion and turnover to the Owner.
2.5 PANELBOARDS —NOT USED
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. General Electric
2. Square D Co.
ELECTRICAL 16050-6
on
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
go RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
voltage rating. Multi-conductor cables shall also show the number of insulated
conductors on the outer surface.
! ► 7. Conductor ampacities, operating temperatures and coverings shall all be in compliance
with the N.E.C.
B. Conductor and Cable Types:
1. Type THW shall be moisture/heat-resistant thermoplastic, PVC-insulated with no outer
jacket for use in 75o C maximum operating temperature in wet and dry locations.
2. Type THWN shall be moisture/heat-resistant thermoplastic, PVC-insulated with a
nylon or equivalent outer jacket for use in 75o C maximum operating temperature in
wet and dry locations.
3. Type THHN shall be heat-resistant thermoplastic, PVC-insulated with a nylon or
equivalent outer jacket for use in 90o C maximum operating temperature in dry
locations.
4. Type XHHW shall be moisture/heat-resistant, cross-linked, synthetic polymer-
insulated for use in 90o C maximum operating temperature in dry locations and 75o C
maximum operating temperature in wet locations.
5. Type MC (metal-clad) or interlocked cable shall be a UL-labeled factory assembly with
one or more conductors, with Type THHN insulation, each individually insulated and
enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocking metal tape. All multiwire branch circuits
that will be provided for electric discharge lighting, fluorescent lighting, and all non-
linear loads (i.e. computer processors) shall have an oversized neutral conductor as part
of the assembly. The oversized neutral shall be sized at a minimum of 150% of the
phase conductor ampacity. Acceptable manufacturers for the oversized neutral MC
cable: AFC Cable Systems "Super Neutral."
6. Type MI (Mineral Insulated)cable shall be a factory assembly of one or more
conductors insulated with magnesium oxide and enclosed in a liquid tight and gas tight
continuous copper or alloy steel sheath. The cable provided shall be suitable for
special applications with maximum operating temperatures of 250 degrees celsius.
7. Type NM (Romex) shall be two and three conductor polyvinyl chloride insulated wire
with polyvinyl chloride jacket suitable for concealed work in dry locations at 60°C.
Ground wire shall be bare copper. Type NM cable shall not be used in wet location
areas.
2.3 CONNECTORS - (CABLE AND WIRE)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Buchanon, Burndy, Thomas & Betts, O/Z Gedney, 3M
Scotchlok, Ideal, Amp.
16050-5 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
MW
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 or
JUNE 17,2005
3. Surface Raceways: Raceways shall be constructed with a steel base and cover and 00
standard' uff finish. The base shall have entrance knockouts and screw piercings on
approximately eight (8") inch centers. The raceways shall be UL-labeled and 40
manufactured by Wiremold or acceptable equivalent. Fittings made by the same
manufacturer and designed for use with the raceway shall be used as required. Specific
raceway model numbers and lengths are as shown on the drawings or stated in the ..�
specifications.
C. Minimum Sizes:
1. Conduit and EMT- 3/4-inch, unless otherwise noted.
2. Flexible Metallic Conduit- 1/2-inch.
3. Wireway—4" x 4"
4. Surface Raceway- Wiremold#200, #500, #700, #G-3000.
D. Conduit Bodies and Fittings:
1. For RGS and IMC conduit types, all couplings, connectors, nipples, and all types of
conduit bodies shall be hot-dipped galvanized with threaded joints.
2. For EMT conduit, all couplings, connectors, nipples, and all types of conduit bodies
shall be zinc-coated(galvanized) steel with set screw-type fittings.
3. For PVC conduit, all couplings, connectors, nipples, and all types of conduit bodies
shall be Schedule 40 and assembled with a cement specifically intended for use with ..
PVC.
4. For FMC and Liquid-tight FMC, all connectors shall be zinc-coated (galvanized) steel,
suitable for wet location. *
2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. General:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Carol Cable, General Cable, Essex Wire and Cable,
Southwire, American Insulated Wire.
2. All conductors shall be copper.
3. All building lighting and power conductors shall be rated at 600 volts, be UL-listed, .�
and carry the appropriate UL label.
4. All conductors#10 AWG and smaller shall be stranded unless they are provided as part
of a cable assembly such as Type NM or MC.
5. All conductors#8 AWG or larger shall be stranded.
6. The outer surface of each conductor and cable shall be continuously marked along the
entire length to show UL label, conductor material, conductor size, insulation type, and
ELECTRICAL 160504
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The delivery, storage, and handling of all materials, equipment, and systems delivered to
and stored on site relative to this division shall be in accordance with Section 01600 -
'Materials and Equipment.'
"" PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
we
A. Conduits:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: National, Triangle, Pittsburgh, Kaiser, Rome, Republic,
Anaconda.
2. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit(RGS): The conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized
steel with chromate finish. All threads shall be galvanized after cutting. The conduit
shall be UL-labeled and conform to the latest revision of Federal Specification WWC-
581 and ANSI C80.1.
' 3. Intermediate Metallic Conduit(IMC): The conduit shall be intermediate or thinwall,
hot-dipped steel with chromate finish. All threads shall be galvanized after cutting.
The conduit shall be UL-labeled,manufactured in accordance with UL 1242, and
conform to the latest revision of Federal Specification WWC 581.
4. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): The tubing shall be thinwall, hot-dipped galvanized
+ ► steel with chromate finish. The tubing shall be UL-labeled and conform to Federal
Specification WWC-563 and ANSI Specification C80.3.
5. Rigid,Non-metallic Conduit: Conduit shall be UL-labeled, rigid,polyvinyl chloride
(PVC), Schedule 40. It shall be thickwall and rated for 90o C.
6. Flexible Metallic Conduit(FMC): The conduit shall be constructed of galvanized,
" single-strip, spirally wound, interlocked steel. The conduit shall be UL-labeled and
conform to the latest revision of Federal Specification WWC-566.
7. Liquid-tight Flexible Metallic Conduit: The conduit shall be constructed with a
galvanized, spirally wound, interlocked, steel core with an extruded,thermoplastic
covering. The conduit shall be UL-labeled.
B. Wireways: - NOT USED
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: National, Keystone, Wiremold, Square D.
2. Wireways shall be constructed in accordance with UL 870 for "Wireways, Auxiliary
Gutters and Associated Fittings." The complete wireway shall be constructed of sheet
metal finished with a rust inhibiting, phosphatizing coating and gray, baked enamel
finish. Wireway shall be furnished with screw covers and be without knockouts.
Dimensional requirements of wireways shall be as designated on the drawings and
determined by the N.E.C.
16050-3 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 w.
JUNE l7,2005
B. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning controls will be furnished under Section 15900
unless otherwise noted. —NOT USED
C. Section 16113 - Underfloor Ducts—NOT USED "W
D. Section 16264 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply—NOT USED
A. Section 16426 -Distribution Switchboards—NOT USED
B. Section 16440 -Modular Panelboard Systems—NOT USED ..
C. Section 16461 —Transformers—NOT USED
D. Section 16481 - Motor Control Center—NOT USED
E. Section 16496 -Automatic Transfer Switch—NOT USED
F. Section 16620 - Emergency Generation—NOT USED
G. Section 16721 -Fire Alarm System—NOT USED
H. Section 16800 - EMS Cabling System—NOT USED
I. Section 17100 - Security System—NOT USED
J. Section 17200 - Sound System—NOT USED
K. Section 17300 - Voice System—NOT USED
L. Section 17400 - Data/Fiber Infrastructure—NOT USED
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Quality Assurance requirements as described in paragraph 1.03 of Section 16010 -
'General Conditions for Electrical Trades' - shall apply to all materials and methods �.
described within this section and within the entirety of Division 16.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The codes, standards, and references as described in paragraph 1.09 of Section 16010 -
'General Conditions for Electrical Trades' - shall apply to all materials and methods
described within this section and within the entirety of Division 16.
1.5 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. All submittals and substitutions shall be in accordance with Section 01300.
MW
ELECTRICAL 16050-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
�w PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A291-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, General Requirements of the Project Manual" apply to all work of this
section..
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. It is the intent of this section of the specifications to establish a standard of quality and
performance characteristics for basic materials and installation methods used under
Division 16. PART 2: PRODUCTS of this section provides a description of basic
electrical products. PART 3: EXECUTION of this section provides a basic description of
installation methods to be used for all electrical work. Individual trade sections and
drawings shall be referred to for specific products, which may be permitted for use or
restricted from use on this project.
D. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
locations, sizes, types, and details of work described in this section, including but not
limited to the following:
1. Raceways
2. Wire and cable
3. Lighting fixtures
4. Panelboards—NOT USED
5. Motor starters—NOT USED
6. Disconnect switches—NOT USED
7. Fuses—NOT USED
8. Pullbox and cabinet enclosures
+■! 9. Wall switch and outlet boxes—NOT USED
10. Devices—NOT USED
11. Coverplates—NOT USED
12. Seals and special fittings
13. Temperature recorders—NOT USED
14. Warning tapes—NOT USED
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS —NOT USED
A. Heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing equipment shall be provided and
installed under Division 15 and wired under this section. —NOT USED
16050-1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
yew RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
D. Non-TCLP compliant lamps shall be recycled utilizing the services of one of the
following companies:
1. Northeast Lamp Recycling, Inc.
250 Main Street
East Windsor, CT 06088
860/292-1992
2. Global Recycling Technology
P.O. Box 651
Randolph, MA 02368
617/341-6080
3. Salesco Systems
40 Messina Drive
Braintree, MA 02184
800/368-8878
4. Lighting Recycling, Inc.
15 Buckminster Road
Brookline, MA 02146
617-734-1047
5. Full Circle Inc.
4 Stephanie Circle
Woburn, MA 01801
a 617/939-5700
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
+� 16010-13 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
TRADES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE r
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. See sections indicated in paragraph 1.02 - 'Related Work' - of this section.
1.29 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all material and workmanship under these specifications
and contract for a period of one(1) year from the date of final acceptance by Owner.
B. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment,materials,
or workmanship, when so directed by the Engineer, shall be corrected or replaced
immediately by this Contractor without expense to the Owner. Such repairs or
replacements shall be made to the Engineer's satisfaction.
1.30 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS �.
A. Furnish, place and maintain proper guards for the prevention of accidents and any other
necessary construction required to secure the safety of life and property.
B. All equipment that is removed from the building as part of project demolition shall be
evaluated to determine if hazardous waste handling procedures are required. Various
elements that shall be considered as hazardous waste are as follows:
1. Fluorescent, neon and HID lamps that are non-TCLP compliant.
2. Lighting fixture ballasts containing PCB's.
3. Dry cell lead containing batteries, cadmium containing batteries and mercury
containing batteries (i.e., fire alarm panel, security control panel, exit signs, emergency
lighting units, etc.)
4. Wet cell batteries containing electrolytic solutions (i.e., emergency generator, etc.)
5. Thermostats containing mercury ampules.
6. Mercury containing equipment. (i.e., gauges, manometers, relays, circuit boards, etc.)
7. Anti-freeze (i.e., Emergency Generator).
8. Waste Oil (i.e., Emergency Generator). .�
C. Refer to Hazardous Waste Regulations for rules governing hazardous waste handling and
disposal under the Universal Waste Rule. Hazardous waste that can be handled as
Universal Waste are as follows:
1. Batteries.
2. Thermostats.
3. Mercury containing lamps.
4. Mercury Containing devices.
ELECTRICAL 16010-12
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
the Owner's representative in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment
furnished. The Contractor shall give at lest 48 hours'notice to the Owner and the Engineer
in advance of this period.
C. The Contractor shall furnish to the General Contractor for delivery to the Engineer two (2)
complete bound sets of typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and
maintaining all systems and equipment included in this division. All instructions shall be
submitted in draft form for review prior to final issue. Manufacturer's advertising
literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instruction.
D. In the above-mentioned instructions,the Contractor shall include the maintenance
schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this section.
E. The Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routine maintenance of all
equipment furnished under his respective section to assure accessibility to all devices.
F. An authorized manufacturer's representative shall attest in writing that his equipment has
been properly installed prior to start-up of any major equipment. The following
equipment will require this inspection: Pumps, air conditioning equipment, controls,air
handling equipment, and boilers. These letters will be bound into the operating and
maintenance books.
�w G. Refer to individual trade sections for any other particular requirements related to operating
instructions.
• 1.27 ADJUSTING AND TESTING
A. After all the equipment and accessories to be furnished are in place, they shall be put in
final adjustment and subjected to such operating tests so as to assure the Engineer that
they are in proper adjustment and in satisfactory, permanent operating condition. This
requirement shall apply to all electrical systems, and shall not be limited to the systems
provided and installed under Division 16 (owner provided equipment as well as contractor
supplied).
B. Where requested by the Engineer, a factory-trained service-engineering representative
shall inspect the installation and assist in the initial start-up and adjustment of the
equipment. The period of these services shall be for such time as necessary to secure
proper installation and adjustments. After the equipment is placed in permanent
operation,the service-engineering representative shall supervise the initial operation of the
equipment and instruct the personnel responsible for operation and maintenance of the
equipment. The service-engineering representative shall notify the Contractor in writing
that the equipment was installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and is
operating as intended by the manufacturer.
1.28 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit record drawings under provisions of Section 01700.
16010-11 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
TRADES
ow
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 �r
JUNE 17,2005
1.23 QUIET OPERATION
A. If objectionable noises or vibrations are produced and transmitted to occupied portions of
the building by transformers, conduits, or other parts of the electrical work, the Contractor
shall make such changes or additions as necessary without extra cost to the Owner.
1.24 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall provide the necessary skilled labor to assure the proper operation and
to provide all required current and preventative maintenance for all equipment and
controls provided under this division until final acceptance of the building by the Owner.
The Contractor shall not assume acceptance of the building by the Owner until he receives
written notification.
B. The Contractor shall receive calls for any and all problems experienced in the operation of
the equipment provided under this division, and he shall take steps to immediately correct '■"
any deficiencies that may exist.
C. The Contractor shall check all controls in the building to ascertain that they are ,.
functioning as designed. This shall apply to all thermostats, aquastats,humidistats,
freezestats, firestats, etc. This portion of the work shall be performed by the Contractor
who installed the controls.
D. Where normal preventative maintenance for any piece of equipment requires special tools,
the Contractor shall furnish the appropriate tools for that piece of equipment.
1.25 CLEANING
A. Refer to Section 01700 - 'Contract Closeout' - for all additional cleaning requirements.
B. The Contranctor shall thoroughly clean all light fixtures (housings, lenses, louvers,
diffusers, etc.) and other equipment of all foreign substances - fingerprints, smudges, etc.,
inside and out, before being placed in operation.
C. During the course of construction, all conduits shall be capped in an acceptable manner to .s.
ensure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Upon completion of all work under the contract,the Contractor shall remove from the
premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or
grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left
clean.
1.26 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Refer to Section 01700 - 'Contract Closeout' - for additional requirements.
B. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled
labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment to fully instruct the Owner or
ELECTRICAL 16010-10
..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
.o RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.19 TEM tORARY OPENINGS
A. The Contractor shall ascertain from his examination of the drawings whether any special
temporary openings in the building will be required for the admission of apparatus
provided under this division, and he shall notify the General Contractor or the
Construction Manager accordingly. In the event of failure of the Contractor to give
sufficient notice to arrange for these openings during construction,the Contractor shall
assume all costs of providing such openings thereafter.
1.20 SHUTDOWNS
A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing
operating system,the connection of the new system shall be performed at such time as
designated by the Engineer or the Owner's representative.
B. The Engineer and the Owner shall be notified of the estimated duration of the shutdown
period at least ten(10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed.
„ C. Work shall be arranged for continuous performance whenever possible. The Contractor
shall provide all necessary labor, including overtime if required,to assure that existing
operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make
„ necessary connections.
1.21 PAINTING
A. All finish painting in completed areas shall be performed under Division 9 of the
specifications.
B. Electrical equipment shall be provided with touch-up paint. Paint shall be applied as
required to maintain the factory finish.
C. All plywood backboards shall be painted black by Division 16000 prior to the installation
of any equipment.
aw 1.22 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS OF EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHER
DIVISIONS
A. Unless otherwise specified, all wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 16.
B. All power wiring shall be furnished and installed complete from power source to motor or
equipment junction box, including power wiring through the starters, under Division 16.
All starters not factory-mounted on or in the equipment shall be provided and installed
under Division 16.
C. See Sections 15400, 15500, and 15600 for delegation of control wiring responsibility.
16010-9 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
TRADES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
.Aa
1.16 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavationland backfilling shall be carried out under Division 2 of the specifications .»
unless it is otherwise indicated in individual trade sections.
B. It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to coordinate sizes,depths, fill,and
bedding requirements with the Division 2 Contractor and any other excavation work
required under this division.
1.17 WATERPROOFING
A. Where any work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete and floors in wet
areas, the method of installation shall be reviewed by the Engineer before work is done.
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking, and flashing required to make
openings absolutely watertight.
1.18 ACCESSIBILITY AND ACCESS PANELS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases,the **
adequate O thickness of partitions, and the adequate clearance in double partitions and
hung ceilings for the proper installation of the work.
B. Locate all equipment, which must be serviced, operated,or maintained in fully accessible
positions. Equipment shall include,but not be limited to: Motors, controllers, coils,
valves, switchgear, drain points, etc. Access doors shall be furnished if required for better ..�
accessibility. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to allow better
accessibility, but changes of magnitude or which involve extra cost shall not be made
without the acceptance of the Engineer. *�
C. Access doors in walls, ceilings, floors, etc., shall be furnished by the appropriate
subcontractor and installed by the General Contractor. It is the responsibility of the
Electrical Contractor to coordinate and provide information regarding the sizes and
quantities of access doors required for his work. The Contractor shall arrange his work in
such a manner as to minimize the quantity of access doors required- such as grouping
junction boxes in the same area. Where possible, locate boxes in already accessible areas-
such as lay-in ceilings, etc.
D. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall physically demonstrate that all
equipment and devices installed have been located and/or provided with adequate access
panels for repair, maintenance, and/or operation. Any equipment not so furnished shall be
relocated or provided with additional access panels by the installing Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
E. Permanent ladders for access to equipment shall be furnished and installed by the General
Contractor.
.k
ELECTRICAL 16010-8 /11P
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
au
1.13 SUPPORTS
A. Shop drawings of all equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before they
are constructed. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish to the Division 3 Contractor all
required dimensional and necessary loading information, indicating equipment footprint
size and desired anchor bolt locations.
B. Construction of foundations, supports, pads, bases, and piers where mounted on the floor
shall be of the same finish quality as the adjacent and surrounding flooring material.
C. Unless otherwise shown, all equipment shall be securely attached to the building structure
in an acceptable manner in compliance with applicable codes. Attachments shall be of a
strong and durable nature; any attachments that are insufficient in the opinion of the
Engineer shall be replaced as directed without extra cost to the Owner.
D. All equipment supports shall be designed and constructed such that the equipment will be
capable of resisting both vertical and horizontal movement. The equipment shall be
positively anchored to the bases or supports to resist vertical movement and the equipment
aw or its support is to be provided with suitable restraints to resist horizontal movement from
any direction.
�.. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All cutting and patching shall be done by the General Contractor. The Contractor shall
furnish sketches showing the location and sizes of all openings,chases, etc., required for
the installation of work.
B. Work under this division shall include furnishing, locating, and setting inserts and/or
sleeves required before the floors and walls are built, or the Contractor shall be
responsible for cutting, drilling, or chopping where sleeves and inserts were not installed
or correctly located. The Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of
hangers.
C. Exercise extreme caution when core drilling or punching openings in concrete floor slabs
in order to avoid cutting or damaging structural members. No structural members shall be
cut without the written acceptance of the Structural Engineer, and all such cutting shall be
done in a manner directed by him.
1.15 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING
A. The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding,rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for
erection and delivery onto the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished under
this division. Remove same from premises when no longer required.
a� 16010-7 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
TRADES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 aw
JUNE 17,2005
IRI Industrial Risk Insurers
ISO Insurance Services Office
MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NEC National Electric Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NOFI National Oil Fuel Institute
NSC National Safety Council
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
SBI Steel Boiler Industry (Division of Hydronics Institute)
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
STI Steel Tank Institute
UL Underwriters' Laboratories
C. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and
recommendations of the NFPA,the requirements of the local utility companies, the
recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction, and the
requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. aw
D. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, MW
materials, services, apparatus, and drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws,
ordinances, rules, and regulations, whether shown on drawings and/or specified or not.
1.10 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Sections 01300 and ,.
01600.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600, along with any
special requirements indicated in the subsequent sections.
1.12 WORKING PROCEDURE
A. At all times during construction, the Electrical Subcontractor shall keep his material,
equipment and tools neatly and safely organized in the area assigned to him by the
General Contractor.
B. He shall keep the premises clean of all packages, boxes, cartons, and wrappings of his
materials, and shall remove from the premises all such rubbish and other waste material at
frequent intervals. „
ELECTRICAL 16010-6 .�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancies between actual measurements and those
indic ted which prevent following good practice or which interfere with the intent of the
drawings and specifications,he shall notify the Engineer and shall not proceed with that
work until he has received instructions from the Engineer.
1.9 REFERENCES
A. The following codes and standards listed below apply to all electrical work. Wherever
codes and/or standards are mentioned in these specifications,the latest edition or revision
shall be followed unless noted otherwise:
The Massachusetts State Building Code
The BOCA National Building Code
NFPA-70 (Massachusetts Electrical Code—2005 Edition)
NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code)
B. The following standards shall be used where referenced by the following abbreviations:
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
ADC Air Diffusion Council
AGA American Gas Association
AIA American Institute of Architects
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
4M ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASE Association of Safety Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturing Association
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
FMG FM Global
FSSC Federal Specification
HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards
IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
16010-5 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
"' TRADES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.6 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices; obtain all permits; pay all government and
state sales taxes and fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections
or extensions in connection with his work; file all necessary approvals of all governmental
and state departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspections for
his work; and deliver a copy to the Engineer before request for acceptance and final
payment for the work.
1.7 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS
A. All work shall be carried out in conjunction with other trades, and full cooperation shall
be given in order that all work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference.
Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing
other Contractors, especially the General Contractor or Construction Manager, with
information as to openings, chases, sleeves, bases, inserts, equipment locations, panels, .w
etc., required by other trades.
B. The Contractors are required to examine all of the project drawings and mutually arrange
work so as to avoid interference with the work of other trades. In general, ductwork,
heating and sprinkler piping, and draining lines take precedence over water, gas, and
electrical conduits. In reflected ceiling layouts, the order of precedence shall be: light
fixtures, sprinkler heads, HVAC diffusers, miscellaneous electrical devices. The Engineer
shall make final decisions regarding the arrangement of work, which cannot be agreed
upon by the Contractors.
C. Where the work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or will interfere
with work of other trades, he shall assist in working out space conditions to make a
satisfactory adjustment.
D. If the work under a section is installed before coordinating with other divisions or sections -W
or so as to cause interference with work of other sections, the necessary changes to correct
the condition shall be made by the Contractor causing the interference, without extra
charge to the Owner. .•
1.8 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Before submitting his bid,the Contractor shall visit the site and shall become thoroughly
familiar with all conditions under which his work will be installed. He will be held
responsible for any assumptions, omissions, or errors he makes as a result of his failure to ,
become familiar with the site and the contract documents.
B. The Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established
benchmarks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all
measurements at the site, and check the correctness of same as related to the work.
ELECTRICAL 16010-4 ,,,�
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
legible lettering, the manufacturer's name or trademark, the model number, serial number,
and the seal or mark of the approved labeling agency.
1.4 INTENT
A. It is the intention of specifications and drawings to call for finished work,tested and ready
for operation.
B. Any apparatus, appliance, material,or work not shown on drawings but mentioned in the
specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work
complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation as determined by good trade
practice, even if not particularly specified, shall be furnished, delivered, and installed
under their respective divisions without any additional expense to the Owner.
C. Minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary for proper installation and
operation shall be included in the work as though they were hereinafter shown or
specified.
D. Work under each section shall include giving written notice to the Engineer of any
materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; believed to be in violation of
laws, ordinances,rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; or any necessary
items of work believed to be omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually
agreed that work under each section has included the cost of all required items for the
accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system, without extra compensation.
1.5 DRAWINGS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work
included in the contract. (Do not scale the drawings.) Consult the architectural drawings
and details for exact location of fixtures and equipment; where same are not definitely
located, obtain this information from the Architect.
B. Work under each section shall closely follow drawings in layout of work. Check
drawings of other divisions to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain
maximum headroom; where space conditions appear inadequate, Engineer shall be
notified before proceeding with installations.
C. The Engineer may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as
needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and/or for proper execution of the
work.
D. Where variances occur between the drawings and specifications or within either of the
documents, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity, or higher cost shall
an be included in the contract price. The Engineer shall decide on the item and the manner in
which the work shall be installed.
O
16010-3 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
TRADES
so
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.3 (QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 01400- 'Quality Control'- for additional requirements.
B. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as otherwise specifically
indicated, shall be new and of first-class quality and shall be furnished, delivered, erected,
connected, and finished in every detail and be so selected and arranged as to fit properly
into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first-
class standard article as accepted by industry standards shall be furnished.
C. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be
constantly in charge of the installation of the work together with all skilled workmen,
fitters, metal workers,welders,helpers, and laborers required to unload, transfer, erect, 'W
connect up, adjust, start, operate, and test each system.
D. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the drawings or specifications, all equipment �•
and materials shall be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and in accordance
with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such
tests as the manufacturer recommends. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be
available on the job site at the time of inspection.
E. All labor for installation of electrical systems shall be performed by experienced, skilled
tradesmen under the supervision of a licensed journeyman-foreman. All work shall be of
a quality consistent with good trade practice and shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike
manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work which, in his opinion, has
been installed in a substandard,dangerous,or unserviceable manner. The Contractor shall
replace said work in a satisfactory manner at no extra cost to the Owner.
F. Electrical equipment shall be UL-listed and approved and shall conform to the current
NEC standards.
G. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturer,
description, size, type, serial and model number, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to
facilitate maintenance or replacement. The nameplate of a subcontractor or distributor
will not be acceptable.
H. All welding shall be done by certified welders in accordance with the latest requirements
of the American Welding Society. Welder's certification shall be filed with the General
Contractor before welders start work and shall be available on site at all times.
I. If equipment or materials are installed before required reviews have been obtained,the
subcontractor responsible for same shall be liable for its removal and replacement,
including the work of the affected trades, at no additional cost to the Owner.
J. Labeling: All equipment and appliances specified herein shall be listed and labeled by an
approved agency to the relevant standard or standards required by the code. A permanent
factory-applied nameplate(s) shall be affixed to appliances on which shall appear in ..�,
ELECTRICAL 16010-2 „�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 16010 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15400 - Plumbing (For Pump Motors and Water Heaters/Coolers)-NOT USED
B. Section 15500 -Fire Protection(For Monitoring Tamper and Flow Devices)-NOT USED
C. Section 15600 -HVAC (For Factory-Installed Motors, Controllers, Accessories, and
Connections to Equipment)-NOT USED
D. Section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods-Electrical-NOT USED
E. Section 16113 - Underfloor Ducts-NOT USED
F. Section 16264 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply-NOT USED
G. Section 16426 - Distribution Switchboards-NOT USED
H. Section 16440 - Modular Panelboard Systems-NOT USED
I. Section 16461 - Transformers-NOT USED
J. Section 16481 - Motor Control Center-NOT USED
K. Section 16496 - Auto Transfer Switch-NOT USED
L. Section 16620 - Emergency Generation-NOT USED
M. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm System-NOT USED
N. Section 16800 - EMS Cabling-NOT USED
O. Section 17100- Security System (carried under Division 16)-NOT USED
P. Section 17200- Sound System(carried under Division 16)-NOT USED
Q. Section 17300- Voice System (carried under Division 16)-NOT USED
!*� R. Section 17400 - Data/Fiber Infrastructure (carried under Division 16)-NOT USED
16010-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
"' TRADES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
I
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
4w
a. One (1) coat: Moore's IMC Waterborne Epoxy Primer(M08/M09).
b. Two (2) coats: Moore's IMC Acrylic Epoxy Gloss (M44).
7. Interior aluminum metals:
a. One (1) coat: IronClad Alkyd Low Luster Metal & Wood Enamel (163).
b. Two (2) coats: Impervo Alkyd High Gloss Metal & Wood Enamel (363).
8. 8.Interior wood(opaque finish):
a. One(1) coat: Regal FirstCoat (216).
b. Two (2)coats: Regal AquaGlo (333).
9. Interior wood (natural finish):
a. One (1) coat: Sherwin Williams Wood Classics Sanding Sealer.
b. Two (2) coats: Sherwin Williams Wood Classics Oil Base Varnish, Satin.
10. Interior wood (stain finish):
a. One (1)coat: Sherwin Williams Wood Classics Oil Stain.
b. Two (2)coats: Sherwin Williams Wood Classics Polyurethane Varnish.
11. Interior and exterior traffic markings:
a. One (1)coat: Moore's IMC Safety &Zone Marking Latex (M58).
12. Interior&exterior steel pipe bollards:
a. One (1)coat: Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer(M06).
b. Two (2) coats: Urethane Alkyd Enamel (M22).
13. Interior concrete slabs-on-grade (sealing):
a. Two (2) coats: Sonocrete Kure-N-Seal 30 transparent high-gloss sealing and dust
proofing compound as manufactured by Sonneborn, Shakopee, MN; tel:
(800)433- 9517.
B. Colors shall be as selected by Big Y Foods, Inc. Verify and obtain approval of colors
before starting any work. The Contractor shall prepare samples at the job site, as required,
until colors and textures are satisfactory to Big Y Foods, Inc.
END OF SECTION
09900-9 PAINTING
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE w
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.4 ADJUSTING ..�
A. Following completion of painting of each space,removed items, including but not limited
to hardware and fixtures shall be reinstalled by workmen skilled in the trade involved.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of painting work this Contractor shall remove from premises all
scaffolding and equipment. He shall also remove from the premises all surplus materials,
empty containers and other debris resulting from his operation.s.
B. Area used for paint locker and mixing room shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of Owner.
C. Retouch finished work wherever necessary, as directed by Architect. .K
D. Leave all glass areas, floors, walks, hardware and other surfaces clean and free from any
paint, stain, spatterings, smears, or smudges which are the result of his operations.
E. Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left
clean and acceptable.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Standard of Quality: Manufactured products listed herein shall provide the standard of �.
quality required. Products indicated are manufactured by Benjamin Moore unless noted
otherwise.
1. 1.Exterior precast concrete:
a. One(1) coat: MoorcraftSuper Craft Latex Block Filler(285).
b. Two (2) coats: Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint(171). .w
2. Exterior drywall:
a. One (1) coat: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer(176). �.
b. Two (2) coats: Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint (171).
3. 3.Interior and exterior galvanized& ferrous metals:
a. One(1) coat: Moore's IMC DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss (M29).
b. Two (2) coats: IMC DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss (M29).
4. 4.Interior unit masonry and concrete:
a. One(1) coat: MoorcraftSuper Craft Latex Block Filler(285).
b. Two (2) coats: Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Flat(175). .�
5. Interior drywall:
a. One(1) coat: Regal FirstCoat (216).
b. Two (2) coats: Regal AquaVelvet(319).
6. Interior drywall (epoxy finish):
FINISHES 09900-8
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
a�w
6. In food preparation areas with ceramic tile or FRP wall finish,paint all exposed metal
door frames.
7. Paint the top edge of all sidewalk curbs (6" wide) as well as the front face of the curbs
one heavy coat of safety yellow. Stop the yellow paint where the sidewalk ramp meets
the pavement grade.
8. Paint supporting steel dunnage structures at rooftop refrigeration condensers with
materials specified herein for exposed ferrous metals.
F. Surfaces not to be painted:
1. Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical
parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan
shafts will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and
Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
nomenclature plates.
G. Finishing wood surfaces:
1. Edges of doors that have been trimmed during hanging and fitting shall be immediately
be given two (2) coats of the specified first coat material.
2. The surface shall be checked to insure that finishing nails have been properly set; then
all holes and surface imperfections shall be primed.
a. After priming, all holes and imperfections in finish surfaces shall be filled with
putty or plastic wood filler, colored to match the finish coat if natural finish is
required, allowed to dry, and sand papered smooth.
b. Interior wood surfaces to receive stained or natural finish, except as hereinafter
specified, shall be properly prepared to the approved shade and lightly sanded.
c. Excess filler shall be removed and the surface then sanded smooth. Each varnish
coat shall be lightly sanded prior to application of subsequent coat.
d. Where staining raises the grain, such surfaces shall be sanded prior to application
of subsequent coating.
e. Field applied coating shall consist of varnish or polyurethane. Each coat shall be
lightly sanded prior to application of subsequent coat.
3. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
4. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish
with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
5. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone
equipment before backboards are installed, if possible. If not,protect electrical
equipment adequately before applying paint.
09900-7 PAINTING
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE �.
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
10. Drywall:Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching
compound, then sand smooth patches to match adjacent surfaces.
11. Wood and Metal Doors: Seal top and bottom edges with specified primer.
12. Uncoated steel and iron surfaces: Remove grease, rust, scale, and dust from steel and
iron surfaces in accordance with Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP1. Where heavy coatings
of scale or contaminants are evident, clean in accordance with Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC-SP2 or other approved SSPC-SP method as needed.
13. Shop Primed steel surfaces: Remove loose primer and dust. Sand and feather edges to
smooth surface. Clean areas with solvent and spot prime bare metal surfaces with
appropriate metal primer or primer recommended by manufacturer.
14. On those walls which are to receive wall coverings, install sizing of the drywall
surfaces using a product as recommended by the wall covering manufacturer.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply each coat to uniform coating thickness in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, not exceeding manufacturer's specified maximum spread rate for indicated
surface; runs, drips, ridges, thins, brush marks, roller marks, orange-peel, or other
application imperfections are not permitted. ..
B. Allow manufacturer's specified drying time, and ensure correct coating adhesion, for each
coat before applying next coat.
w.
C. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to applying
each coat.
to
D. The hiding shall be complete.
E. Special painting details:
am
1. Paint each side of plywood panelboards in various rooms to which electrical,telephone
and/or similar equipment will be attached one coat of black semi-gloss enamel before
the equipment is attached.
2. Paint the visible portions of the interior of all supply or return ducts in the Sales Area
one coat of flat black enamel.
3. Omit prime coat where item is shop primed. Should items of miscellaneous metals,
structural steel, etc. be delivered without shop primer,this Contractor shall provide
primer as specified and the supplier of such materials shall pay all costs.
4. Paint parallel 4" wide strips in one heavy coat of safety yellow 12" o.c. on the floor
between doors as shown on the project drawings for emergency exits.
5. Paint interior&exterior concrete filled steel pipe bollards with materials specified
herein for exposed ferrous metals; color: "Safety Yellow."
FINISHES 09900-6
,.s
w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
4. Painting shall be so scheduled that dust and other contaminants from the construction
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
B. Surface preparation: Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition
to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance:
1. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods
recommended by coating manufacturer; seal stains and marks which cannot be
completely removed with primers, shellac, or other coating acceptable to paint
manufacturer any marks or defects that might bleed through paint finishes.
2. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of trisodium
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly dry.
3. Existing painted surfaces: Remove loose and peeling paint. De-gloss surface if
recommended by manufacturer; sand smooth. Clean entire surface prior to painting.
4. Aluminum Surfaces: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water.
Remove oxidation by acid etching and solvent washing. Apply specified primer as
soon as cleaned surfaces are dry.
5. Concrete and masonry surfaces: Remove dirt, stains, loose mortar, scale, salts,
alkalies, and other contaminants. Remove oils and grease with solution of trisodium
phosphate; rinse with clean water and allow to dry. Allow concrete and mortar to cure
a minimum of 28 days before priming.
„t 6. Concrete floors: Remove dirt and grease, acid etch, and rinse with clear water. Allow
to dry.
7. Galvanized surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils by solvent cleaning
(SSPC-SP 1) and allow to dry. Apply specified primer in accordance with manufacturer
instructions.
8. Interior wood surfaces: Wood should be clean and dry. Remove surface deposits of
sap or pitch by scraping and wiping clean with mineral spirits or VM&P Naphtha. Seal
knots and pitch pockets with shellac reduced with equal parts of shellac thinner
(denatured alcohol)before priming or with sandpaper and finishing with fine grit.
Remove sanding dust. Fill nail holes and other surface imperfections with putty or
spackling compound after primer has dried and sand lightly between coats with fine
grit sandpaper.
9. Exterior wood surfaces: Wood should be clean and dry. Remove surface deposits of
sap or pitch by scraping and wiping clean with mineral spirits or VM&P Naphtha. Seal
knots and pitch pockets with shellac reduced with equal parts of shellac thinner
(denatured alcohol)before priming or with appropriate primer as recommended by
manufacturer. Sand rough spots with the grain, starting with medium grit sandpaper
and finishing with fine grit. Remove sanding dust. Fill nail holes and other surface
imperfections with putty or spackling compound after primer has dried and sand lightly
between coats with fine grit sandpaper. Back prime exterior woodwork.
09900-5 PAINTING
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 "
JUNE 17,2005
3. Do not add additives, except as instructed or recommended by coating manufacturer.
4. Supply each coating material in quantity required for this section from a single
production run.
5. Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the product of a
single manufacturer.
6. Colors: Indicated on drawings.
B. Coating application accessories: Specified in this section or in coating manufacturer's M.
application instructions, including but not limited to, thinners, sealers,primers, cleaning
agents, etching agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Immediately prior to coating application, ensure that surfaces to receive coatings are dry.
B. Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture content within
tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using moisture measurement techniques
recommended by coating manufacturer.
C. Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive coatings for surface
imperfections and for contaminants which could impair performance or appearance of
coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale,oil, grease, mildew, algae,
or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or abrasions.
D. Correct the above conditions and other conditions which could impair performance or ..
appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface preparation procedures before
proceeding with coating application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection:
1. Remove or protect hardware, electrical plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, sprinkler
heads, lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings which are
adjacent to surfaces to receive coatings. •.�
2. Provide, install and maintain suitable coverings over entire period of painting work; all
drop cloths, barricades and other forms of protection as may be necessary to safeguard
and keep clean such adjoining work and equipment of others that will not be painted
and as required to preserve painted work free from damages of every nature.
3. Freshly painted surfaces shall be legibly posted as such immediately following their
completion.
FINISHES 099004
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures above 45T for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of
finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
a. Minimum application temperatures for latex paint: 45T for interiors; 50°F for
exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
b. Minimum application temperature for varnish and stain finishes: 65T for interior
or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
2. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow or when relative humidity is above
50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
3. Provide lighting level of 80 ft. candles (860 lx)measured mid-height at substrate
surface.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra materials: At the completion of work, supply to the Owner the following quantities
of each different type and each different color of paint coating used on the project for his
use in maintaining the project:
1. Exterior masonry paint: One (1) five-gallon container.
*� 2. Interior Sales Area drywall paint: One (1) five-gallon container.
3. All other paint types and colors: One (1)one-gallon container.
B. Paint for maintenance purposes shall be in new, unopened containers. Label each
container with color,texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products of one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co., 51 Chestnut Ridge Road, Montvale,NJ 07645, tel: (201) 573-
9600.
2. The Sherwin-Williams Company, Cleveland, OH 44115; tel: (800) 321-8194.
3. ICI, 925 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44115; tel: (800) 984-5444.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Acceptable products: Indicated in paragraph 3.06 - Schedule at the end of this section.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix
coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before
pplication. Do not dilute or thin coatings, except as instructed.
09900-3 PAINTING
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
a.
A. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning.
2. SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including installation for
each material specified for use.
a. Paint schedule: Submit schedule indicating specific paint for each surface.
2. Samples: Three (3) samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual color
and finish of each finish coating type, color, and finish to be applied.
3. Manufacturer's instructions: Manufacturer's printed application instructions for each "*
product, including product storage requirements and surface preparation requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint by same
manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use
only as recommended.
B. Regulatory requirements: Products shall conform to applicable state and local codes for .�
flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver and store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ••
application.
C. Establish and maintain storage area conditions for products of this section in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions until installation.
D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction over the
project.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental conditions: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to
environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied:
.0
FINISHES 09900-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 09900 PAINTING
I
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes,types, and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Painting and finishing of the following surfaces:
a. Exterior exposed ferrous metals.
b. Exterior precast concrete walls.
c. Exterior drywall.
d. Interior drywall (including prime coat only at all walls which will be covered by
wall coverings).
e. Interior unit masonry and concrete.
f. Interior exposed ferrous metals.
ft g. Interior wood (natural and opaque finishes).
h. Interior and exterior traffic marking.
i. Interior slab-on-grade sealing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03420- Prestressed/Precast Concrete Walls—NOT USED
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications
C. Section 06200-Finish Carpentry—NOT USED
D. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames—NOT USED
E. Section 08210 - Flush Wood Doors—NOT USED
F. Section 09250 -Gypsum Board
1.3 REFERENCES
uA.
FINISHES 09900-1
an
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2) A�`low third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand,to
p ovide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for
application of finish.
3. Cementious backer board: Prepare and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
4. Exterior gypsum board soffit: Use setting-type joint compound.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Correct damage and defects which may telegraph through finish Work.
B. Leave Work smooth and uniform, and ready for specified finishes.
3.4 CLEANING
A. At completion of installation, all rubbish shall be removed from building, leaving floors
broom clean, excess material, scaffolding, tools, and other equipment shall be removed
from building and jobsite.
END OF SECTION
.A
FINISHES 09250-14
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
c. Where gypsum board is vertically continuous, as at stairwells,provide horizontal
control joints at each floor level.
3. Special Trim: Install as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer'
instructions.
w H. Finishing:
1. Provide levels of gypsum board finish for locations as follows, in accordance with
Gypsum Association GA 214, "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum
Board Finish".
a. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas, except provide higher level of
finish as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings.
b. Level 2: Gypsum board substrate at tile, except remove tool marks and ridges.
c. Level 3: Gypsum board surfaces where heavy vinyl wall paper will be used.
d. Level 4: Gypsum board surfaces, except where another finish level is indicated.
2. Interior gypsum board:
a. Prefill:
1) Use setting-type joint compound. Mix joint compound according to
manufacturer's directions.
2) Fill joints between boards flush to top of eased or beveled edge.
3) Fill joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings in fire rated partitions.
4) Wipe off excess compound and allow compound to harden.]
b. Taping(Le'/4ve1 1):
1) Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints.
2) Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound.
3) Remove excess compound.
4) Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings.
c. First coat(Level 2):
1) Use taping or all-purpose drying-type compound.
2) Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound and allow to dry
completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3) Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over
exposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface.
d. Second coat(Level 3): After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat of
coat.
e. Third coat(Level 4):
1) After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat to
joints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 2-inches beyond edge of
second coat.
09250-13 GYPSUM BOARD
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
ww
c. Separate board from rough in and fixtures and fill space as recommended by
manufacturer.
d. Securely fasten boards to substrate as required.
e. Follow manufacturer's instructions for treatment of edge terminations.
f. At joints and corners, embed fiberglass tape in skim coat of mortar. ..
6. Gypsum shaftwall:
a. Erect gypsum board shaft liner for use as temporary shaft enclosure.
b. Screw attach base and face layers according to manufacturer's instructions, for both
vertical and horizontal applications.
c. Seal perimeters and openings to provide airtight installation.
d. Install sloped gypsum board cants on hoistway side of shaftwall where slabs or
beams project beyond shaftwall.
7. Curved gypsum board: .�
a. Provise board length such that one single board covers curved surface. Provide
board thickness as recommended by manufacturer for minimum bending radius, for .�
wet or dry application.
b. If wet application is used, evenly spray water on surface to be compressed when
board is hung. Stack boards with wet surfaces facing each other and cover stack
with polyethylene sheet. Allow boards to set at least one hour before application.
c. Install boards perpendicular to framing.
d. On concave installations, start fastening board at center of curve and work outward
to ends of boards.
e. On convex installations, begin board installation at one end of curved surface and
fasten board to framing as it is wrapped around curve.
f. Do not cut openings for penetrations until boards are installed and thoroughly dry.
G. Accessory installation:
1. Trim:
A.
a. Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum
board to supports, unless otherwise recommended by trim manufacturer.
b. Install metal corner beads at external corners. *�*
c. Install metal casing bead trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be
exposed or semi exposed.
2. Control joints:
a. Install control joints at junction of gypsum board partitions with walls or partition
of other finish material.
b. Install control joints within long runs of partitions, ceilings or soffits at
approximately 30' 0" on center or as indicated.
FINISHES 09250-12 ..
4w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
,'m RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
w
c. /Where shaftwall system cannot be positioned within 2-inches of shaft face of
structural beams, floor edges and similarprojections into shaft,provide
continuous 5/8-inch gypsum board cants to cover top of projections.
F. Board installation:
1. Single layer gypsum board on metal studs:
a. Loosely butt gypsum board joints together and neatly fit.
b. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges.
c. Maximum allowable gap at end joints: 1/8-inch.
d. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
e. Apply ceiling boards first where gypsum board ceilings and wall occur.
f. Cut openings in gypsum board to fit electrical outlets, plumbing, light fixtures and
piping snugly and small enough to be covered by plates and escutcheons. Cut both
face and back paper.
g. Screw board in place securely with screws spaced according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Single layer gypsum board on furring:
a. Apply gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to furring channel.
b. Center end joints over channel web; stagger end joints from those in adjacent rows
of board.
!* c. Fasten boards to furring channels with screws spaced according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Double layer gypsum board:
a. Fasten base layer to studs or furring with screws, and attach face layer using
laminating adhesive and screws, applied according to manufacturer's instructions.
b. Offset face-layer joints at least 10-inches from parallel base-layer joints.
c. Screw both layers to metal supports at double layer ceiling applications and where
required for fire-rated construction.
4. Direct gypsum board adhesive application:
a. Apply adhesive with manufacturer's recommended spreader to backs of gypsum
boards in band of four beads each to center of each board and along edges.
b. Position boards vertically and press firmly in place to insure good bond.
c. Fasten top and bottom of board if required.
5. Cementious backer board installation:
a. Install as indicated to comply with ANSI A108.11 and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
b. Complete plumbing rough in before boards are erected.
09250-11 GYPSUM BOARD
no
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE s'
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
wo
3) Support outside (cut) leg of runners by clinching a 1-inch high x 25 gage thick
skeet steel strip to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners.
4) Attach studs to runners with 3/8-inch long pan head framing screws. to
5) On straight lengths at ends of arcs, place studs 6-inches on center with last stud
left free standing.
3. Hat channel furring:
a. Attach hat shaped furring channels either vertically or horizontally with fasteners
through alternate wing flanges (staggered).
b. Space furring channels at 24-inches on center, unless otherwiseindicated.Where
furring is indicated to receive backer board, water resistant gypsum board with
ceramic tile, space at 16-inches on center.
c. Install furring channels within 4-inches of floor line and ceiling line.
4. Z furring: ..
a. Securely attach narrow flanges of members to wall with concrete stub nails or
power driven fasteners, except as otherwise indicated.
b. Sequence furring installation with installation of insulation.
5. Ceiling and soffit support systems:
a. Secure hangers or rods to structural support by connecting directly to structure
where possible; otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or
fasteners indicated. .,
b. Space main runners, hangers and furring according to requirements of ASTM
C754, except as otherwise indicated.
c. Where spacing of structural members, or width of ducts or other equipment,
prevents regular spacing of hangers,provide supplemental hangers and suspension
members and reinforce nearest affected hangers to span extra distance.
d. Attach directly to structural elements only; do not attach to metal deck. Loop
hangers and wire-tie directly or provide anchors or inserts.
e. Curved (vaulted) applications: ..
1) Install furring channels to provide indicated radius for finished ceiling.
2) Space fuffing channels maximum 16-inches on center. Provide closer spacing
if recommended by manufacturer for veneer base thickness and application �.
method.
6. Shaftwall:—NOT USED
a. Provide slip or cushioned joints to isolate shaftwall system. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions.
b. Seal joints and penetrations on both sides of shaftwall system.
FINISHES 09250-10 .•
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2. Do not exceed 1/16 inch variation between planes of abutting edges or ends.
3. Shim as required to comply with specified tolerances.
C. Install framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with ASTM C840 requirements that
apply to framing installation.
D. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in gypsum board
assemblies to support fixtures, equipment, heavy trim, grab bars,toilet accessories,
furnishings or similar construction.
E. Metal framing and support:
1. Metal Runners:
a. Align and secure runner tracks accurately to partition layout at both floor and
ceiling.
b. Provide fasteners appropriate to substrate construction as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Metal Studs:
a. Position metal studs vertically in the runners, spaced as indicated.
b. Place studs so that flanges face in same direction.
c. Cut studs %2-inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
d. Align and plumb partition framing accurately.
e. Where partitions abut ceiling or deck construction or vertical structural elements,
provide slip or cushion type joint between partition and structure as recommended
by stud manufacturer to prevent transfer of structural loads or movements to
partitions, and to provide lateral support.
f. Provide horizontal bracing where necessary for lateral support.
g. Chase walls:
1) Position steel studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other.
2) Cut cross bracing from gypsum board 12-inches high by chase wall width.
h. Backer plates and blocking:
1) Where handrails, grab bars, cabinets,wall-mounted door stops,or other wall-
,,,,, hung items are attached to partitions, install backer plates or wood blocking
accurately positioned and firmly secured to metal studs, whether or not such
backer plates or blocking are indicated on Drawings.
2) Do not use wood blocking in fire-rated construction.
i. Curved partitions:
1) Cut top and bottom runners through leg and web at 2-inch intervals for arc
length.
2) Bend runners to uniform curve of radius indicated and locate straight lengths
tangent to arcs.
09250-9 GYPSUM BOARD
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
s
D. Adhesives d joint treatment materials:
1. Conforno requirements of ASTM C475.
2. Joint compounds:
a. Drying-type (ready-mixed): Sheetrock Taping Joint Compound and Topping Joint
Compound, or Sheetrock All Purpose Joint Compound.
3. Laminating adhesive for multiple layers: Special adhesive or joint compound
specifically recommended for laminating gypsum boards.
4. Laminating adhesive for direct application: Special adhesive or joint compound
specifically recommended for laminating gypsum boards and for adhering gypsum
boards to solid substrates.
5. Reinforcing joint tape:
a. ASTM C475, 2-inch nominal width. .■
b. For backer board, provide fiberglass tape as recommended by board manufacturer
and acceptable to manufacturer of ceramic tile setting materials.
E. Gypsum board screws: Self-drilling, self-tapping steel screws.
1. For steel framing less than 0.03 inch thick: Comply with ASTM C 1002.
2. For steel framing from 0.033 inch thick to 0.112 inch thick: Comply with ASTM
C954.
3. Provide Type S or Type S-12 screws.
F. Cementious backer board accessories: Provide accessories and corrosion-resistant-coated
steel screws as recommended by backer board manufacturer and required for complete
installation.
G. Miscellaneous accessories: Provide as required for complete installations. .�
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which Work is to be
installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer's instructions, and as
required to comply with seismic requirements.
B. Tolerances:
1. Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8' 0"variation from plumb or level in exposed lines of
surface, except at joints between gypsum board units.
FINISHES 09250-8 .�.
VW
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
,o RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
am
b. Finish: Galvanized or painted with rust inhibitive paint for interior Work;
galvanized for exterior Work.
C. Framing system:
1. Main runners:
**� a. Cold rolled, "C" shaped steel channels, 16 gage minimum.
b. Finish: Galvanized with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525 for
exterior Work; galvanized or painted with rust inhibitive paint for other interior
Work.
2. Cross furring: Hat shaped steel furring channels, ASTM C645, 7/8-inch high, 25 gage,
e galvanized.
3. Furring anchorages: 16 gage galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire type
clips, bolts, nails or screws recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with
ASTM C754.
4. Provide compression posts and other accessories as required to comply withseismic
requirements.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal trim for gypsum board:
1. Conform to profile and dimensions indicated.
• 2. Material for interior Work: Galvanized steel, 26 gage minimum.
3. Corner beads: Dur A Bead No. 103.
4. Casing beads (edge beads): 200A by USG.
5. Control joints:
a. Roll formed zinc with perforated flanges.
b. Size: 1-3/4 inch wide,with 1/4 inch wide center channel.
c. Provide with removable tape strip over channel.
d. Acceptable product: No. 093 by USG.
B. Special trim and reveals: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5, profiles as indicated..
C. Backer plates:
1. Steel, galvanized; 6-inches wide x 16 gage minimum x lengths to suit size of items to
be attached; fastened to studs for attachment of surface mounted fittings and
accessories.
2. Elimination of backer plates or direct attachment of accessories or equipment to studs
will not be allowed.
09250-7 GYPSUM BOARD
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
d. Provide 20 gage studs at walls to receive cement backer board with ceramic tile .�
facing.
e. Provide runner gage as recommended by stud manufacturer.
2. Depth of sections: As indicated.
3. Corrosion protection: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525. *+
B. Shaft wall supports: —NOT USED
1. Conform to ASTM A446, Grade A, with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM
A525.
2. Studs:
a. Shape: "CH", "J"or"E" or as standard with manufacturer.
b. Gage: As required to fulfill performance criteria, minimum 25 gage. Provide 20
gage for jamb and lintel components.
c. Size: As indicated.
d. J runners: 24 gage, size as required for coordination with studs. ,
e. Jamb struts: 20 gage with 3-inch back leg for use at elevator frames.
C. Metal furring channels:
1. Hat shaped:
a. ASTM C645, 7/8 inch high, 25 gage, with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per
ASTM A525.
b. Provide 20 gage at furring to receive tile backer board.
c. Acceptable products: DWC-25 (for %2" and 5/8" gypsum board) and DWC-20.
2. Z shaped: ASTM C645, depths as indicated, 24 gage minimum, with G40 hot-dip
galvanized coating per ASTM A525.
2.4 CEILING AND SOFFIT SUPPORT MATERIALS
A. Hanger anchorage devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other devices compatible with
indicated structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability has been proven
through standard construction practices or by certified test data.
B. Hangers:
1. Steel wire or rods, sizes to comply with requirements of ASTM C754 for ceiling or
soffit area and loads to be supported.
2. Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized.
3. Rods and flats:
a. Mild steel components.
FINISHES 09250-6
w.
an
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2. Thickness: 1/2-inch.
i
3. Acceptable product: Sheetrock Brand Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board.
C. Shaftwall: —NOT USED
1. Liner boards:
a. ASTM C442, Type SLX.
b. Edges: Beveled.
c. Thickness: 1 inch.
d. Acceptable product: Gypsum Liner Panels.
�. 2. Face boards:
a. ASTM C36, Type X.
b. Thickness: 5/8-inch unless otherwise indicated.
c. Acceptable product: Sheetrock Brand Firecode `C' Gypsum Panels.
D. Tile/FRP backer board:—NOT USED
1. Water resistant treated core with glass mat moisture protecting coating and embedded
glass mats each side. Face side is surfaced with heat cured copolymer water and vapor
retardant coating.
2. Thickness: 1/2-inch.
3. Acceptable product: Dens-Shield as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
E. Gypsum sheathing:
1. ASTM C79, Type X.
2. Thickness: 5/8-inch.
3. Edges: Square.
4. Acceptable products: Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Sheathing.
2.3 METAL FRAMING AND FURRING MATERIALS
A. Metal studs and runners:
1. ASTM C645, "C" shaped, gage:
a. Provide gage as indicated for studs; runner gage as recommended by stud
manufacturer.
b. Provide 25 gage studs, except as otherwise indicated or specified. Provide heavier
gage if required.
c. At door [and borrowed light] frames,provide 2 25 gage minimum studs at each
jamb. Where wall is indicated or specified to be typically framed with 20 gage
studs, provide two (2), 20 gage studs at each jamb.
09250-5 GYPSUM BOARD
an
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
F. Store board to be directly applied to masonry walls at 70°F for 24 hours prior to
installation.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements:
1. Do not install gypsum board when ambient temperature is below 40°F.
2. For adhesive attachment of gypsum board, and for finishing of gypsum board, maintain
ambient temperature above 55°F from one week prior to attachment or joint treatment
until joint treatment is complete and dry.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications herein:
1. United States Gypsum Company(USG), Chicago, IL 60680; tel: (800) 874-4968.
a. Products listed herein establish the standard of quality and are manufactured by
United States Gypsum Company(USG) unless noted otherwise.
2. G-P Gypsum Corporation, Atlanta, GA; tel: (800) 225-6119.
3. National Gypsum Company, Charlotte,NC 28211; tel: (800) 628-4662. ..
2.2 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Gypsum board:
1. ASTM C36,regular type except where Type X fire resistant type is indicated or
required to meet UL assembly types.
2. Edges: Tapered.
3. Thickness: 1/2-inch, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Acceptable products:
a. Typical partitions and ceilings: Sheetrock Brand SW.
b. Fire-rated assemblies: Sheetrock Brand Firecode Gypsum Panels.
c. Curved walls: Sheetrock Brand 1/4"Flexible Gypsum Panels.
d. Foil-backed gypsum board: Sheetrock Brand SW Foil Back.
e. Abuse resistant: Sheetrock Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels.
B. Ceiling board: —NOT USED
1. ASTM C36, non-sag type. �.
FINISHES 092504
on
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Standard gypsum board partition systems: Maximum deflection of 1/240 of partition
height.
2. Systems to receive water resistant gypsum board or backer board: Maximum deflection
of 1/360 of partition height.
3. Interior suspended ceilings and soffits: Maximum deflection of 1/360 of distance
between supports.
4. Exterior soffits: Withstand minimum positive and negative pressure of 20 psf with
maximum deflection of 1/360 of distance between supports.
5. Seismic loads: Fabricate and install systems to resist effective peak velocity-related
acceleration in accordance with the applicable edition of the BOCA Code.
B. Fire resistance ratings: Where fire resistance classifications are indicated,provide
materials and application procedures identical to those listed by UL or tested according to
ASTM E 119 for type of construction shown.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions with
Project conditions and materials clearly identified or detailed for each required material
item.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer: Installer experienced to perform the Work of this section,who has specialized
in the installation of Work similar to that required for this project for a period of five
(5) years.
B. Install gypsum board in accordance with applicable requirements and recommendations of
Gypsum Association GA 216, "Recommended Specifications for the Application and
Finishing of Gypsum Board", except for more stringent requirements of manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect materials under provisions of Section 01600.
** B. Deliver material to site promptly without undue exposure to weather.
C. Deliver in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name,
brand, type and grade.
D. Store above ground in dry, ventilated space.
E. Protect materials from soiling, rusting and damage.
09250-3 GYPSUM BOARD
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..a
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
2. A653 Standard Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
3. C36 Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
4. C79 Standard Specification for Treated Core and Nontreated Core Gypsum Sheathing
Board.
5. C442 Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum Coreboard and
Gypsum Shaftliner Board.
6. C475 Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum
Board.
7. C645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.
8. C754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
9. C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
10. C931 Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board.
11. C954 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 Inch to 0.112 Inch in
Thickness.
12. C 1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. ..
13. E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
C. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA):
1. BOCA National Building Code.
D. Gypsum Association (GA):
1. GA 216 Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing og Gypsum
Board. .�
E. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. Fire Resistance Directory.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance requirements: Fabricate and install systems as indicated, but not less than
that required to comply with ASTM C754 under the following conditions:
FINISHES 09250-2
s
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 092 0 GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, 'General Conditions of the Contract for Construction'; and
Division 1, 'General Requirements of the Project Manual'apply to all work of this section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment, appliances, transportation,
supervision and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section, as
shown on the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
locations, sizes,types and details of carpentry work, and related work described in this
section including but not limited to the following:
1. Gypsum board and accessories.
2. Metal studs and furring.
3. Metal suspension systems.
4. Gypsum board finishing.
5. Trim and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05400 - Cold-formed Metal Framing
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
C. Section 07210 - Building Insulation
D. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems
E. Section 07900- Joint Sealers
F. Section 09300—Tile—NOT USED
G. Section 09510- Acoustical Ceilings—NOT USED
H. Section 09900- Painting
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AmericanNational Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. A108/A118 Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
FINISHES 09250-1
go
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
40 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
DIVISION 9-FINISHES
FINISHES 08810-1
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 � r
JUNE 17,2005
D. Interior Dry/Method (Tape and Tape):
1. Apply glazing tape to permanent stops, allowing tape edge to project 1/16 inch above
stop; butt joint tape edges; seal joints with butyl sealant. ••�
2. Place setting blocks with edge blocks maximum 6 inches from glass edges and
intermediate blocks at 1/4 points of glass panel length.
MW
3. Set glass unit on setting blocks; apply pressure against fixed stop for full contact.
4. Apply glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing as described above.
5. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape; apply pressure for full «o
continuous contact.
6. Trim sight-exposed tape flush with stop. rn
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect glass from damage or breakage
B. Glass breakage: Replace damaged or broken glass from any cause, with new glass panels •R
of approved equal kind, at no extra cost to the Owner, until the date of Substantial
Completion.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after glass installation is complete.
C. Clean and polish glass surfaces inside and out. Exercise care not to scratch or damage
glass.
D. Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from the Work of this section. M"
END OF SECTION
.R
DOORS AND WINDOWS 08810-8
4w,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
s RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
wr
b. Visible Light Reflectance: 16%.
c. Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 52%.
d. Total Solar Energy Reflectance: 13%.
e. UV Transmittance: 36%.
f. Summer U-Value: 0.36.
g. Winter U-Value: 0.33.
h. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.61.
i. Shading Coefficient: 0.71.
4. Provide unit edge seals meeting requirements of ASTM E773, with aluminum spacers
having mitered corners, and silicone sealant for glass-to-spacer seals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATIONN
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correct size and within tolerance.
B. Verify that glazing channels and recesses are clean and free of obstructions,that weeps are
clear, and that channels and recesses are ready for glazing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces to receive sealant with solvent; wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels and recesses with primer or sealer compatible with substrate.
C. Prime surfaces to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install coated monolithic glass with coated surface to interior(Surface 2).
B. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants.
C. Exterior Dry Method (Tape and Gasket Spline):
1. Apply glazing tape or spline to glass; butt joint tape edges; seal joints with butyl
sealant.
I. Place setting blocks with edge blocks maximum 6 inches from glass edges and
intermediate blocks at 1/4 points of glass panel length.
3. Set glass unit on setting blocks; apply pressure against fixed stop for full contact.
4. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape or spline; apply pressure for
full continuous contact.
5. Trim sight-exposed tape flush with stop.
08810-7 GLASS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
�r
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Heat-Strengthened Glass:
1. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and holes, if indicated,
before heat strengthening.
2. Heat strengthen float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 1048, Kind HS.
B. Tempered Glass:
1. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and holes, if indicated,
before heat strengthening.
2. Fully temper float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT. *■
C. Laminated Glass:
1. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and holes, if indicated, "'
before heat strengthening.
2. Heat strengthen float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 1048, Kind HS. .*
3. Laminate plastic interlayer between glass panes in accordance with ASTM C 1172.
D. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: -- NOT USED
1. Fabricate units in accordance with ASTM E 774, Class CBA:
2. Components: **
a. Outer Pane:
1) Glass Type:
2) Glass Color: Clear.
3) Glass Thickness: %-inch.
4) Heat treating: Fully tempered where shown on Contract Drawings or where
required by code.
b. Air Space: '/z-inch wide, hermetically sealed, dehydrated air space. .�
c. Inner Pane:
1) Glass Type: Low-emissivity coated float glass.
2) Glass Color: Clear.
3) Glass Thickness: '/4-inch.
4) Heat treating: Fully tempered where shown on Contract Drawings or where
required by code.
5) Coating: Surface 3.
aw
3. Performance Characteristics:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 73%.
ow
DOORS AND WINDOWS 08810-6
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2. De cription: Annealed clear coated float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C
10'36, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3; with pyrolitic coating.
3. Nominal Glass Thickness: '/4-inch.
4. Performance Characteristics; coating on Surface 3:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 81%.
b. Visible Light Reflectance: 11%.
c. Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 64%.
d. Total Solar Energy Reflectance: 10%.
e. UV Transmittance: 51%.
f. Summer U-Value: 0.63.
g. Winter U-Value: 0.73.
h. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.68.
i. Shading Coefficient: 0.79.
D. Wire Glass: -- NOT USED
1. Manufacturer: Anemostat Door Products, Carson, CA 90745; tel: (310) 835-7500.
W4 2. Material: 1/4"polished wire glass.
3. Finish: Clear with 3/4"x 3/4"diamond wire pattern.
4. Classification markings: Permanently etched with the listing marks of UL and WH in
• accordance with NFPA 80 standards.
5. Fire rating: 60/90 minute approved listing at 100 square inches visible lite.
E. Accessories:
1. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864, neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; length
4 inches, width of glazing rabbet space less 1/16 inch,height required for glazing
method, pane weight, and pane area.
�. 2. Spacer Shims: ASTM C864, neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; length 3
inches, one half height of glazing stop,thickness required for application, one face self
adhesive.
3. Glazing Tape: Butyl compound tape with integral resilient tube spacer, 10 to 15 Shore
A durometer hardness, black color, coiled on release paper; widths required for
specified installation.
4. Glazing Splines: ASTM C864, resilient polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to fit
glazing channel retaining slot; black color.
5. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864, resilient polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to fit
glazing channel retaining slot; black color.
08810-5 GLASS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.2 MATERIAL .�
i
A. Clear Uncoated Float Glass:
1. Acceptable Product: LOF Clear Float Glass.
2. Description: Annealed clear float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036, Type
1, Class 1, Quality q3.
3. Nominal Glass Thickness: t/4-inch.
4. Performance Characteristics: '"
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 88%.
b. Visible Light Reflectance: 08%. No
c. Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 78%.
d. Total Solar Energy Reflectance: 07%.
..
e. UV Transmittance: 62%.
f. Summer U-Value: 1.03.
g. Winter U-Value: 1.09 do
h. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.82.
i. Shading Coefficient: 0.95.
B. Tinted Float Glass: -- NOT USED
1. Acceptable Product: LOF Clear Float Glass. ..
2. Description: Annealed clear float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036, Type
1, Class 1, Quality q3.
3. Nominal Glass Thickness: '/4-inch.
4. Performance Characteristics:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 88%.
b. Visible Light Reflectance: 08%.
c. Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 78%.
d. Total Solar Energy Reflectance: 07%.
e. UV Transmittance: 62%. ..
f. Summer U-Value: 1.03.
g. Winter U-Value: 1.09
h. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.82. "
i. Shading Coefficient: 0.95.
C. Low-Emissivity Coated Float Glass: -- NOT USED
1. Acceptable Product: LOF Energy Advantage Low-E Glass.
DOORS AND WINDOWS 088104 ,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
,A RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1) Products of this section, as provided, meet or exceed specified
requirements.
2) Fabricator of sealed insulating glass units meets specified qualifications.
3) Installer of products of this section meets specified qualifications.
*� 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Fabricator, sealed insulating glass units: Minimum five (5) years documented
experience producing sealed insulating glass units specified this section.
*" 2. Installer: Minimum five (5)years documented experience installing products specified
in this section, and approved by fabricator.
B. Testing: Individual glazed areas in hazardous locations shall pass the test requirement of
CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements: Installation of glass products at ambient air temperature
below 50 degrees F is prohibited.
B. Field measurements: Verify field measurements with drawing dimensions prior to
fabrication of glass products.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Project warranty: Refer to"Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions.
B. Special warranty:
1. Provide ten (10) year warranty to include replacement of sealed glass units exhibiting
seal failure, interpane dusting or misting.
2. Provide ten(10) year warranty to include replacement for laminated glass exhibiting
delamination.
„ PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the specifications herein:
1. Pilkington Libbey Owens Ford Architectural Products, Toledo, OH 43697; Tel: (419)
247-4926.
2. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, PA 15272; tel: (412)434-2858.
3. Viracon, Owatonna, MN 55060; tel: (800) 533 0482.
08810-3 GLASS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
we
4. C 1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
5. E773 Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
6. E774 Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
C. Glass Association of North America(GANA):
1. FGMA Glazing Manual.
2. FGMA Sealant Manual.
3. Laminated Glass Design Guide.
D. Warnock Hersey (WH).
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Unit Surfaces: --NOT USED •'
1. Side 1 - Exterior surface of outer pane.
2. Side 2 - Interior surface of outer pane. +
3. Side 3 - Interior surface of inner pane.
4. Side 4 - Exterior surface of inner pane.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to
plane of glass in accordance with applicable building codes.
2. Limit glass deflection to 3/4 inch or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing
materials, whichever is less.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Product data: Flat glass materials manufacturer's descriptive literature indicating
conformance to specified performance requirements for specified flat glass materials.
2. Samples:
a. Sealed insulating glass units: Two 12 inch by 12 inch samples representative of unit
construction. -- NOT USED
3. Quality assurance/control submittals:
a. Design data: Glass size calculations,prepared in accordance with specified
method.
b. Certificates: Contractor's certification that:
DOORS AND WINDOWS 08810-2
w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 088O GLASS
I'
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
u options, locations, sizes,types, and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Flat glass materials.
2. Insulating glass units.
3. Wire glass.
4. Glazing accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames—NOT USED
B. Section 08210 Flush Wood Doors—NOT USED
C. Section 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts—NOT USED
ek D. Section 08460 Automatic Doors—NOT USED
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C864 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
Blocks, and Spacers.
2. C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
3. C1048 Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass.
DOORS AND WINDOWS 08810-1
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide the approved sealant system where shown on the Drawings, and in strict accord
with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect.
B. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation.
C. Mix and apply multi-component sealants in accord with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
D. Install sealants to fill joints completely from the back, without voids or entrapped air,
using proven techniques, proper nozzles and sufficient force that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint surfaces.
E. Install sealants to uniform cross-sectional shapes with depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
F. Tool sealants in manner that forces sealant against back of joint, ensures firm, full contact
at joint interfaces and leaves a finish that is smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles,
' '" sags, air pockets and embedded impurities.
1. Dry tooling is preferred; tooling liquids that are non-staining,non-damaging to
no adjacent surfaces and approved by sealant manufacturer may be used if necessary when
care is taken to ensure that the liquid does not contact joint surfaces before the sealant.
2. Provide concave tooled joints unless otherwise indicated to provide flush tooling or
recessed tooling.
3. Provide recessed tooled joints where the outer face of substrate is irregular.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accord with sealant and substrate manufacturer
' recommendations as work progresses.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and from damages. Cut
out, remove and replace contaminated or damaged sealants, immediately, so that they are
without contamination or damage at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
07900-7 JOINT SEALERS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants in accord with sealant manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces using cleaners approved by sealant manufacturer whether
primers are required or not.
1. Remove all traces of previous sealant and joint backer by mechanical methods, such as
by cutting, grinding and wire brushing, in manner not damaging to surrounding
surfaces.
2. Remove paints from joint surfaces except for permanent,protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer.
3. Remove wax, oil, grease, dirt film residues,temporary protective coatings and other ..�
residues by wiping with cleaner recommended for that purpose. Use clean, white, lint-
free cloths and change cloths frequently.
•
4. Remove dust by blowing clean with oil-free, compressed air.
C. Provide joint backer material uniformly to depth required by sealant manufacturer for
proper joint design using a blunt instrument.
1. Fit securely by compressing backer material 25 percent to 50 percent so no
displacement occurs during tooling.
2. Avoid stretching or twisting joint backer.
D. Provide bond-breaker where indicated or recommended by sealant manufacturer, adhering
strictly to the manufacturers installation requirements.
E. Prime joint substrates where required. .,
I. Use and apply primer according to sealant manufacturers recommendations.
2. Confine primers to sealant bond surfaces; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
F. Taping: AW
1. Use masking tape where required to prevent sealant or primer contact with adjoining
surfaces that would be permanently stained or otherwise damaged by such contact or
the cleaning methods required for removal.
2. Apply tape so as not to shift readily and remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
D. Seal t Type D:
1. F r exterior vertical joints in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS).
2. Provide a single-component or multi-component sealant; comply with ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, G and O.
"'' 3. Acceptable products:
a. Sonneborn 150 VLM.
40 b. Color: To match material to be sealed from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
.ft, A. Joint cleaner: Cleaner as recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates indicated.
B. Joint primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates, conditions and
exposures indicated.
C. Bond breaker: Polyethylene tape or other adhesive faced tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer to prevent sealant contact where it would be detrimental to sealant
performance.
D. Joint backer: Polyethylene foam rod or other compatible non-waxing, non-extruding, non-
staining resilient material in dimension 25 percent to 50 percent wider than joint width as
recommended by sealant manufacturer for conditions and exposures indicated.
E. Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants
and adjacent joint surfaces that is suitable for masking.
F. Provide other materials,not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as
compatible, subject to review of the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the
work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will
be performed.
1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements.
2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect.
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
07900-5 JOINT SEALERS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE '
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
d. Joints and recesses between adjacent constructions and frames, sills, and subsills of
windows, doors, curtainwalls, storefronts and louvers.
e. Around penetrations in exterior walls.
f. Under door thresholds and at bottom of door frames.
g. Where necessary to prevent infiltration of water or air into or through exterior
building envelope.
h. Perimeter of interior door and window frames.
i. Between interior partitions and adjoining concrete, steel columns, or other
construction.
j. Other interior joints of small dimension which require painting. ,
2. Provide multi-component, low-modulus, non-sag sealant; comply with ASTM C920,
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, T, G, A, M and O.
3. Sealant product:
a. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 2.
b. Color: To match material to be sealed from manufacturer's "Rainbow of Colors" ""
palette.
B. Sealant Type B: •
1. For exterior and interior joints in horizontal and sloped traffic surfaces such as, but not
limited to:
a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
2. Provide multi-component polyurethane sealant having a Shore A hardness of not less
than 25 or more than 50 and plus-or-minus 25 percent joint movement capability;
comply with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T and M.
3. Sealant product:
a. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 2.
go
b. Color: To match material to be sealed from manufacturer's"Rainbow of Colors"
palette.
C. Sealant Type C: o
1. For interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces as sanitary seals in wetted areas
(kitchens and baths).
2. Provide single component, mildew resistant, silicone sealant; comply with ASTM
C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G and A.
3. Sealant product:
a. Sonneborn Omniplus.
b. Colors: White and translucent.
..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
* RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule applications of waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes after
sealant installation unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing. Ensure that
installed sealant is allowed to cure sufficiently prior to subsequent applications.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Project warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract"for project warranty provisions.
B. Special warranty: Submit to the Owner, written warranties against adhesive and cohesive
failure of the sealant and against infiltration of water and air through the sealed joint for a
a. period of three(3) years from date of completion.
1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials.
2. Contractor's standard warranty covering workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable manufacturer: Subject to compliance with specifications herein:
1. Sonneborn Building Products, Shakopee, MN 55379; tel: (800) 243-6739.
2. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville, PA 19438; tel: (800) 523-6688.
3. Tremco Incorporated, Beachwood, OH 44122; tel: (800) 321-7906.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,joint fillers and accessory joint materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under project conditions.
2. Provide joint sealants,joint fillers and related joint materials that are non-staining to
visible joint surfaces and surrounding substrate surfaces.
3. Provide colors selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Sealant Type A:
1. For interior and exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces
such as, but not limited to:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between architectural pre-cast concrete units.
, ► c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
07900-3 JOINT SEALERS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE '"11
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
2. C 1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 0 13 00:
1. Product data:
a. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
b. Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each product specified.
2. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of manufacturer's color palette range. ,
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Applicator shall have at least three years experience in installing materials of types
specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope .E
and complexity.
2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at
all times during installation.
B. Regulatory requirements: Perform work in accord with ASTM C1193 guidelines except
where more stringent requirements are indicated or specified.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect materials under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver the materials to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened containers with all
labels intact and legible at time of use.
C. Store materials in accord with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to
ensure fitness of material when installed.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not use products under conditions of precipitation or freezing weather. Use
appropriate measures for protection and supplementary heating to ensure proper curing
conditions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations if application during **�
inclement weather occurs.
B. Ensure substrate is dry. ..�
00
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 079O JOINT SEALERS
i'
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
"' the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
ees options, locations, sizes, types, and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Provide elastomeric joint sealants,joint backer materials and accessories needed to
ensure a complete and durable weather tight seal at all locations required.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Section 03420 - Prestressed/Precast Concrete Walls—NOT USED
C. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry D. Section 07620 - Flashing and Sheet Metal
E. Section 07860 - Firestopping and Smoke Seals
F. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames—NOT USED
G. Section 08410 -Entrances and Storefronts—NOT USED
H. Section 08460 - Automatic Doors—NOT USED
1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board
J. Section 09300—Tile—NOT USED
K. Section 09900 - Painting
L. Division 15—Mechanical—NOT USED
M. Division 16 - Electrical
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..,
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manufactured products to profiles, patterns and drainage indicated and
required for leakproof installation. Provide for structural and thermal movement of work;
seal joints for leakproof installation.
1. Expansion: Accommodate expansion by leaving 3/16" gap at every joint. A.
2. Seams: Provide uniform,neat seams.
3. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners where possible in exposed work. Cover and seal fasteners .W
and anchors for watertight and leakproof installation.
4. Sealant-type joints: Provide sealant-type joints where indicated. Form joints to conceal Am
sealant.
B. SMACNA standard: Conform to standards set forth in SMACNA Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual.
C. Coping system: Install coping systems holddown cleats in accordance with FM Global
Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-7 and 1-49. Comply with installation "
requirements for wind uplift rated assembly systems.
D. Fascia and gravel stops: Install fascia or gravel stops holddown cleats in accordance with Wo
FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-7 and 1-49. Comply with installation
requirements for wind uplift rated assembly systems.
E. Gutters: Install fascia or gravel stops holddown cleats in accordance with FM Global .W
Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-7 and 1-49. Comply with installation
requirements for wind uplift rated assembly systems. Install gutter expansion joints at 40
approximately 30 ft. intervals.
3.4 CLEANING am
A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace
damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site oft
and legally dispose of debris.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07620-6
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
+err RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Si�: 6" face height x 6" width.
2. Metal: .063 aluminum.
3. Hangers: .313 aluminum hangers, 1" wide at 30"on center alternate with straps.
4. Corners: Provide standard 24"x 24"pre-fabricated outside and inside corners as
required.
C. Downspouts shall be model DS45 aluminum as manufactured by W.P. Hickman Company.
1. Size: 4" depth x 3"width.
2. Metal: .050 aluminum.
3. Provide factory fabricated starter tube and welded elbows and downspout sections in
10'-0" lengths with factory offset for concealed joints.
D. Finishes:
1. Factory applied finish:
a. Topside: Full strength fluoropolymer(70%Kynar 500) system of 1.0 mil total dry
film thickness.
b. Underside: Wash coat of 0.3-0.4 mil dry film thickness.
c. Texture: Smooth, dull matte specular gloss 25 —35%at 60°.
d. Protective film: Strippable vinyl film applied during fabrication and finishing.
e. Color(AL-2): "White."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site verification of conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously
installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
ob
manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate metal roofing with other work(drainage, flashing and trim, deck
substrates,parapets, walls, etc.) and other adjoining work to provide a non-corrosive and
leakproof installation.
B. Dissimilar metals: Prevent galvanic action of dissimilar metals. Coat unfinished metals
with bituminous paint.
07620-5 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
.er
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. General Metal Fabrication: Shop fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply
with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and
weather resistant performance with expansion provisions for running work sufficient to
permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit
substrates. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ..k
Form exposed sheet metalwork without excessive oil canning, buckling and tool marks,
true to line and levels as indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams: Fabricate non moving seams in sheet metal with flat lock seams. For metal
other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams and solder. Form aluminum
seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. •
3. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in work
cannot be used, or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints
of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1" deep, filled with mastic sealant .�
(concealed within joints).
4. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non expansion type joints are indicated or required for
proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of
elastomeric sealant in compliance with industry standards.
5. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non compatible metal or corrosive
substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous
coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
• C. Finishes:
1. Factory applied finish:
a. Topside: Full strength fluoropolymer(70%Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin) system
of 1.0 mil total dry film thickness.
b. Underside: Wash coat of 0.3-0.4 mil dry film thickness.
c. Texture: Smooth, dull matte specular gloss 25—35%at 60°.
d. Protective film: Strippable vinyl film applied during panel fabrication and
finishing.
e. Color(AL-2): "White."
2.2 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS —NOT USED
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. W.P. Hickman Company, 175 Sweeten Creek Road, Asheville,NC 28813; tel: (704)
274-4000.
2. Approved equal.
B. Formed aluminum gutter system shall be model G66 as manufactured by W.P. Hickman
Company. ,.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 076204 .�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers
with identification labels intact.
B. Storage and protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful conditions.
Store materials in dry, above ground location.
1. Stack pre-finished material to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion, scratching, and
denting. Elevate one end of each skid to allow for moisture run-off.
2. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration or staining.
3. Do not expose trim material with factory applied strippable film to direct sunlight or
extreme heat.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field
measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction
delays.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Project warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract"for project warranty provisions.
40
B. Special warranty: Submit for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's warranty document
executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to and
not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years commencing on the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COPING SYSTEMS FASCIAS AND GRAVEL STOPS
A. Materials:
1. Aluminum sheet: ASTM 13209, aluminum and aluminum 3105 alloy with H14 temper
in accord with manufacturer's standard to suit forming operations and finish specified.
a. Thickness: .040"as indicated.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, G90 steel sheet, zinc coated(galvanized)by hot
dip process, structural quality.
a. Thickness: 24 ga. as indicated.
B. Fabrication
07620-3 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
.w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ,,,,,,
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2. FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
C. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): .�
1. UL 580 Test for Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):
1. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance requirements: Provide roof specialties which have been manufactured,
fabricated and installed to withstand structural and thermal movement, wind loading and . .
weather exposure to maintain performance criteria without defects, damage, failure or
infiltration of water.
1. Windstorm resistance criteria: Provide coping systems, fascias and gravel stops which
comply with performance classification for FM I-90 label in accordance with FM Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-7 and 1-49.
.W
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300: am
1. Product data: Submit product data for specified products.
2. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product
components, including anchorage, accessories and finish colors.
3. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes and color.
4. Closeout Submittals:
a. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has
specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project.
B. Sheet metal industry standard: Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association(SMACNA)Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
C. Mock-ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable materials and installation
methods. Obtain Owner's and Architect's acceptance of workmanship standard.
D. Pre-installation conference: Requirements of this section shall be included in Pre-Roofing
Conference; see Section 07530.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07620-2 ,,.
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
SECTION 07620 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
40 the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes, types, and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Metal fascia systems.
2. Gutters and downspouts.
3. Miscellaneous metal flashings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03420 - Prestressed/Precast Concrete Walls—NOT USED
B. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry
C. Section 07311 -Asphalt Shingles—NOT USED
D. Section 07410 - Metal Wall Panels—NOT USED
E. Section 07530 -Single-Ply Membrane Roofing
F. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A525 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
2. ASTM A653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
3. ASTM B209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. Factory Mutual (FM):
1. FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-7.
No
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE oft,
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
.w
2. Upon co 'pletion of the installation, the Contractor shall arrange for an inspection to be
made by a non-sales technical representative of the roofing system manufacturer. This
inspecti n shalldetermine corrective work required before the warranty may be issued. ►
a. Notify the Owner no less than three (3)days prior to the scheduled inspection. In
way may the inspection occur without Owner's representation.
b. Results of the inspection shall be submitted in writing to the Owner and Architect, �.
for their review and records.
3.5 CLEANING to
A. Perform daily clean up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris
from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally ""
acceptable manner.
3.6 PROTECTION no
A. Provide protection as required, such as 3/4"thick plywood, for all roof areas subject to
damage and traffic during construction. Protective material used, shall be smooth and free ..
of fasteners and splinters.
END OF SECTION
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07530-10 ,,�
s�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
4s RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
40
3. Apply Sure-Seal HP-250 Primer to splice area.
4. Position Secur-TAPE onto bottom membrane sheet with edge of the release film along
a line marked.
5. Remove the release film and press top sheet onto tape using hand pressure. Roll the
splice with a 2 inch wide steel roller.
6. Install a 5-inch wide section of Pressure-Sensitive Flashing or Elastoform Flashing
over all field splice intersection seal edges of flashing and Lap Sealant.
7. The use of Lap Sealant with tape splices is optional except at tape overlaps and cut
edges of reinforced membrane where Lap Sealant is required.
' F. Flashing:
1. Wall and curb flashing shall be cured EPDM membrane. Continue the deck membrane
r as wall flashing where practicable.
2. In-Seam Sealant is required on all vertical splices between adjoining sections of cured
membrane.
3. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration
flashing including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications.
G. Walkways:
1. Install walkways at all traffic concentration points (such as roof hatches, access
doorsrooftop ladders, etc.)and all locations as identified on the specifier's drawing.
2. Adhere walkways to the EPDM membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications.
H. Daily Seal:
as 1. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not achieved
by the end of the work day, a daily seal must be performed to temporarily close the
membrane to prevent water infiltration.
2. Use Sure-Seal Pourable Sealer or other acceptable membrane seal in accordance with
the manufacturer's requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:
1. The Owner may engage the services of an independent roof inspection service to
review the roofing installation to insure compliance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
.+r
07530-9 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 wr.
JUNE 17,2005
1. Install insulation or membrane underlayment over the substrate with boards butted
tightly together with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Stagger joints both
horizontally and vertically if multiple layers are provided. AM
2. Secure insulation to the substrate with the required mechanical fasteners in accordance
with the manufacturer's specifications.
C. Membrane placement and attachment:
1. Position sheets to accommodate contours of the roof deck and shingle splices to avoid
bucking later.
2. Unroll and position membrane without stretching. Allow the membrane to relax for
approximately 1/2 hour prior to attachment. Provide and secure both perimeter and
field membrane sheets in accordance with the manufacturer's most current
specifications and details.
3. Secure the membrane (along the pre-printed blue line approximately 3 inches from the
edge of the membrane sheet) with the required Sure-Seal Fastener HP Locking Seam
Plate spaced a maximum of 12 inches on center. The minimum distance between the ,..
edge of the fastening plate and the edge of the membrane must be 2 inches.
4. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. ■»
D. Membrane splicing (adhesive splice):
1. Membrane splices must be a minimum of 6 inches wide where mechanical attachment .w
is required along the length of the membrane. Membrane splices at the end roll section
(the width of the membrane)must be a minimum of 3 inches wide.
Aft
2. When using Pre-KLEENED Reinforced EPDM membrane, cleaning the splice area is
not required unless the membrane has been contaminated with field dirt, adhesive or
other residue. To remove accumulated dirt, footprints, etc., scrub the membrane sheets ""
with Splice Cleaner or HP-250 Primer.
3. Apply Splicing Cement and In-Seam Sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and roll the top sheet onto the mating surface.
4. Roll the splice with a 2 inch wide steel roller and wait at least 2 hours before applying
Lap Sealant to the splice edge following the manufacturer's requirements.
5. Field splices without In-Seam Sealant must be overlaid with uncured flashing.
E. Membrane splicing (tape splice): ""
1. Tape splices where fastening plates are located (along the length of the membrane)
must utilize 7 inch wide SecurTAPE. Tape splices at end roll sections (along the width no
of the membrane with fastening plates) shall utilize 3 inch wide SecurTAPE.
2. Overlap adjacent sheets and mark a line 1/2 inch out from the top sheet.
ow
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07530-8
.M
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
F. Walkways: Sure-Seal Walkway Pads (30" x 30" molded black rubber with factory
rounded corners) adhered to the EPDM membrane roof with Splicing Cement or Splice
Tape.
G. Other materials:
1. All necessary miscellaneous items needed to fulfill the project requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before beginning work,a representative of the roofing system manufacturer and
Contractor shall examine the roof surfaces in order to insure that the decks are acceptable.
B. Verify proper placement of all roof openings, pipes, curbs, sleeves, ducts,vents, and
drains.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection:
1. The roofing contractor shall adequately protect building,paved areas, service drives,
lawn, shrubs, trees, etc. from damage while performing the required work. Provide
canvas, boards and sheet metal (properly secured) as necessary for protection and
remove protection material at completion. The contractor shall repair or be responsible
for costs to repair all property damaged during the roofing application.
2. Do not overload any portion of the building, either by use of or placement of
40 equipment, storage of debris, or storage of materials.
3. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire extinguishers.
40 4. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during the roofing application.
Remove debris at the completion of each day's work and clean drains, if required. At
completion, test drains to ensure the system is free running and drains are watertight.
ft Remove strainers and plug drains in areas where work is in progress. Install flags or
other telltales on plugs. Remove plugs each night and screen drain.
B. Surface preparation: Surfaces on which the roofing system is to be applied shall be clean,
smooth, dry, free of fins, sharp edges, loose and foreign materials, oil and greases.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the manufacturer's published instructions for the installation of the
membrane roofing system including proper substrate preparation,jobsite considerations
and weather restrictions.
B. Insulation placement:
07530-7 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Sure-Seal Polyisocyanurate HP as supplied by Carlisle. Minimum aged R-value
required shall be 20.
2. 2.Insulation shall be installed in multiple layers. The first and second layer of
insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the substrate in accordance with the
manufacturer's published specifications.
C. Adhesives and cleaners:
1. Bonding Adhesive: Sure-Seal 90-8-30A.
2. Splicing Cement: Sure-Seal EP-95 Splicing Cement.
3. Splice Tape and Primer: Sure-Seal SecurTAPE and HP-250 Primer..
4. Cleaning Solvent: Sure-Seal Splice Cleaner.
5. Internal seam sealant: Sure-Seal In-Seam Sealant.
6. External seam sealant: Sure-Seal Lap Sealant.
7. Sealer: Sure-Seal Pourable Sealer.
D. Fasteners and plates:
1. HP Fasteners: a threaded, black epoxy electro-deposition coated fastener used with
steel roof decks.
2. Insulation Fastening Plates: 3-inch diameter FM approved metal plate used for
insulation attachment in conjunction with HP Fasteners. w*
3. Seam Fastening Plates: a 2 inch diameter FM approved metal plate used in conjunction
with RUSS or with EPDM membrane for membrane securement.
4. Polymer Seam Plate: a 2 inch diameter FM approved plastic fastening plate
incorporating barbs on the underside of the plate. This plate is required for membrane
and RUSS a attachment installed in conjunction with steel roof decks.
5. HP Locking Seam Plate: a 2 inch diameter FM approved metal fastening plate
incorporating a plastic insert in the center of the plate. This plate is optional for ..
membrane and RUSS attachment installed in conjunction with steel roof decks.
6. RUSS (Reinforced Universal Securement Strip): a 6 or 9 inch wide, 100 foot long strip
of Sure-Seal (black) reinforced EPDM membrane. "
E. Metal edging and membrane terminations:
1. Sure-Seal Termination Bar: a 1 inch wide and .098 inch thick extruded aluminum bar ..
pre-punched 6 inches on center; incorporates a sealant ledge to support Lap Sealant and
provide increased stability for membrane terminations.
2. Metal flashings and copings: Refer to Section 07620 -Flashing and Sheet Metal.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07530-6
me
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
,-M RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with the
manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to
proceed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
B. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When
necessary,new roof sections shall be protected and inspected upon completion for
possible damage.
C. New roofing shall be complete and weather tight at the end of the work day.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Project warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions.
B. Special warranty: Provide manufacturer's 15 year Total System Warranty covering both
labor and material with no dollar limitation. The maximum wind speed coverage shall be
peak gusts of 72 mph measured at 10 meters above ground level. Certification is required
with bid submittal indicating the manufacturer has reviewed and agreed to such wind
coverage.
C. Pro-rated system warranties shall not be accepted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications herein:
1. Carlisle SynTec, Incorporated, 1285 Ritner Highway, Carlisle, PA 17013; tel: (717)
245-7000.
2. Firestone Building Products, 525 Congressional Boulevard, Carmel, IN 46032; tel:
(800)428-4442.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Membrane:
1. Sure-Seal .045-inch thick reinforced EPDM (Ethylene, Propylene, Diene Terpolymer)
membrane in the largest sheet possible. The membrane shall be manufactured in a
single panel with no factory splices to reduce splice intersections.
a. Sure-Weld (white-on-black) .045-inch thick reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin
(TPO)membrane; at canopy tower roofs only.
B. Insulation:
07530-5 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 w.
JUNE 17,2005
d. Review plans for roof slope, deck type, drainage, membrane attachment, and the
like.�If a conflict exists between what is considered "good roofing practice" and the
specifications, resolve all objections and make final decisions a part of the job AM
record. Limitations imposed by weather or other special requirements shall be
understood by all parties.
e. Examine all plans to determine whether different roof areas receive different roof go
membranes, where different thicknesses or types of insulation occur, changes in
roof membrane and/or other situations peculiar to the project.
f. Clarify all specifications, details and application requirements including what work
should be completed before the roofing operation can begin.
4. Storage and working areas: Establish which areas on the site will be available for so
storage and working areas.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ,.
A. Deliver, store, and protect materials under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers or
wrappings with the manufacturer's name, brand name and installation instructions intact
and legible. Deliver in sufficient quantity to permit work to continue without interruption.
C. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for proper material storage:
1. Store materials, except membrane, between 60T and 80T in dry area protected from
water and direct sunlight. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to 60T minimum
temperature before using.
2. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and
safety precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life.
3. Insulation must be on pallets, off the ground and tightly covered with waterproof
materials.
D. Any materials which are found to be damaged shall be removed and replaced at the
applicator's expense. '"
E. When loading materials onto the roof, the Contractor must comply with the requirements
of the building owner to prevent overloading and possible disturbance to the building
structure.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS .,
A. If discrepancies are discovered between the existing conditions and those noted on the
drawings, immediately notify the architect and solicit the manufacturer's approval prior to �^
commencing with the work. Necessary steps shall be taken to make the building
watertight until the discrepancies are resolved.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 075304
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. The Contractor shall fill out the FM Global "Application for Acceptance of Roofing
System"and submit same to the following address prior to the start of installation for
their review and approval:
a. Northeast Operations - Plan Review Desk
FM Global
+e 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
P.O. Box 9102
Norwood, MA 02062
C. Certifications:
1. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop
"! drawings without the prior written approval of the Architect.Any deviation from the
manufacturer's installation procedures must be supported by a written certification on
the manufacturer's letterhead and presented for the Architect's consideration.
2. Upon completion of the installation,the applicator shall arrange for an inspection to be
made by a non-sales technical representative of the membrane manufacturer in order to
determine whether or not corrective work will be required before the warranty will be
issued. Notify the Owner seventy-two (72) hours prior to the manufacturer's final
inspection. The results of the warranty inspection shall be submitted in writing to the
Owner for their review and records. Warranty commencement shall be no earlier than
the date of Substantial Completion.
D. Pre-installation conference:
1. The following personnel shall be requested to attend:
a. Owner's Representative.
b. Architect.
c. General Contractor.
d. Roofing Contractor and Project Superintendent.
e. Roofing system manufacturer's representative.
so f. Mechanical &Electrical Contractor's Representatives
2. Record of meeting:
a. General Contractor shall record all decisions made at the meeting, which shall be
made a part of the job record.
3. Items to be reviewed, discussed and resolved:
a. Review specifications, roof plans, roof and flashing details.
b. Manufacturer's specification(where specified), differences and deviations (if any)
from Architect's Specifications.
c. Underwriters' Laboratories and/or Factory Mutual requirements and conflicts (if
any) with Architect's/Manufacturer's specifications.
40
07530-3 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
aw
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE AW
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
w.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
am
1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, technical product data,
standard details and installation instructions for the total roofing system specified.
a. Submit sample of the manufacturer's membrane system warranty. ow
2. Shop drawing: Submit shop drawings prepared specifically for this project. Shop
drawings shall be drawn to scale and shall include the following information: so
a. Layout.
b. Details of construction.
c. Identification of materials. am
d. Special conditions.
3. Quality control submittals: "`
a. Submit a letter of certification from the manufacturer, which certifies the roofing
contractor is authorized to install the manufacturer's roofing system and lists
foremen who have received training from the manufacturer along with the dates
training was received.
b. Certification from the membrane manufacturer indicating the fasteners are capable .�
of providing a static backout resistance of 10 inch pounds minimum is required.
4. Contract closeout submittals: Upon completion of the installed work, submit copies of MW
the manufacturer's final inspection to the Owner and Architect prior to the issuance of
the manufacturer's warranty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE am
A. Qualifications:
1. The roofing system must be installed by an applicator authorized and trained by the ON
manufacturer in compliance with shop drawings as approved by the manufacturer. The
roofing applicator shall be thoroughly experienced and upon request be able to provide am
evidence of having at least five(5) years successful experience installing single-ply
EPDM roofing systems.
2. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type of no
work who are skilled in the application techniques of the materials specified. Provide at
least one thoroughly trained and experienced superintendent on the job at all times
roofing work is in progress. AW
B. Regulatory requirements: The EPDM membrane roofing system must achieve a UL Class
A, and FM 1-90 rating.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07530-2 ,,�„
In
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 0750 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
i
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual" apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes,types and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Furnish and install a complete and weather tight EPDM membrane mechanically
fastened roofing system, including membrane,roof insulation,metal edging and
terminations, accessories, and related work as indicated on the drawings and as
specified herein.
2. Furnish and install EPDM membrane and walkway pads in and around interior
condensing tower room as indicated on drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 ELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
B. Section 07311 -Asphalt Shingles—NOT USED
C. Section 07620 -Flashing and Sheet Metal
D. Section 15400—Plumbing—NOT USED
E. Section 15600 -Heating and Air Conditioning—NOT USED
F. Division 16 -Electrical
1.3 REFERENCES
„r, A. FM Global (FM):
1. Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-7 and 1-29.
2. Application for Acceptance of Roofing System.
B. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL 790 Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials.
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
40 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. Nailing: Nail horizontal panels by placing nail in center of slot. Nail vertical panels by
placing first nail at top of top slot and remaining nails in center of slots. Drive nails
straight, leaving 1/16 inch space between nail head and flange of panel.
C. Spacing: Allow space between both ends of siding panels and trim for thermal movement.
Overlap horizontal panel ends one-half the width of factory pre-cut notches.
D. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Stagger lap joints in uniform pattern as successive courses of
siding are installed.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt from surface of installed products, using mild soap and water.
B. After completing installation of vinyl products, remove from project site excess materials
and debris resulting from installation of vinyl products.
END OF SECTION
kft
W
46
N
40
07464-5 VINYL SOFFIT
40
.1 0111111 IN
.,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE so
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
ow
5. Deflection Temperature: 160 degrees F, under load of 264 psi.
6. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 degrees F,minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1929.
7. Flammability: Rate of burning not greater than 2 inches (50 mm)per minute, when
tested in accordance with ASTM D 635. ,.
8. Smoke Density: 40, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2843.
2.3 SOFFIT PANELS
A. Soffit: CertainTeed Beaded Porch Panel; vinyl panels designed to simulate finished
wood. ..
1. Style: Triple 2 inch panels, 0.039 inches nominal thickness,matte finish.
2. Invisibly vented type, with 1.2 square inches free air space per square foot of soffit.
3. Color: Colonial White
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide coordinating accessories for complete and proper installation, whether or not
specifically shown on the drawings.
1. Color: Provide accessories in color matching adjacent siding or soffit panels.
2. Soffit Trim: F-channels. •
3. Soffit Trim: Soffit cove molding.
4. Miscellaneous J-channels and dividers to suit project conditions. �*°s
B. Fasteners: Provide galvanized or other corrosion-resistant nails as recommended by
manufacturer of siding products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Examination
B. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation of vinyl products; verify
dimensions and acceptability of substrate.
C. Do not proceed with installation of vinyl products until unacceptable conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products in accordance with the latest printed instructions of the
manufacturer, with all components true and plumb.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 074644 ,,,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.2 MATERIALS
1
A. Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride) Components: Provide products made of extruded polyvinyl
chloride compound as specified and manufactured to comply with requirements of ASTM
D 3679 or ASTM D 4477, as applicable, and meets the weathering standard in ASTM D
3679 using ASTM D 1435 procedure.
1. Provide elongated nailing slots on nailing flanges to allow for movement.
2. Factory-notch ends of horizontal panels to form overlapping joints.
3. Comply with weathering requirements of ASTM D 3679.
4. Flame spread index of 20,maximum; smoke developed index of 360,maximum;when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
5. Self-Ignition Temperature: 824 degrees F, minimum,when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1929.
6. Flammability: Average time of burning not greater than 5 seconds; average extent of
burning not greater than 10 mm; self-extinguishing with no measurable extent of burn;
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 635.
7. Fire Endurance Classification: 1 hour, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 as
wall assembly.
8. PVC Compound: Cell classification of 13444-B, as defined by ASTM D 4216,
meeting or exceeding the following properties:
a. Impact Strength: 2.20 ft-lbs per inch at test temperature of 73 degrees F, and 1.30
ft-lbs per inch at test temperature of 32 degrees F, per ASTM D 4226.
b. Tensile Strength: 7,344 psi.
c. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity in Tension: 455,750 psi.
d. Deflection Temperature: 168 degrees F, under load of 264 psi.
e. Coefficient of Expansion: 0.000034 in/in/degree F.
* f. Chemical Resistance: Excellent.
B. Thermoplastic Polyolefin(TPO) Components: Provide siding made of modified
polypropylene copolymer with cell classification of PP300A11220FW2020103, as defined
by ASTM D 4101, meeting or exceeding the following properties:
1. Tensile Strength: 3,500 psi, per ASTM D 638.
2. Tensile Modulus: 180,000 psi,per ASTM D 638.
3. Flexural Modulus: 180,000 psi,per ASTM D 790.
4. Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion: 0.000053 in/in/degree F,per ASTM D 696.
07464-3 VINYL SOFFIT
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 .�
JUNE 17,2005
9. ASTM D 4477- Standard Specification for Rigid Unplasticized Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Soffit.
10. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
11. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and ,,,
Materials; 2000.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
ow
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard printed product data and installation
instructions for specified vinyl products.
2. Selection Samples: Submit color chips of manufacturer's full range of colors for
Architect's selection.
3. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit evidence of Code compliance specified in
QUALITY ASSURANCE Article of this section. ..
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE MW
A. Regulatory Requirements: Code compliance in accordance with the following:
1. BOCA.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver vinyl products to project site in original packaging.
B. Store vinyl siding products in original packaging, on flat surface under cover, stacked no
more than 12 boxes high. Do not store in location where temperatures may exceed 130
degrees F.
1.7 WARRANTY �*
A. Provide manufacturer's standard limited lifetime warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. CertainTeed Corporation; Siding Products Group, P.O. Box 860, Valley Forge,
Pennsylvania 19482.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07464-2
ON
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
41 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
an
SECTION 074 4 VINYL SOFFIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manager" apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes,types and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Vented vinyl soffit.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry
B. Section 07900- Joint Sealers
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM):
1. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics.
2. ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of
Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
W 3. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
4. ASTM D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under
Flexural Load.
5. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of
Plastics Between -30 Degrees C. and 30 Degrees C.
W 6. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Compounds.
7. ASTM D 2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or
Decomposition of Plastics.
8. ASTM D 3679 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Siding.
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
j END OF SECTION
i
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07240-8
so
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
40 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
40
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. The substrate shall be prepared as to be free of foreign materials such as oil, dust, dirt,
so form-release agents, efflorescence,paint, wax, water repellants,moisture, frost and any
other materials that inhibit adhesion.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. The EIFS System shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's current
application instructions.
B. The overall minimum base coat thickness shall be sufficient to fully embed the mesh. The
recommended method is to apply the base coat in two(2)passes.
C. EIFS base coat surfaces in contact with sealant shall be coated with Demandit or Color
W Prime. Sealant shall not be applied directly to textured finishes or base coat surfaces.
D. When installing the EIFS system under BOCA National Building Code jurisdiction,the
notched trowel method of adhesive application shall be used over gypsum sheathing
substrates.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper application of the EIFS materials.
B. If required,the Contractor shall certify in writing the quality of work performed relative to
the substrate system, details, installation procedures, workmanship, and as to the specific
products used.
C. If required,the EPS supplier shall certify in writing that the EPS meets EIFS
manufacturer's specifications.
D. If required,the sealant Contractor shall certify in writing that the sealant application is in
accordance with the sealant and EIFS manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING
A. All excess EIFS system materials shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor in
accordance with Contract provisions and as required by applicable law.
B. All surrounding areas, where the EIFS system has been installed, shall be left free of
debris and foreign substances resulting from the Contractor's work.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. The EIFS system and the project shall be protected from weather and other damage until
permanent protection in the form of flashings, sealants, etc. are installed.
40
07240-7 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH
_ SYSTEMS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 ..
JUNE 17,2005
2. Non-cementitious: A factory-mixed, fully formulated, water based product. .�
a. NCB.
3. Ready mixed: A dry blend cementitious, co-polymer based product, field mixed with
water.
a. Primus DM or Genesis DM.
D. Reinforcing Meshes: Shall be a balanced open weave, glass fiber fabric treated for
compatibility with other System materials and available in the following weights, and
shall provide the indicated minimum tensile strengths:
1. Standard: 146 g/m2 (4.3 oz/yd2); 27 g/cm (150 lbs/in)
2. Detail Short Rolls: 146 g/m2 (4.3 oz/yd2); 27 g/cm (1501bs/in).
3. Corner Mesh: 244 g/m2 (7.2 oz/yd2); 49 g/cm (274 lbs/in).
E. Finishes: Shall be the type, color, and texture as selected by the architect/owner and shall
be one or more of the following:
1. Standard DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water-based, acrylic coatings with integral
color and texture, and formulated with DPR chemistry:
2. Sandblast: Medium texture.
3. Colors:
a. Color(EIFS-1): #423A"French Vanilla."
b. Color(EIFS-2): #102 `Brite White." ..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation of the EIFS system, the contractor shall ensure that the substrate:
1. Is flat within 1/4 in. in a 4 ft. radius.
2. Is sound, dry, connections are tight, has no surface voids, projections or other
conditions that may interfere with the EIFS system installation.
B. The contractor shall notify the General Contractor and/or Architect and/or Owner of all
discrepancies.
C. Prior to the installation of the EIFS system, the Architect or General Contractor shall
insure that all needed flashings and other waterproofing details have been completed, if
such completion is required prior to the EIFS application.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07240-6
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. Suff ent manpower and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous operation,
free of cold joints, scaffold lines, texture variations, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The following are acceptable manufacturers:
w 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.
B. All components of the EIFS shall be obtained from the selected system manufacturer or its
approved suppliers.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: Shall be Type I, I-II or II, meeting ASTM C 150,white or gray in
color, fresh and free of lumps.
B. Water: Shall be clean and free of foreign matter
C. Mechanical Fasteners: Shall be Wind-Lock's Wind Devi1TM plates, or equivalent, used in
conjunction with corrosion resistant fasteners appropriate for the substrate system.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Adhesives: Used to adhere the EPS to the substrate, shall be compatible with the substrate
and the EPS.
I. Cementitious: A liquid polymer based material, which is field mixed with Portland
cement for use over non wood-based substrates.
a. Genesis or Primus.
2. Non-cementitious: A factory-mixed, fully formulated water based adhesive for use
over wood-based substrates.
a. ADEPS.
3. Ready mixed: A dry blend cementitious, co-polymer based product, field mixed with
water for use over non wood-based substrates.
a. Primus DM or Genesis DM.
B. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene meeting Dryvit Specification for Insulation
Board DS131 and supplied by an EPS board supplier licensed by Dryvit.
C. Base Coat: Shall be compatible with the EPS insulation board and reinforcing mesh(es).
1. Cementitious: A liquid polymer based material, which is field mixed with Portland
cement.
a. Genesis or Primus.
07240-5 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH
SYSTEMS
ow
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
.A
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Qualifications:
1. Contractor: Shall be knowledgeable in the proper installation of the EIFS system.
Additionally the contractor shall possess a current trained contractor certificate from
the manufacturer. ..
B. Mock-up:
1. The Contractor shall, before the project commences,provide the owner/architect with a
mock-up for approval.
2. The mock-up shall be of suitable size as required to accurately represent the products ,.
being installed, as well as each color and texture to be utilized on the project.
3. The mock-up shall be prepared with the same products, tools, equipment, and
techniques required for the actual application. The finish used shall be from the same `
batch as that being used on the project.
4. The approved mock-up shall be available and maintained at the job site.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All EIFS materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages
with labels intact.
B. Upon arrival,materials shall be inspected for physical damage, freezing, or overheating.
Questionable materials shall not be used.
C. Materials shall be stored at the jobsite in a cool, dry location, out of direct sunlight,
protected from weather and other damage.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements:
1. Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless
appropriate protection is provided. Protect materials from inclement weather until they
are dry.
2. Application of wet materials shall be at a minimum ambient temperature of 40°F, 45°F
or 50°F depending on product, and rising. These temperatures shall be maintained for
a minimum of 24 hours thereafter, or until completely dry.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Installation of the EIFS system shall be coordinated with other construction trades.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072404 „�,
w�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
e. Moisture Resistance: ASTM D 2247 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6201);
no deleterious effects after 14 days.
f. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B 117 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6061);
5%concentration for 300 hours. No deleterious effects.
g. Water Penetration: ASTM E 331; no water penetration to the innermost surface of
the test specimen.
h. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96 Water Method, Procedure B; Standard
lamina 10 g/hr-m2 (14 gr/hr-ft2).
2. The EIFS system shall have been tested for structural performance as follows:
a. Bond Strength: ASTM C 297; minimum 132 kPa(19.1 psi); failure in the substrate
of insulation board.
b. Full Scale Structural Tests: ASTM E 330; minimum failure load under positive or
suction force of 4.3 kPa(90 psf) unless otherwise specified; substrate failure.
c. Impact Resistance: In accordance with EIMA Standard 101.86: Refer to table
below.
3. The EIFS system shall have been tested for fire performance as follows:
a. Flame Spread -ASTM E 84. When tested individually;
1) The EPS insulation board shall have a Flame Spread index not exceeding 25
and a Smoke Developed index not exceeding 450.
2) The adhesives and coatings shall have a Flame Spread index not exceeding 20
and a Smoke Developed index not exceeding 10.
b. ASTM E 108 (Modified).
„ c. ASTM E 119 One-Hour Assembly.
d. ASTM E 119 Two-Hour Assembly
e. UBC 26-4 (Formerly UBC 17-6).
f. ULC S101.
g. BOCAa National Building Code Radiant Heat Exposure Test of Exterior Wall
Assemblies.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Product data: The Contractor shall submit to the owner/architect Manufacturer's
product data sheets describing all products which will be used on this project.
2. Samples - The Contractor shall submit to the Architect two samples of the EIFS system
e�
for each finish, texture, and color to be used on the project. The same tools and
techniques proposed for the actual installation shall be used. Samples shall be of
sufficient size to accurately represent each color and texture to be utilized on the
project.
07240-3 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH
SYSTEMS
am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
4W
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
8. ASTM Ei/96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. ..
9. ASTM 108 (Modified) Method for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
M.
10. ASTM E 119 Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
11. ASTM E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
12. ASTM E 331 Test Method For Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
13. ASTM G 23 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6151) Recommended Practice for
Operating-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water, for
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
B. EIMA Std 101.86 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Exterior Insulation Finish
Systems (EIFS), Class PB to the Effects of Rapid Deformation(Impact). .�
C. MIL Std E5272 Environmental Testing.
D. MIL Std 810B Environmental Test Methods.
E. UBC Std 26-4 (Formerly UBC 17-6) Multi-Story Fire Evaluation of Exterior Non Load-
bearing Foam Plastic Insulated Wall Systems.
F. ULC S 101 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction Materials.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Exterior Insulation and Finish System, Class PB, consisting of an adhesive,
insulation board, base coat with reinforcing mesh, and finish.
B. Methods of Installation:
1. Field Applied: The EIFS system is applied to the substrate system in place.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. The EIFS system shall have been tested for durability as follows:
a. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 968 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6191); no
deleterious effects after 500 liters (132 gal).
b. Absorption-Freeze-Thaw: 60 cycles, soak at 20 °C (68 °F)for four days, then—10°
(14 °F) for two hours, then 20 °C (68 °F) for two hours; no checking, cracking, or
splitting.
c. Accelerated Weathering: ASTM G 23 (Federal Test Standard 141 A Method 6151);
2,000 hours. No deterioration. ..
d. Mildew Resistance: MIL Std 81013; passes.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07240-2
we
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction";and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section..
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, location, sizes,types, and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Exterior insulation and finish system(EIFS); Class PB.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
w A. Section 05400- Cold-Formed Metal Framing
B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry
C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
D. Section 09250-Gypsum Board
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM):
1. ASTM B 117 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 606 1) Test Method of Salt Spray
(Fog) Testing.
2. ASTM C 79 Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board.
3. ASTM C 150 Specification for Portland Cement.
+e
4. ASTM C 297 Test Method for Tensile Strength of Flat Sandwich Constructions in
Flatwise Plane.
5. ASTM D 968 (Federal Test Standard 141 A Method 6191) Test Method for Abrasion
Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive.
6. ASTM D 2247 (Federal Test Standard 141 A Method 620 1) Practice for Testing Water
Resistance of Coatings its 100%Relative Humidity.
7. ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect insulation from damage and from becoming wet before,during and after
installation.
END OF SECTION
ON
�w
07210-7 BUILDING INSULATION
am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
D. Furring strips ..
1. Install insulation between furring strips, hat channels,or Z shaped furring in areas
where finish surface will be applied.
2. Contact the furring strip manufacturer for recommendations on the appropriate fastener
system o use.
E. Between metal studs:
1. Friction fit insulation between studs after cover material has been installed on one side
of the cavity. Use wire or metal straps to hold insulation in place in applications
without a cover material or where the stud depth is larger than the insulation thickness.
When faced insulation is used, the attachment flanges may be taped to the face of the
metal stud prior to applying the interior finish.
2. Provide supplementary support to hold the product in place until finish surface is
applied when insulation is installed in heights over 8 feet.
F. Do not install batt insulation until ducts, conduit, and piping are in place.
G. Do not install fiberglass insulation on top of or within 3" of recessed light fixtures, fans, or
other heat generating equipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION - FOUNDATION INSULATION
A. Surface conditions: Remove concrete fins and mortar projections that interfere with
placement of insulation boards.
B. Installation:
1. Apply insulation boards to inside face of exterior foundation walls, extending to the top
of footing, except where otherwise indicated. Place insulation horizontally.
2. Adhere insulation to wall by applying 2"diameter spots of adhesive to insulation ..
boards 16"o.c. each way.
C. Cut insulation to fit snugly around pilasters,projections, curves, and irregularities on the
wall surface. Fill voids with insulation.
3.4 INSTALLATION VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Maintain vapor retarder integrity by tightly abutting adjacent insulation. Repair punctures
or tears in vapor retarder facing by taping. Follow tape manufacturer's application !*�
recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove and dispose of excess insulation, wrappings, and other waste materials.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210-6 ,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
g. Flamespread: 5.
h. Smoke developed: 145.
i. Water vapor permeance: 1.1 perm maximum.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor barrier: 4 mil polyethylene film with vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms or less;
natural color.
B. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation of the work in this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed.
Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. Verify mechanical
and electrical services within walls have been tested.
B. Provide written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this
section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION—THERMAUSOUND ATTENUATION BATTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's instruction for particular conditions of installation in each
case.
B. Mechanical fasteners:
1. Apply insulation directly to the interior surface of the exterior wall with
2. appropriate spindle or prong type anchors.
3. Fasten anchors to wall by welding the pin to metal and then impale the insulation, or by
using pre attached heads and welding them through the insulation.
4. Fasten anchors to wall with adhesive. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for
surface preparation and adhesive pattern.
5. Impale insulation on anchor and secure with washer. Select pin lengths to ensure tight
fit. Protect pin tips where subject to human contact. See manufacturer's diagram for
impaling pin pattern.
C. Adhesive fasteners:
1. Apply insulation with adhesives. Follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations for
surface preparation and adhesive pattern.
07210-5 BUILDING INSULATION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 `
JUNE 17,2005
C. Sound attenuation batts:
1. Acceptable product: Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation as manufactured by Owens
Corning. ..
2. Type: Un-faced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I.
3. Thickness: As shown on project drawings. �.
4. Surface burning characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
a. Maximum flame spread: 10.
b. Maximum smoke developed: 10.
5. Combustion characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136 test.
6. Fire resistance ratings: Passes ASTM E 119 test.
7. Dimensional stability: Linear shrinkage less than 0.1%.
D. Semi-rigid fiberglass insulation:
1. Acceptable product: Fiberglas#703 as manufactured by Owens-Corning
2. Type: FRK faced glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 612, Type
IA and 113.
3. Size: Thickness as shown on project drawings.
4. Vapor retarder perm rating: FRK facing perms maximum 0.02.
5. Surface burning characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. .�
a. Maximum flame spread: 25.
b. Maximum smoke developed: 50.
6. Dimensional stability: Linear shrinkage less than 0.1%.
E. Under-slab rigid insulation:
1. Acceptable product: Foamular 600 as manufactured by Owens-Corning.
2. Type: High compressive resistance extruded polystyrene type board insulation;
complying with ASTM C578 type VII; square edges.
3. Thickness: As shown on project drawings.
4. Properties:
a. Flexural strength: 140 psi minimum. .�
b. Water absorption: 0.05% by volume maximum.
c. Thermal conductivity k-value at 75 degrees F: 0.2.
d. Thermal conductivity k-Value at 40 Degrees F: 0.18.
e. Compressive strength: 60 psi minimum.
f. Dimensional stability: 2%linear change maximum.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072104
®r
wi
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
PART 2 PRODUCTS
4M 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications herein:
1. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge, PA 19482; tel: (800) 233-8990.
1. Dow Chemical Company, Midland, MI 48641;tel: (866) 583-2583.
2. Johns Manville, Denver, CO 80217;tel: (800) 654-3103.
3. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH 43659; tel: (800)438-7465.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Foundation insulation:
1. Acceptable product: Foamular 250 as manufactured by Owens-Corning.
2. Type: Rigid closed-cell extruded polystyrene board insulation with square edges.
a. Thickness: 2" unless otherwise indicated.
3. Properties:
a. Flexural Strength: 75 psi minimum.
b. Water Absorption: 0.1%by volume maximum.
c. Thermal Conductivity k-value at 75 degrees F: 0.2.
d. Thermal Conductivity k-Value at 40 Degrees F: 0.18.
e. Compressive Strength: 25 psi minimum.
f. Dimensional Stability: 2%linear change maximum.
g. Flamespread: 5.
h. Smoke Developed: 45-175.
i. Water Vapor Permeance: 1.1 perm maximum.
4. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. Thermal batt insulation:
1. Acceptable product: Thermal Batt Insulation as manufactured by Owens-Corning.
2. Type: FRK-faced and unfaced fiber thermal insulation where shown on project
drawings, complying with ASTM C 665, Type I and ASTM E 136.
3. Thickness: As shown on project drawings.
4. Surface burning characteristics: Un-faced insulation.
a. Maximum flame spread: 10.
b. Maximum smoke developed: 10.
5. Combustion characteristics: Un-faced insulation passes ASTM E 136 test.
6. Dimensional stability: Linear shrinkage less than 0.1%.
07210-3 BUILDING INSULATION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE aw
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
..s
1. E 84 Test/Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
2. E 96 Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
3. E 136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C.
4. C 177 Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of the
uarded Hot Plate
5. C 423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and the Sound Absorption Coefficient by the
Reverberation Room Method «�
6. C 518 Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Heat Flow Meter
w.
7. C 553 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulations
8. C 612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
9. C 665 Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
ewr
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Product data: Submit product data for each specified product.
2. Quality assurance submittals:
a. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with
ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and
protection during installation.
C. Handle board insulation carefully so corners are not broken off or boards otherwise
damaged. .�
D. Label insulation packages to include material name,production date and/or product code.
1.6 SEQUENCING SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation with other trades whose work may be affected or have effect.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210-2 •R
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes, types and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Foundation insulation.
2. Thermal batt insulation.
3. Sound attenuating insulation.
4. Semi-rigid fiberglass insulation.
5. Under slab insulation.
6. Vapor retarder.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02220 - Structure Excavation, Trenching,and Backfill
B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
C. Section 03420 - Prestressed/Precast Concrete Walls
D. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry
E. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
F. Section 07270 - Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals
G. Section 07530- Single-ply Membrane Roofing
H. Section 09250- Gypsum Board
` 1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE
PROTECTION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
�w
B. Temporary Supports and Bracing: Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to
maintain position, stability and alignment until permanent connections are made.
3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation/erection Tolerances: The following allowable installed tolerances are
allowable variations from locations and dimensions indicated by the Contract Documents
and shall not be added to allowable tolerances indicated for other work.
1. Face Width of Joint for Units: +3/,6
2. Warpage of One Corner out of Plane with Other Three: %b"per foot or 1/8" total.
3. Bowing: not over L/360 where L is the panel length.
4. Adjacent Units: Flush, +'/8". ~"
3.6 PATCHING
..
A. Patching requirements: patching will be permitted only of structural adequacy of unit is
not impaired. Obtain Architect's approval of all appearance patching. Remove and replace
work that cannot be successfully patched.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by fabricator. Do not
use chemical cleaning solutions. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully
cleaned. Prevent damage or deterioration of surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Ohl
CARPENTRY 06600-6 *�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
JJ'
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Construct all fiberglass work plumb, level, and true with tight, close fitting joints.
4* fiberglass shall be securely attached and braced to surrounding construction, and executed
in a first-class workmanship manner.
B. Include all architectural relief throughout the project:
1. Fabricate and install architectural relief items to match existing shapes, details on the
Drawings and the above materials schedule. All work shall be constructed and installed
with the highest quality of workmanship by first-class millworkers and finish
carpenters normally engaged in work of the indicated type and specified quality.
2. Take all necessary field measurements and documentation before starting fabrication of
"` built-in work.
C. Provide all rough hardware required to complete the work, using concealed fastenings
wherever possible. In general, concealed fastenings shall be cadmium plated or zinc
chromate plated except that at exterior areas they shall be hot-dip galvanized steel or non-
ferrous. All exposed fastenings in all exposed locations shall be non-ferrous or galvanized
steel.
D. All splice joints shall shed water and be placed perpendicular to view.
3.2 EXECUTION
A. The erector shall examine substrates, supports and conditions under which this work is to
be performed and notify contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper
condition of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected. Beginning work means installer accepts substrates and conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Provide installation templates or diagrams to coordinate correct locations of items which
are attached to building structure. Supervise installation to ensure suitability for
connection work.
3.4 INSTALLATION/ERECTION
A. Erection: Lift and handle units at designated lifting points identified for fabricator. Set
unit level,plumb and square within specified tolerances. Install and erect units in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Maintain uniform joint widths and
alignment. Install clips, anchors and all needed accessories. Installer to provide all
templates and field dimensions to fabricator.
06600-5 GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC
00
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
D. Inserts and embedments: Properly and securely embed inserts as needed to develop full
strength of connections. Maintain proper cover over embedded items.
.r
E. Panel Identification: Mark each unit on a concealed surface with identification mark
corresponding to erection drawings and with fabrication date.
2.3 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate units to comply with the following dimensional
tolerances:
1. Dimensional: '/8"
2. Warp or Bow: f %b"per foot, maximum '/4" total.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Exposed Surfaces: Provide finishes and textures matching approved samples.
1. Directional, visible fibers,pinholes in gelcoat and other visible defects are not
acceptable.
2.5 DIMENSIONAL LUMBER
A. Blocking materials shall be of sound stock, new, straight, of consistent size, free of stains
and mildew. Where exposed or semi-exposed, wood members shall be selected for the
best possible appearance from the grade of stock specified.
B. All wood shall be kiln-dried to moisture contents as follows.
1. For exterior work-9%to 14%, with average not to exceed 12%.
C. Wood for concealed use shall be pressure-treated with waterborne salt preservatives that
will have no deleterious effect on the polyester materials. Treatment shall be 0.40 pounds
per cubic foot of retention. Treatment shall leave a noticeable tint to wood so that treated
wood can be visually differentiated from untreated wood. No oil-based pentachlorophenol
or creosote treatments shall be permitted. All pressure treated stock shall be kiln dried
after treatment.
D. Plywood for concealed use shall be %2", '/4" thick, unless otherwise noted, exterior grade of
Group 1 or 2 species, Type CC or better. All plywood shall have an APA stamp on it and
shall meet the requirements of Product Standard PS 1-83 for Construction and Industrial
Plywood. Plywood shall be pressure-treated as provided for in Paragraph 2.01 E of this '
Section.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Glue for lamination and fabrication of wood items—exterior grade, waterproof,phenolic
resin glue. „
CARPENTRY 066004 .•.
our
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
" ► RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Mock-ups: After samples are accepted for texture and finish,provide two full-scale mock-
ups of typical panels and shapes. Approved mock-ups shall serve as the standard of
quality required for work. Approved mock-ups may be incorporated into the finished
work.
D. The Contractor shall submit each type of proposed fastener to Architect for approval.
E. Certifications: Provide certifications stating that materials and fabricated assemblies
comply with requirements.
F. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication and erection of all parts
of the work. Provide plans, elevations and details of anchorage, connections, lifting
devices and accessory items. Provide installation templates and erection drawings for
work installed by others and embedded in or attached to other construction. Provide
information on erection sequence with plans coded to numbered units.
G. Verification samples: Submit representative samples of fabricated work, showing the full
range of texture and finish variations expected. Provide three samples having minimum
area of one (1) square foot each. Approved verification samples will be retained by the
Architect as the standard of quality required by the work of this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
44 A. Pre-engineered, molded fiberglass-reinforced polyester fabrications of isophthallic resin,
95 pounds per cubic foot density, 16,800 psi tensile strength. Surface coat,polyester
gelcoat 0.020" thick with UV stabilizers; pigmented to match color selected by Architect.
B. Connection and erection materials: Provide all connection and erection materials needed,
including attachments to building structure. All ferrous metal components are to be hot-
"'" dip galvanized. Touch-up damages or abraded surfaces with zinc-rich paint as specified in
section 05200.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate all fiberglass shapes from molds of new shapes closely conforming in
00 dimensions and profiles to existing configurations.
B. Molds: Fabricate work to be truly straight, plumb, level and square. Provide work to sizes,
00 shapes and profiles indicated on approved shop drawings. Build in reglets, slots, hanger
assemblies and all other work as indicated on approved shop drawings.
C. Thickness of Surface Coat: Accurately provide thickness indicated on approved shop
drawings. Make at least two thickness measurements per five square feet
06600-3 GLASS—FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
ap
B. Inspection: Permit the Architect or his authorized representative to conduct unlimited
inspections at the manufacturer's plant and site. The Architect or his authorized
representative reserves the right to inspect units at the plant before shipping. sm
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Materials shall be applied to properly prepared areas.
B. Materials which have a temperature other than the application temperatures of the
manufacturer shall not be applied.
C. Any adjacent building, landscape, or paved area damaged during construction shall be
replaced or restored by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
D. Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary protection and barriers to segregate the
work to prevent damage to adjacent areas. ••
E. Fabricator/Erector: A firm which has at least ten(10) years experience in work of the type
required by this section and with production capacity to provide the work required for the ,
project without delay. Installer to provide all field dimensions to fabricator.
1.6 DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES
A. Dimensions and quantities of work shall be determined by the Contractor. The area plans
have been compiled from various sources and may not reflect the conditions at the time of
construction.
B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the condition shown and to immediately
notify the Architect of any discrepancy.
C. No dimensioned or detailed exterior cornice relief drawings are provided for the explicit
purpose of ensuring the Contractor has fully surveyed the existing conditions and has a
full working knowledge of the Scope of Work.
D. Intent of the work is to provide architectural relief depths consistent with original material
qualities, therefore, replication sculpturing may be required.
1.7 SAMPLES AND TECHNICAL DATA
A. Submit samples, complete manufacturer's technical data of all materials and systems
listed, to the Architect for approval.
B. Fiberglass manufacturer's representative shall visit the project site and consulted with as
to the application of their materials as indicated herein. Any resulting recommendations
made by such representative shall be forwarded, in writing, to the Architect for approval
prior to implementation.
CARPENTRY 06600-2 ••
or
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 06600 GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials,tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes, types, and details of work described in this section.
1.2 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 05120—Structural Steel
B. Section 06100--Carpentry
C. Section 07600—Flashings, Sheetmetal and Miscellaneous Metal
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. All materials,when delivered to site, shall be stacked and stored above the ground under
protective coverings or indoors in such a manner as to insure proper drainage,ventilation,
and protection from the weather.
B. The Contractor shall be allowed limited storage within the building or on site.
C. Deliver, store and handle fabricated units in strict compliance with fabricator's
instructions and recommendations and industry standards. Protect from all possible
damage. Support and space units during transit and storage with nonstaining shock
absorbing resilient spacers.
1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The Owner reserves the right to inspect and test all construction operations and materials.
1. Any defect or noncompliance discovered by inspection shall be reported to the
Contractor who shall promptly remedy the defect and promptly remove any defective
material from the site.
• 2. The Owner reserves the right to inspect the work or part of it as he chooses. His failure
to inspect the work in progress shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
properly executing the contractor work, nor shall it impair the Owner's right to reject
deficiencies he may subsequently discover.
on
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
B. Maximum offset from true alignment with abutting materials: 1/32 inch.
i
3.5 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING—NOT USED
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentation. Sand work
smooth.
B. Site finishing: Refer to Section 09900.
3.6 SCHEDULE—NOT USED
A. The rough carpentry work shall include all work of rough carpentry nature required
throughout the project to complete the entire intent of the work. This work shall include,
but not be limited to the following:
1. Wood blocking within metal studs for door frames, handrails, supports of special grab
rails,plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, washroom accessories, etc.—N/A
2. Install hollow metal and wood doors and hollow metal frames. —N/A
3. Wood blocking for signage by Owner.—N/A
4. Wood stud and turkey wire partitions and doors. —N/A
5. Wood blocking at exterior refrigerator doors. —N/A
6. Interior stockroom wood bumpers. —N/A
7. Wood blocking within metal studs at all areas where wall mounted shelving, and
Owner's fixtures and equipment attach. —N/A
8. Wood blocking at building perimeter roof edge and at all roof curbs as required.—N/A
9. Wood blocking at storefront exterior windows and automatic doors. —N/A
B. Schedule of interior plywood locations shall include but not be limited to the following: —N/A
1. 1/2-inch type CD interior grade plywood to 8'-0"A.F.F. at all first floor storage areas
and other areas where noted. Box around all pipes, ducts, etc. with plywood over metal
studs.—N/A
2. 5/8-inch type CD interior grade plywood full height at EVAP Room walls. —N/A
3. 3/4-inch INT B D APA fire-retardant treated plywood backings for surface mounted
electric panel boards,protection cabinets and motor control panels, and telephone
backboards, and other wall mounted mechanical and electrical equipment. —N/A
4. 3/4-inch INT-B-D-APA oak veneer plywood backer for communication equipment in
the Technology Room only. —N/A
END OF SECTION
06100-7 ROUGH CARPENTRY
.R
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE so
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
iws
accessories�6quired to secure wood work to adjacent construction,to support it, and as
required for/the proper execution of the work. No
1. Sheathing to metal framing: `Hilti' Kwik-Flex or `Elco' Dril-Flex, 10-24 x 1 1/4"wafer
head#3; no substitutions allowed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as
shown on shop drawings.
B. Ensure that mechanical and electrical items affecting this section of work are properly
placed, complete, and have been inspected by the Architect/Engineer prior to
commencement of installation.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Plywood:
I. Install plywood in the largest possible size in both directions, having square cut ends
and rigidly secured in place without buckle,warp, or deformations.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FIRE RETARDANT TREATED LUMBER AND PLYWOOD
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical
bulletins, for fire retardant treatment installation.
B. Application:
1. Fire retardant treated lumber and plywood used in structural applications shall be
applied according to strength tables provided by the treatment manufacturer.
2. Treated wood shall not be installed in areas where it is exposed to precipitation, direct '
wetting, or regular condensation.
C. Exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage or installation shall be avoided. If
material does become wet, it shall be replaced or permitted to dry to a maximum moisture
content of 19% for lumber and 15% for plywood prior to covering or enclosure by
wallboard, roofing or other construction materials. �*
D. Protection: Protect fire retardant treated wood from damage during construction.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from true position: 1/16 inch.
CARPENTRY 06100-6 ••
w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
so RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3. Kiln drying after treatment shall be monitored by Timber Products Inspection, and the
identification label on each piece of wood shall so indicate.
G. Source Quality: Obtain fire retardant treatment from a single manufacturer.
2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER AND PLYWOOD
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Arch Wood Protection, 1955 Lake Park Drive, Suite 250, Smyrna, GA 30080; Tel:
(770) 801-6600; Fax: (770) 801-1990.
a. Wolmanized
2. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. 154 Wire Road, Thomson, GA 30824; Tel: (706)
595-5058; Fax: (706) 595-8462.
a. CCA
3. Osmose, Inc., 980 Ellicott Street, Buffalo,NY 14209; Tel: (800) 877-7653; Fax: (716)
882-7822.
a. Osmose
B. Preservative treat all plywood for exterior applications in contact with cementitious
materials, nailers, wood blocking, insulation stops, and underlayment used on roofing
installation.
2.5 FASTENERS FOR BLOCKING—NOT USED
A. Only Factory Mutual approved fasteners shall be used for securing insulation stops,
blocking, nailers to roof deck.
2.6 WELDED WIRE MESH—NOT USED
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. McNichols Company, Tampa, FL 33609; tel: (800)237-3820.
2. Approved equal.
B. Material: 1" x 1"pre-galvanized welded wire cloth mesh as manufactured by McNichols
Company.
1. Wire diameter: 0.063 inches.
2. Sheet size: 48" wide x 100 foot rolls.
2.7 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Rough hardware shall include temporary hinges, latches, locks, anchors, bolts, nails,
spikes, clips, screws,ties, expansion and toggle bolts,power driven fasteners and other
06100-5 ROUGH CARPENTRY
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE d.
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Plywood for rough framing: "CDX"APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1. Provide .�
Structural 1 panels for shear walls.
2.3 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. 154 Wire Road, Thomson, GA 30824; Tel: (706)
595-5058; Fax: (706) 595-8462.
a. Exterior Fire X
b. Pyro-Guard
2. Arch Wood Protection, 1955 Lake Park Drive, Suite 250, Smyrna, GA 30080; Tel:
(770) 801-6600; Fax: (770) 801-1990.
a. Dricon
3. Osmose, Inc., 980 Ellicott Street, Buffalo,NY 14209; Tel: (800) 877-7653; Fax: (716) .�
882-7822.
a. Fire Pro
B. All plywood designated to be exterior fire retardant treated Shall be pressure impregnated
with Exterior Fire-X and shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in
accordance with ASTM E-84, "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials." Also, when test conditions are extended to 30 minutes the flame
spread did not progress more than 10 1/2 feet beyond the centerline of the burners,with no
evidence of significant progressive combustion.
C. Each piece of fire retardant treated lumber and plywood shall be manufactured under
Underwriters Laboratories independent third party follow-up inspection service, and each .�
piece shall bear the UL qualification label for surface burning characteristics in the 30
minute ASTM E-84 flame spread test. Each piece will be labeled indicating kiln dried
after treatment(KDAT).
D. In addition, there shall be no increase in the listed classification when tested after ASTM
D-2898 "Standard Method of Accelerated Weathering of Fire Retardant Treated Wood
For Fire Testing."
E. Corrosion Properties: Fire retardant treated wood in contact with carbon steel, galvanized
steel, aluminum, copper and red brass shall exhibit corrosion rates less than 1 mil per year
when tested in accordance with Fed. Spec. MIL-L-19140, Paragraph 4.6.5.2.
F. Moisture Content: Provide fire retardant treated wood with moisture content as follows:
1. Lumber: Dried to a maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment. —NOT USED
2. Plywood: Dried to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment.
CARPENTRY 061004
ss
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2. UI/Building Materials Directory.
i
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 0 13 00:
aw 1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each specified product.
2. Quality assurance submittals:
a. Test Report: Certified test report showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties. Include in test report certification that fire
retardant solution does not contain ammonium phosphate.
b. Evaluation Report: National Evaluation Report NER-303 or ICBO ER-5755
indicating flamespread, strength, corrosion and hygroscopic properties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wood treatment plant qualifications: Wood treatment plant experienced in performing
ft work of this section which has specialized in the treatment of wood similar to that
required for this project.
1. Certificate: When requested, submit certificate indicating qualification.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect materials under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER-- NOT USED
A. Provide lumber of the appropriate grade and species as specified by the design criteria of
the intended application.
1. Dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated, kiln-dried, sound and free from
splits, checks, shakes, and wane.
2. Studs, plates, and other structural lumber shall be S-P-F#2 grade or better.
a. Species: Douglas Fir or Western Coast Hemlock, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 PLYWOOD
A. Provide plywood of the appropriate grade and species as specified by the design criteria of
the intended application. Plywood shall comply with PS-1-74 and shall bear American
Plywood Association stamp.
�r
06100-3 ROUGH CARPENTRY
.w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
J. Section 099 0 - Painting
K. Section 10 60 - Toilet Compartments—N/A
L. Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories—N/A
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Allow for furnishing and installing 750 linear feet of 2 x 6 fire retardant treated wood
blocking within interior metal stud partitions as directed by Big Y Foods, Inc.; see Section *�
01020 - Allowances. —NOT USED
1.4 REFERENCES ..�
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM D 5516 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire-
Retardant Treated Softwood Plywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures.
2. ASTM D 5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant ,
Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant
Treated Lumber.
3. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
B. American Wood-Preservers'Association(AWPA):
1. AWPA Standard C20 Structural Lumber- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure
Processes.
2. AWPA Standard C27 Plywood - Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
3. AWPA Standard C31 Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously
Protected From Liquid Water-Treatment by Pressure Processes.
4. AWPA Standard P5 Standard for Waterborne Preservatives.
5. AWPA Standard P17 Fire Retardant Formulations.
6. AWPA Use Category System, Appendix H.
7. AWPA Use Category UC1.
8. AWPA Use Category UC2.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 255 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials. ..
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
CARPENTRY 06100-2 ..
ON
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
ON RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
40
SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
r PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials, tools, equipment, appliances,transportation,
supervision and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section, as
shown on the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
locations, sizes, types and details of carpentry work, and related work described in this
section including but not limited to the following:
s 1. Fire-retardant treated(FRT) lumber and plywood.
2. Preservative-treated(PT) lumber and plywood.
3. Cutting and patching for all trades.
4. Furnish and install rough hardware.
5. Temporary work:
a. Bracing, centering, shoring, frames, necessary supports.
b. Protection of openings in floors, walls, roof.
c. Stairs,ramps, rails, guards, closures.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-place Concrete
B. Section 03420 - Prestressed/Precast Concrete Walls—N/A
C. Section 05400 - Cold-formed Metal Framing
D. Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications
E. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry—N/A
F. Section 08110- Steel Doors and Frames—N/A
G. Section 08210 - Flush Wood Doors—N/A
H. Section 08710-Finish Hardware—N/A
I. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
1
ar
4w
W
DIVISION 6---CARPENTRY
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
•
16. Angle base at refrigerated cases:
a. 3" x 3"aluminum angle.
END OF SECTION
.ft
am
ow
METALS 05500-8
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
6. St el pipe bollards:
a. 8" and 4"nominal x standard weight(ASTM A-53-type E)concrete filled steel
A guard posts for protection of the building where shown on the plans or elevations.
Ship pipes to job unfilled. Concrete for filling pipes and for setting pipes is
covered in Section 03300.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
7. Steel channel door frames:
a. Standard section steel channels and miscellaneous channels of sizes as shown on
Project Drawings. Furnish anchors as detailed.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
8. Exterior pipe railings and guards, and expanded metal mesh:
a. 1-1/2"diameter steel pipe and expanded metal mesh equal to 1-1/2"#9 standard as
manufactured by McNichols Co., (800) 237-3820.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
9. Angle stiffeners:
a. 3"x 3" 1/4" and 2"x 2" x 1/4" steel angle stiffeners in low partitions below Pastry,
Deli, Seafood, and Prepared Foods and all other free standing low partitions. See
Project Drawings.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
10. Wall closure angles:
a. 3" x 3"x 1/4" aluminum angle 10'-0" long as shown on Project Drawings..
11. Downspout guard detail:
a. 3/16"bent steel plate as detailed on Project Drawings.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
12. Exterior cart rail:
a. As detailed on Project Drawings.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
13. Wood curb/base angle:
a. As detailed on Project Drawings.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
14. Roof ladder:
a. As detailed on Project Drawings.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
15. Bent plate steel frames:
a. As detailed on Project Drawings.
b. Shop finish shall be prime paint.
05500-7 METAL FABRICATIONS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE .�
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
F. Where aluminum is in contact with cement mortar, concrete or masonry, contacting
surfaces shall be coated with an approved asphaltic paint.
G. Where verticals of railings are to be set in concrete and not otherwise detailed, cast into
concrete heavy gage galvanized sleeves. Set verticals in sleeves, fill sleeve with quick
setting anchor cement specified under Materials.
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. The miscellaneous steel work shall include all work of miscellaneous nature required
throughout the Project to complete the entire intent of the work. This work shall include,
but not be limited to the schedule of miscellaneous steel items indicated below:
1. Bearing and leveling plates:
a. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required ..
thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as
required.
2. Loose steel lintels:
a. Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and
partitions as shown. Provide not less than 8" bearing at each side of openings,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Miscellaneous framing and supports:
a. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural
steel framework, as required to complete work.
b. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, �*
of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing.
Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and.plates and
steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. 'e
Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.
c. Shop finish for exterior miscellaneous frames and supports shall be prime paint.
4. Miscellaneous steel trim:
a. Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated,
fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices
wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for
coordination of assembly and installation with other work.
b. Shop finish for exterior miscellaneous steel trim shall be prime paint.
5. Bolts for wood cap: ..�..
a. Furnish to Mason Subcontractor, 1/2" x 18" long galvanized bolts with nuts and
washers to secure wood cap to masonry walls.
METALS 05500-6
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3. Prime paint items with one coat.
4. All parts that will be inaccessible after erection or assembly shall be given an
additional shop coat of shop primer prior to being assembled or erected.
5. After erection, bolts,nuts, and other unpainted or marred surfaces shall be touched up
with shop coat.
6. Flush joints, screw heads, etc., shall be filled with approved mineral filler, and properly
prepared for final painting.
7. Items shall have smooth finished surfaces and be ready to receive final painting.
w
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
'RM A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Start of installation shall mean erector accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting
templates, to appropriate sections.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment
until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Welding:
1. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D-1.1.
3. After erection, shop touch-up welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or
galvanized,except those surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
4. Paint welded field connections with approved zinc rich paint.
w
D. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
on E. Furnish and set required supporting members, fastenings, framing, hangers, bracing,
anchors, brackets, lugs, sleeves, straps, bolts, and similar items required to set, connect
and secure work.
10
05500-5 METAL FABRICATIONS
in
AM
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT No. 05013031 an
JUNE 17,2005
2. Joints shall be of such character and so assembled that they will be as strong and rigid so
as adjoining sections.
3. Joints shall be located where least conspicuous. A.
4. Unnecessary jointing of plain surfaces and of moldings is prohibited.
B. Hand wrought work shall be forged and finished by hand. Curves shall be true, and rings ow
or loops shall be without visible joints. Where possible, members in contact shall be
riveted or welded. When riveted,heads shall be countersunk, finished flush.
.W
C. Exposed faces of work shall be free from warp, dents, buckles, or other distortion.
Corners shall be accurately formed to profiles shown. Work shall be securely fastened
together, to supporting construction, using fastenings concealed throughout, unless
otherwise shown or approved. Sheet shall be reinforced and stiffened as required.
D. Welding:
1. Where welding is required, it shall conform to requirements for shielded metal arc
welding of Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction of AWS
D-1.1.
2. Joints required to be welded shall be continuously welded or spot welded as specified,
and face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth where exposed to view. ■»
E. Galvanizing:
1. Galvanizing shall consist of heavy zinc coating by hot dipping process, carrying
minimum of 2 ounces of zinc per square foot of metal surface after galvanizing.
2. Zinc coating shall be smooth, of reasonable uniform thickness, free from dross and
uncoated spots.
3. Galvanizing shall be done after fabrication, drilling, cutting, milling, and fastening of
assembly.
4. Miscellaneous metals above roof shall be galvanized.
F. Do necessary cutting, drilling, fitting as required for installation of miscellaneous metal .�
work. Work shall be carefully done and when required shall be fitted at building before
finishing.
G. Ferrous and non-ferrous metals shall be insulated at contacts with felt washers, strips, or
sheets, bitumastic paints or other approved means.
H. Shop painting:
1. Prepare surfaces to be prime painted in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
2. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is
required.
METALS 05500-4
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
40 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
PART 2 PRODUCTS
40 2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural steel sections shall conform to ASTM A-36.
B. Cold-formed structural steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A-500.
C. Hot-formed structural steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A-501.
D. Steel plates shall conform to ASTM A-283.
E. Cast-iron shall conform to ASTM A-48.
F. Cast steel shall conform to ASTM A-27.
G. Malleable iron castings shall conform to ASTM A-47.
H. Steel pipe for railings shall conform to ASTM A-53, Grade B, Schedule 80.
I. High strength bolts shall conform to ASTM A-325, galvanized to ASTM A-153 for
galvanized components.
J. Welding materials shall meet the requirements of AWS D-1.1,type required for materials
being welded.
1. Arc welding electrodes shall be E-70XX Series.
K. Galvanizing:
1. Hot-dip galvanizing of iron and steel products shall be in accordance with ASTM A-
""'' 123.
2. Hot-dip galvanizing of iron and steel hardware shall be in accordance with ASTM A-
153.
3. Hot-dip galvanizing of steel sheet shall be in accordance with ASTM A-525.
00 4. Galvanizing strand wire shall be in accordance with ASTM A-475.
L. Paint:
0 1. Shop and touch-up primer for non-galvanized steel components shall meet the
requirement of SSPC-15, Type 1, Red Oxide.
2. Touch-up primer for galvanized surfaces shall be zinc-rich type.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Joints:
1. All miscellaneous metal items shall be accurately fabricated and erected with exposed
joints close fitted and secured.
05500-3 METAL FABRICATIONS
MW
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE Oft
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
so
3. ASTM�/A7 Low-carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners
4. ASTM A325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
f
5. ASTM A386 Zinc-coating (Hot-dip) on Assembled Steel Products
6. ASTM A500 Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes '•
7. ASTM A501 Hot-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
8. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Galvanized) for Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and
Forged Steel Shapes.
B. American Welding Society: AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code ..
C. Federal Specification (FS):
1. FS TT-P-641 Primer Coating, Zinc Dust-zinc Oxide(for galvanized surfaces).
2. FS TT-P-86d Primer Types I and II
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Shop drawings:
a. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and
type of fasteners, and accessories.
b. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Provide
templates for anchor and bolt installations by others to applicable trade.
c. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.
d. Prepare Shop Drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer registered •••
in the State of the Project.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store material in dry location. Handle finish metal surfaces with extreme care to
avoid scratching. Protect finish surfaces. Loose pieces of finished metal shall not be
shipped in direct contact with each other.
B. Defective work whether in materials or workmanship will be rejected. Remove and
replace such rejected work at no extra cost. ""
1.6 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
am
A. Work of this section shall be fitted to work of other sections, coordinated to best
advantage of entire job. Perform required cutting, drilling, fitting, and topping for
securing work in position to accommodate work of other sections.
METALS 05500-2 ,„
on
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
40 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual "apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes,types, and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Miscellaneous metal fabrications as scheduled herein.
2. Drilling and tapping of building construction and metal work required for fastening
work of this section.
3. Miscellaneous metal work, struts, brackets, bracing, lugs, anchors, inserts, hangers
required for supporting and fastening in place all work of this section and all adjacent
work of other sections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 -Cast-in-place Concrete
B. Section 03420 -Prestressed/Precast Concrete Walls
C. Section 04200 -Unit Masonry
D. Section 05120-Structural Steel
E. Section 05210 - Steel Joists and Joist Girders
F. Section 05310 - Metal Roof and Floor Decking
G. Section 09900 -Painting
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A36 Structural Steel
2. ASTM A53 Hot-dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe
An
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE l7,2005
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
*�* END OF SELECTION
4n
40
05400-7 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE am
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
no
3. Anchor runner track securely to the supporting structure as shown on the erection
drawings. Install concrete anchors only after full compressive strength has been
achieved. Provide a sill sealer or integrity gasket barrier between all concrete and steel Am
connections.
4. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting pieces of track to a common structural
element, or butt-weld or splice them together.
5. Align and plumb studs, and securely attach to the flanges or webs of both upper and
lower tracks except when vertical movement is specified. ow
6. Install jack studs or cripples below window sills, above window and door heads, at
freestanding stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support, securely attached to .m
supporting members.
7. Attach wall stud bridging in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows
according to manufacturer's recommendations. *-
8. Frame wall openings to include headers and supporting studs as shown in the drawings.
9. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed. +m
10. Where indicated in the drawings,provide for structural vertical movement using a
vertical slide clip or other means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. No
C. Steel Joists:
1. Locate joists directly over bearing studs or provide a suitable load distribution member AM
• at the top track.
2. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points where indicated in drawings.
we
3. Provide joist bridging as shown in drawings.
4. Provide end blocking where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Periodic special inspections are required by local code authorities. ••
1. Owner will hire and pay inspection agency.
2. Submit schedule showing when the following activities will be performed and resubmit ••r
schedule when timing changes.
3. Notify inspection agency not less than 3 days before the start of any of the following
activities.
4. Inspections are required during welding operations, screw attachment, bolting,
anchoring and other fastening of components within the force resisting structural
system, including struts, braces, and hold-downs.
METALS 05400-6 ,,.,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Cut all framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as
required for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place
until properly fastened.
B. Axially Loaded Studs:
1. Install studs to have full bearing against inside track web(1/16 inches(1.6 mm)
maximum gap)prior to stud and track attachment.
2. Splices in axially loaded studs are not permitted.
C. Fasteners: Fasten components using self-tapping screws or welding.
D. Welding: Welding is permitted on 18 gage or heavier material only.
1. Specify welding configuration and size on the Structural Calculation submittal.
2. Qualify welding operators in accordance with Section 6.0 of AWS D.1.3.
"0 3. Touch up all welds with zinc-rich paint in compliance with ASTM A 780.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation, inspect previous work of all other trades. Verify that all work is
complete and accurate to the point where this installation may properly proceed in strict
accordance with framing shop drawings.
40 B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 ERECTION
A. .General erection requirements:
1. Install cold formed framing in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 1007.
2. Weld in compliance with AWS D.1.3.
3. Install in compliance with applicable sections of the LRFD Manual of Steel
Construction.
40 B. Wall systems:
1. Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with approved
shop drawings.
2. Handle and lift prefabricated panels in a manner so as not to cause distortion in any
member.
05400-5 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
No
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ,elf
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2. Minimum Yield Strength: 33 ksi (345 MPa).
3. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 20 gage, 0.0329 inch.
B. Runner Track: Cold formed galvanized steel sheet; Dietrich Big "D" Structural Runner
Track
1. Designation: TSB Standard Leg 1 1/4 inches high.
2. Designation: Slip Track
3. Minimum Yield Strength: 33 ksi (345 MPa).
4. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 20 gage, 0.0329 inch.
C. Slide Clips:
1. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 12 gage, 0.0966 inch.
D. Clip Angles (Support Clips):
1. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 16 gage 0.0538 inch.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
E. Bridging/Spacer Bar: Dietrich Spazzer 5400.
1. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 16 gage, 0.0538 inch.
2. 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 50 inches (32 by 32 by 1270 mm) long pre-notched at 16 by 24
inches centers.
F. Web Stiffeners:
1. Width: 4 inches.
2. Length: As shown on drawings.
G. Framing Component Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required for a
complete system.
1. Flat Strapping.
2. Angles, Plates, Sheets.
3. Custom Brake-Formed Shapes.
H. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; Steel, complying with ASTM C 1002;
Galvanized coating, plated or oil-phosphate coated complying with ASTM B 633 as
needed for required corrosion resistance.
I. Touch-Up Paint: Zinc rich, containing 95-percent metallic zinc,ZRC 350 as ..
manufactured by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA.
METALS 054004 ,,,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
Where prefabricated or pre-finished panels are to be provided, provided drawings
depicting panel configurations, dimensions and locations.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has
specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.
B. Pre-installation meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project
requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
B. Store materials protected from exposure to rain, snow or other harmful weather
conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Dietrich Metal Framing, Pittsburgh, PA 15219; tel: (412) 281-2805.
2. Approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Formed Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M; unless indicated
otherwise.
B. Galvanized Coating: G60 coating weight minimum, complying with ASTM C 955.
C. Galvanized Coating: G90 coating weight minimum, complying with ASTM C 955.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Studs: Cold formed galvanized steel sheet C-studs; Dietrich Big"D" Steel C-Studs:
1. Sizes: As indicated on drawings.
05400-3 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
MW
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE am
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Cold-formed metal framing systems, subjected directly to wind, floor and/or roof loads
to include, but not limited to: flat and sloped roof framing, exterior soffits, walls,
trusses,joists, rafters, bridging, studs, plates, headers,tracks, connections, .�
accessories and temporary and permanent bracing.
2. The members and systems shown in the Project Drawings shall be considered
minimum and schematic.
3. The governing Building Code for the design of cold-formed steel framing systems shall
be the Massachusetts State Building Code.
4. The design shall not include any structural benefit from veneers or building skin
systems. The cold-formed metal framing shall alone carry the vertical and horizontal
loads to the supports. Deflection limits are as follows:
a. Walls; L/600.
b. Roofs; L/360 for Live Load, L/240 for Dead Load. ap
1.5 SUBMITTALS
..
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, data sheets and installation
recommendations for specified products. MN
2. Structural calculations: Submit structural calculations prepared by manufacturer for
approval. 8Submittal shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state ..
of the project.
a. Description of design criteria.
b. Engineering analysis depicting stress and deflection(stiffness) requirements for "w
each framing application.
c. Selection of framing components, accessories and welded connection requirements. ,.
d. Verification of attachments to structure and adjacent framing components.
3. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings prepared by manufacturer for approval. Shop
.R
drawings shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of the
project.
a. Submit shop drawings showing plans, sections, elevations, layouts,profiles and am
product component locations, including anchorage, bracing, fasteners,
accessories and finishes.
b. Show connection details with screw types and locations, weld lengths and MW
locations, and other fastener requirements.
am
METALS 05400-2 so
No
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, 'General Conditions of the Contract for Construction'; and
Division 1, 'General Requirements of the Project Manual' apply to all work of this section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials,tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes,types and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Cold formed metal framing for walls and roofs.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
B. Section 07210 - Building Insulation
C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-
Dip Galvanized Coatings; 2000.
2. ASTM A 1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and
Nomnetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members; 2001.
3. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel; 1998.
4. ASTM C 1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing(Transverse
and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2000.
B. AISC - LRFD Manual of Steel Construction; third edition.
C. AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; 1996.
D. AWS D.1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2000.
40
no
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
40 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. Side l p attachment: Fasten side laps of deck units with spans greater than 5-feet at mid
span r 36-inch intervals, whichever distance is smaller, or as shown on design drawings
using one of the following methods:
1. #10 self drilling screws.
2. Crimp or button punching is not permitted.
C. Perimeter edge attachment: Fasten perimeter edges of deck units at minimum 36-inch
intervals or as shown on design drawings using one of the following methods:
1. Arc spot puddle welds 5/8-inch minimum visible diameter or 1 inch long arc seam or
fillet weld.
2. Mechanical fasteners, either powder actuated,pneumatically driven or self drilling
screws may be used in lieu of welding, provided product data has been submitted and
approved.
D. Anchor accessories to supporting members by arc spot welds or self drilling screws at 12
inch maximum intervals or as shown on design drawings.
3.5 REPAIRS
W A. Before placement of roof insulation and roof covering:
1. Inspect the deck for tears, dents, or other damage that may prevent the deck from
40
action as a structural roof base.
2. Repair tears, dents, or other damage. Repair blowhole damage to steel joists or other
supporting members of the metal deck to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. Touch up welds, burned areas, and surface coating damage on each side of decking by
wire brushing the area, then coating with primer paint to match shop coat.
END OF SELECTION
40
05310-5 METAL ROOF DECKING
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
..t
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
PART 3 EXECUTION ..
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine support framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Place deck in accordance with approved placement plans.
B. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of support members.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL .�
A. Do not use deck units as a working platform or storage area until units are permanently
attached in position.
B. Do not impose construction loads that exceed load carrying capacity of deck.
C. Install deck panels and accessories according to Steel Deck Institute specifications and
recommendations, SDI Manual of Construction with Steel Deck, and in accordance with
the placement plans and requirements of this Section. ...
D. Place deck panels on structural supports and adjust to final position with ends lapped or
butted over structural supports with a minimum end lapped or butted over structural
supports with a minimum end bearing of 2 inches. Attach the deck panels firmly to the
supports immediately after placement in order to form a safe working platform.
E. Cut and neatly fit deck and accessories at skew conditions, around openings, and at other .�
work projecting through or adjacent to the decking.
F. Do not cut unscheduled openings through the deck without the approval of the Architect;
reinforce openings as directed.
3.4 INSTALLATION - ROOF DECK ..�
A. Anchor deck units to steel supporting members by arc spot puddle welds or approved
mechanical fasteners.
1. Arc spot puddle welds shall be 5/8 inch minimum visible diameter with the attachment
pattern shown on Project Drawings.
2. Mechanical fasteners, either powder actuated,pneumatically driven, or self drilling
screws may be used in lieu of welding, provided product data has been submitted and
approved. ,
METALS 053104
w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage
and handling.
B. If ground storage is needed, store deck bundles off the ground, with one end elevated to
provide drainage. Protect bundles against condensation with a ventilated waterproof
covering. Stack bundles so there is no danger of tipping, sliding, rolling, shifting or
material damage. Check bundles periodically for tightness, and retighten as necessary so
wind cannot loosen sheets.
C. Place deck bundles on the building frame near a main supporting beam at a column or
wall. Do not place bundles on unbolted frames or on unattached or un-bridged joists.
Ensure that the structural frame is properly braced to receive the bundles.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications herein:
1. Canam Steel Corporation, Columbus, OH 43213; tel: (614) 235-9805.
2. Epic Metals Corporation, Rankin, PA 15104; tel: (412) 351-3913.
3. Nucor- Vulcraft Group, Charlotte,NC 28211; tel: (843) 662-0381.
4. United Steel Deck, Inc., Plainfield,NJ 07080; tel: (800) 631-1215.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel roof deck:
1. Provide the following type; with depth, design thickness, and design configuration in
accordance with the requirements of the SDI.
a. Wide rib (Type B).
b. Depth: 1 '/2".
c. Design thickness: 20 gage.
2. Sheet steel for prime-painted roof deck and accessories shall conform to ASTM A 611
with a minimum yield strength of 33 ksi. Steel deck shall have a coat of manufacturer's
standard shop primer paint.
a. Omit shop primer paint on roof deck panels to receive cementious type spray-on
fireproofing; see Project Drawings.
3. Accessories:
a. Furnish ridge and valley plates, flat plates at change of deck direction, and sump
pans, as shown on plans to provide a finished surface for the application of roof
insulation and roof covering.
05310-3 METAL ROOF DECKING
ow
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 am
JUNE 17,2005
i ..
i
1. SDI 29 Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof
Decks, and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution.
2. SDI DDM02 - Diaphragm Design Manual.
3. SDI Manual of Construction with Steel Deck. ••
E. American Iron and Steel Institute(AISI):
1. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. no
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300: as
1. Product data:
a. Submit for each type of decking specified, including dimensions of individual am
components, profiles, and finishes.
b. Mechanical fasteners: Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency �.
evidencing compliance with requirements based on comprehensive testing.
2. Shop drawings: Show location of deck units, anchorage details, sump pans, cut
openings and accessories, and other information required for a thorough review.
3. Product certificates: Signed by the manufacturer of the steel deck, certifying the
supplied products comply with specified requirements.
4. Quality assurance submittals: Welder certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Member of the Steel Deck Institute.
B. Codes and standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications: ..
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
2. American Welding Society(ANSUAWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code/Sheet Steel).
3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI).
C. Each welder shall have satisfactorily passed A.W.S. Qualification tests for welding
processes involved, and if applicable, shall have undergone recertification.
D. Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with testing and inspection firm to assure
proper erection of metal deck
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
METALS 05310-2
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
in EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
40 SECTION 05310 METAL ROOF DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, 'General Conditions of the Contract for Construction'; and
Division 1, 'General Requirements of the Project Manual' apply to all work of this section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes, types and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Metal roof deck and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01950 - Construction Testing and Inspection.
B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel
D. Section 07530 - Single Ply Membrane Roofing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM,A 611 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled,
Structural Quality.
2. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-iron Alloy
coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process.
3. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
B. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. Fire Resistance Directory.
D. Steel Deck Institute (SDI):
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i'
END OF SECTION
I'
w
40
an
05120-7 STRUCTURAL STEEL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..,
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Fabricator shall be responsible for erection and alignment.
B. Make provisions for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain
structure safe,plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of
permanent bracing.
C. Carry up frame plumb and true. Tolerance limits shall conform to 'Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.'
D. Set structural steel accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various
members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.
Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before ,e
assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations
and alignment.
E. Light drifting necessary to draw holes together will be permitted; drifting to match .»
misaligned holes not allowed.
F. Connections shall be made with bolts and washers, drawn up tight to "snug-tight"
condition, so that nuts cannot become loose. Use 3/4-inch bolts. Welding and bolting of
all connections shall follow the setting of steel as closely as plumbing and alignment will
permit.
G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.
H. All required field measurements shall be verified by and the responsibility of the structural
steel contractor. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancy between
elevations, locations, conditions, etc., shown on drawings and those actually encountered .�
in field. Do not proceed with work until discrepancies have been resolved.
I. Any variation from this work, as shown on drawings, which may occur during erection
shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for adjustment, and no work affected by such
variation shall be continued until the Architect/Engineer has rendered a decision.
3.2 FIELD WELDING
A. Field welding is to be completed by qualified welders using equipment and materials
compatible to the base material. '"
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Immediately after erection,touchup welds, abrasions, scratches, bolted connections,
attachments, and surfaces not shop-primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact
with concrete. Use a primer compatible with shop coat.
METALS 05120-6 ..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
' EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.3 CONNECTIONS
A. All welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS 'Standard Welding Code - Steel.'
Qualifications shall be on the basis of AWS tests for structural work. All welds shall be
subject to approval of Architect-Engineer.
B. Welds on exposed faces shall be reasonably smooth, free of surface holes, slag, undercut,
or overlap. All shop and field welds exposed to view shall be ground to a reasonably
smooth finish appearance. All slag and spatter shall be removed.
C. All surfaces shall be free of scale,rust, grease, paint, and other foreign materials prior to
weld. Joint surfaces shall be tight, flush, in true planes, free of fins and tears.
" D. Welds shall show uniform section, smoothness of weld metal, freedom from porosity and
clinkers, and be of adequate strength and durability. All welds not otherwise identified
shall be continuous.
E. All members shall remain free of stretch, warp, or twist as result of weld.
F. Drill or punch holes 1/16 inch larger than nominal diameter of rivets or bolts. Burning to
enlarge holes is not permitted. Holes that must be enlarged shall be remade. Bolts shall
fit holes snugly, and nuts shall be drawn up tight with full grip on belts.
aw
G. All field connections shall be bolted with minimum 3/4 inch diameter A325 high strength
bolts. Weld connections where specifically shown.
2.4 FINISH
A. Clean,prepare, and shop prime all structural steel in accord with AISC specification,
except that all surfaces shall receive one (1) shop coat of not less than two (2)mils,
applied according to manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Acceptable products:
a. Tnemac#10-99 "Gray."
4"
b. DuPont#77 Primer.
c. P&L Noxide Primer.
d. Approved equal.
B. Do not prime surfaces adjacent to field welds, in contact with concrete, or to fire-proofed
surfaces. Omit painting of top flange of structural steel scheduled to receive metal stud
shear connectors. As soon as welding is completed, apply two (2) coats of field paint to
these areas and all nicks, scratches, and chips. Field painting shall be completed within
one week after erection.
an C. Where steel members are to be exposed, shop paint shall be free of runs, bubbles, and
other marks which show through final paint.
40
05120-5 STRUCTURAL STEEL
Am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 .�
JUNE 17,2005
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATER''Y3IALS
A. Structural steel members: ASTM A36, ASTM A572, Grade 50 or ASTM A992 where
noted.
B. Structural tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B; yield strength of 46 KSI.
C. Bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A325; all bolts for field connections shall be supplied by •W
the fabricator.
D. Anchor bolts and nuts: ASTM A307 and A563.
E. Welding materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded; E-70XX
electrodes unless otherwise noted.
F. Headed studs: Nelson Stud Company.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. All fabrication shall conform to the AISC, 'Code of Standard Practice.'
B. All connections shall be framed using standard framing connections which will fully
develop the total uniform load capacity of beams. Framing angles shall be shop-welded to
beams. All field connections may be bolted. Beam must be capable of transferring beam
reaction to applicable flange or web of columns.
C. Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends, and open joints
between component parts.
D. Provide all required holes for attachment of other work to steel members; 1/2" bolts
staggered at 30" o.c. ®,
E. Fabricate all beams with natural camber up.
F. Column and bearing stiffeners shall be milled at bearing ends to true surface at right
angles to the axis or at the proper angle to ensure uniform bearing. Weld columns to cap
and base plates with continuous 5/16 inch fillet weld (minimum).
G. Column base plates shall be of sizes noted on schedule with straight and true top and
bottom surfaces. Provide 1/4 inch steel leveling plates under all steel columns.
H. All pipe or tube columns, either plain or concrete-filled, shall have framed connections for .�
all steel bearing. Framed connections shall be of the 'thru-plate'type welded to the
column along all lines of contact.
METALS 051204 „�
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
1.6 OUA�ITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall carry as part of contract service fees for testing and inspection firm to
assure proper erection of structural steel, steel joists, and metal deck. Inspections shall be
completed promptly so that progress of the work can be maintained. Architect/Engineer
will select testing and inspection firm.
B. Inspection firm shall inspect all erected framing, decking, shear connections, and field
welds to ensure that they comply with specifications.
40
1. Bolted connections shall comply with RISC, `Specifications for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts.'
2. Welded connections shall comply with AWS D1.1, `Structural Welding Code' as
follows:
a. All full penetration welds shall be ultrasonically inspected.
b. 100 percent of all field welds shall be visually inspected.
C. Reports shall be signed by inspector, clearly defining areas and items inspected. Reports
shall be promptly made available to all parties.
1. Corrective measures required shall be undertaken expeditiously in order that work
progress can continue without delay.
D. All shop and field welders shall have current certification for type of welds required.
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means to protect structural steel before, during, and after installation
and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
1. Materials shall be stored above ground on platforms, pallets, skids, or other type of
supports.
2. Materials shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter and shall be
protected from corrosion.
B. Requirements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Welding shall not be attempted when the temperature of base metal is lower than Oo
Fahrenheit. At temperature between Oo and 32o Fahrenheit, surfaces within three inches
of a weld shall be heated before welding is attempted. Surfaces shall be heated until they
become too hot to touch.
4W
05120-3 STRUCTURAL STEEL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 .r
JUNE 17,2005
1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (excluding 4.2.1).
2. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
3. Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design/Ninth Edition.
4. Manual of Steel Construction, Connections/Vol. 11
5. Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 Bolts.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A36 Structural Steel
2. ASTM A53: Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless Steel Piping.
3. ASTM A123: Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
4. ASTM A307: Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
5. ASTM A325: High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, Including Suitable Nuts
and Plain Hardened Washers.
6. ASTM A500: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Round and Shapes.
7. ASTM A501: Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
8. ASTM A572: High Strength Low-Alloy Columbian -Vanadium Structural Steel.
9. ASTM A572/A572M-94C: High Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel, Grade 50 with Special Requirements (A-992).
10. ASTM A992: Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
C. American Welding Society(AWS):
1. A WS D-1.1: Structural Welding Code, latest edition.
D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Shop drawings: Include erection plans, details of individual members, connections, and
erection details. Fabrication shall not be started until shop drawings are reviewed and
approved by the Project Engineer.
a. Project structural drawings and details shall not be reproduced or traced in any
fashion.
METALS 05120-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual" apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
40 the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes,types and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Structural steel beams, purlins, girders, and columns.
2. Column and beam base plates and leveling plates.
3. Shop and field connections.
4. Anchors and anchor rods for setting of plates; provide adequate location dimensions or
templates.
5. Shop painting.
1.2 WORK FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1. Anchorages cast in concrete.
B. Section 04200 -Unit Masonry
1. Anchorages embedded in masonry.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01950 - Construction Testing and Inspection
B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
C. Section 04200 -Unit Masonry
D. Section 05310 - Metal Roof
E. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications
F. Section 09900 - Painting
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
am
�s
DIVISION 5-METALS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.8 CLEANING
1
A. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and re-point with mortar.
B. Clean all exposed unglazed masonry:
1. Apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 square feet in location acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is approved by Architect/Engineer.
3. Clean initially with stiff brushes and water.
4. When cleaning agent is required:
a. Follow brick manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Thoroughly wet surface of masonry on which no green efflorescence appears.
c. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent.
d. Immediately rinse with clear water.
e. Do small sections at a time.
f. Work from top to bottom.
g. Protect all sash, metal lintels and other corrodible parts when masonry is cleaned
with acid solution.
h. Remove green efflorescence in accordance with brick manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
04200-17 UNIT MASONRY
4
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Minimum grout space
Maximum dimensions for
1 grout pour Minimum width grouting cells of
Specified height, of grout space, hollow units,
grouttype feet inches inch x inch
Fine 1 3/4 1-1/2 x 2
Fine 5 2 2 x 3
Fine 12 2-1/2 2-1/2 x 3
Fine 24 3 3 x 3
w►
Coarse 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 x 3
Coarse 5 2 2-1/2 x 3
Coarse 12 2-1/2 3 x 3
Coarse 24 3 3 x 4
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING r,,,
A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of masonry work that may be
required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be
received by work of other contractors shown upon, necessary, or reasonably implied by
the drawings and specifications for the completed structure, and he shall make good after
them as the Architect may direct. dim.
B. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible.
C. The Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, or otherwise altering the work and
shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor save with the consent of the
Architect.
no
3.7 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Contractor shall include all work and measures required to be performed for the protection .o
of all work done under this section.
B. Protective measures shall be planned and carried out to provide continuous operations. so
Protection of work shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Construction, erection, maintenance and removal of all barriers,protective coverings
and enclosures which are required to be used to protect the work from the elements so ''`
that work may proceed regardless of weather conditions.
C. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted.
Remove immediately, grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
D. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
MASONRY 04200-16
44
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
AN EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Ara 6. Unless otherwise required, provide additional unit ties around all openings larger than
16 inches in either dimension. Space ties around perimeter of opening at a maximum
of 3 feet on center. Place ties within 12 inches of opening.
E. Site Tolerances:
1. Tolerances for the placement of steel in walls and flexural elements shall be f 1/2 inch
when the distance from the centerline of steel to the opposite face of masonry, d,is
equal to 8 inches or less,f 1 inch for d equal to 24 inches or less but greater than 8
inches and f 1-1/4 inches for d greater than 24 inches.
2. In walls, for vertical bars, 2 inches from the location along the length of the wall
indicated on the Project Drawings.
3. If it is necessary to move bars more than one bar diameter or a distance exceeding the
tolerance stated above to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or
embedded items, notify the Architect/Engineer for acceptance of the resulting
arrangement of bars.
3.5 GROUT PLACEMENT
A. Placing time: Place grout within 1-1/2 hours from introducing water in the mixture and
prior to initial set.
B. Confinement: Confine grout to the areas indicated on the Project Drawings. Use material
to confine grout that permits bond between masonry units and mortar.
C. Grout pour height: Do not exceed the maximum grout pour height given in Table 5.
D. Grout lift height: Place grout in lifts not exceeding 5 feet.
E. Consolidation: Consolidate grout at the time of placement.
F. Consolidate grout pours 12 inches or less in height by mechanical vibration or by
puddling.
r G. Consolidate pours exceeding 12 inches in height by mechanical vibration after initial
water loss and settlement has occurred.
H. Grout space requirements:
04200-15 UNIT MASONRY
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Maintain clear distance between reinforcing bars and any face of masonry unit or
formed surface, as indicated on the Project Drawings, but not less than 1/4 inch for fine
grout or 1/2 inch for coarse grout. ..
2. Splice only where indicated on the Project Drawings, unless otherwise acceptable.
3. Unless accepted by the Architect/Engineer, do not bend reinforcement after it is aw
embedded in grout or mortar.
4. Place joint reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are embedded in mortar with a
minimum cover of 1/2 inch when not exposed to weather or earth and 5/8 inch when
exposed to weather or earth.
D. Wall ties: °
1. Embed the ends of wall ties in mortar joints. Embed wall tie ends at least 1/2 inch into
the outer face shell of hollow units. Embed wire wall ties at least 1-1/2 inches into the
mortar bed of sold masonry units or solid grouted hollow units.
2. Unless otherwise required, bond wythes not bonded by headers with wall ties as
follows:
Wire Size Minimum Number of Ties Required
W 1.7 One wall tie wire per 2.67 ft2
W2.8 One wall tie wire per 4.50 ft2
The maximum spacing between ties is 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically.
3. Unless accepted by the Architect/Engineer, do not bend wall ties after being embedded
in grout or mortar.
4. Unless otherwise required, install adjustable ties in accordance with the following *b
requirements:
a. One tie for each 1.77 ft2 of wall area.
b. Do not exceed 16 inches horizontal or vertical spacing.
c. The maximum misalignment of bed joints from one wythe to the other is 1-1/4
inches.
d. The maximum clearance between connecting parts of the ties is 1/16 inch.
e. When pintle legs are used,provide ties with at least two legs made of wire size
W2.8.
5. Install wire ties perpendicular to a vertical line on the face of the wythe from which
they protrude. Where one-piece ties or joint reinforcement are used,the bed joints of ..
adjacent wythes shall align.
MASONRY 04200-14 ,,,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Design, provide, and install bracing that will assure stability of masonry during
construction.
F. Site tolerances: Erect masonry within the following tolerances from the specified
dimensions.
1. Dimension of elements:
a. In cross section or elevation: 1/4 inch, + 1/2 inch
b. Mortar joint thickness:
1) Bed: ± 1/8 inch.
2) Head: -1/4 inch, +3/8 inch.
3) Collar: -1/4 inch, + 3/8 inch
c. Grout space or cavity width, except for masonry walls passing framed construction:
-1/4 inch, + 3/8 inch
2. Elements:
a. Variation from level:
1) Bed joints: 1/4-inch in 10 feet/ 1/2-inch maximum.
2) Top surface of bearing walls: 1/4-inch in 10 feet/ 1/2-inch maximum.
do b. Variation from plumb: 1/4-inch in 10 feet/3/8-inch in 20 feet/ 1/2-inch maximum.
c. True to a line: 1/4-inch in 10 feet/3/8-inch in 20 feet/ 1/2-inch maximum.
d. Alignment of columns and walls (btm. vs top): 1/2-inch for bearing walls/3/4-inch
for non-bearing walls.
3. Location of elements:
a. Indicated in plan: 1/2-inch in 20 feet/3/4-inch maximum.
b. Indicated in elevation: 1/4-inch in story height/3/4-inch maximum.
40 4. If the above conditions cannot be met due to previous construction, notify
Architect/Engineer.
3.4 REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Basic requirements:
" 1. Place reinforcement and accessories in accordance with the sizes,types, and locations
indicated on the Project Drawings, and as specified. Do not place dissimilar metals in
contact with each other.
B. Securing reinforcement:
1. Support and fasten reinforcement together to prevent displacement by construction
loads or by placement of grout or mortar beyond the tolerances allowed.
C. Details of reinforcement:
04200-13 UNIT MASONRY
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
d. Vertical cells to be grouted are aligned and unobstructed openings for grout are
provided in accordance with the Project Drawings.
3. Solid units: Unless otherwise required, solidly fill bed and head joints with mortar and:
a. Do not fill head joints by slushing with mortar.
b. Construct head joints by shoving mortar tight against the adjoining unit.
c. Do not deeply furrow bed joints.
4. All units: •
a. Place clean units while the mortar is soft and plastic. Remove and relay in fresh
mortar any unit disturbed to the extent that initially bond is broken after initial
positioning.
b. Cut exposed edges or faces of masonry units smooth or position such that all
exposed faces or edges are unaltered manufactured surfaces.
c. When the bearing of a masonry wythe on its support is less than two-thirds of the
wythe thickness, notify the Architect/Engineer.
C. Prefabricated concrete and masonry items:
1. Erect prefabricated concrete and masonry items in accordance with the requirements
indicated on the Project Drawings. ..
D. Embedded items and accessories
1. Install embedded items and accessories where shown in the Project Drawings and in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
a. Construct chases as masonry units are laid.
b. When required, place pipes and conduits passing horizontally through masonry
beams or masonry walls in steel sleeves or collared holes.
c. Install pipes and conduits passing horizontally through non-bearing masonry
partitions.
d. Place pipes and conduits passing horizontally through piers., pilasters, or columns.
e. Place horizontal pipes and conduits in and parallel to plane of walls.
f. Install and secure connectors, flashing, weep holes, weep vents, nailing blocks, and
other accessories.
g. Install movement joints.
h. When required, install insulation.
i. Aluminum: Do not embed aluminum conduits,pipes, and accessories in masonry,
grout, or mortar, unless effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum cement
chemical reaction or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.
E. Bracing of masonry:
MASONRY 04200-12 �'
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
brush'ng provided the dimensions and weights, including heights of deformations, of a
cle d sample are not less than required by the ASTM specification covering this
reinforcement in this Specification.
B. Prior to placing masonry, remove laitance, loose aggregate and anything else that would
prevent mortar from bonding to the foundation.
C. Debris: Construct grout spaces free of mortar dropping, debris, loose aggregates,and any
material deleterious to masonry grout.
D. Reinforcement: Place reinforcement and ties in grout spaces prior to grouting. Concrete
block insulation inserts as specified herein, shall be removed from all cores to receive
reinforcing/grouting.
E. Cleanouts: Provide cleanouts in the bottom course of masonry for each grout pour, when
the grout pour height exceeds 5 feet.
1. Where required, construct cleanouts adjacent to each vertical bar. In solid grouted
masonry, space cleanouts horizontally a maximum of 32 inches on center.
2. Construct cleanouts with an opening of sufficient size to permit removal of debris. The
minimum opening dimension shall be 3 inches.
3. After cleaning, close cleanouts with closures braced to resist grout pressure.
3.3 MASONRY ERECTION
A. Bond pattern: Unless otherwise required, construct masonry in running bond pattern.
B. Placing mortar and units:
1. Bed and head joints: Construct 3/8"thick bed and head joints except at foundation.
Construct bed joint of the starting course of foundation with a thickness not less than '/4
inch and not more than 3/4 inch. Construct joints that also conform to the following:
a. Fill holes not specified in exposed and below grade masonry with mortar.
b. Unless otherwise required,tool joint with a round jointer when the mortar is
thumbprint hard.
c. Remove masonry protrusions extending 1/2 inch or more into cells or cavities to be
grouted.
2. Hollow units: Place hollow units so:
a. Face shells of bed joints are fully mortared.
b. Webs are fully mortared in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, in the
starting course on foundations, when necessary to confine grout or loose-fill
insulation, and when otherwise required.
c. Head joints are mortared, a minimum distance from each face equal to the face
or shell thickness of the unit.
04200-11 UNIT MASONRY
..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Quikrete packaged Coarse Core Fill Grout and Fine Core Fill Grout.
a. Portland Cement or Blended Cement: ASTM C 150 Types I, IA, II, IIA, III or
IIIA.
b. Portland Cement or Blended Cement: ASTM C 595 Types IS, IS(MS), IS-A, IS-
A(MS), IP, or IP-A.
c. Portland Cement or Blended Cement: ASTM C 1157 Types GU, HE, MS, or HS.
d. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618.
e. Aggregate: ASTM C 404. •
f. Coarse Grout: Adjust aggregate proportions to provide evenly graded mix which
will be easily pumped, with coarse aggregate content no greater than maximum
specified in the proportion specifications of ASTM C 476.
2. Water: Clean and free from deleterious acids, alkalies, and organic matter.
E. Mixing:
1. Mixing procedure: Add factory pre-blended dry materials to water in mortar mixer and
mix for at least 5 minutes. .�
2. Re-tempering: Do not re-temper grout; discard grout that cannot be easily pumped or
poured.
3. Cold weather: Follow National Concrete Masonry Association recommendations for
cold weather construction.
2.9 CLEANING AGENTS
A. Cleaner acceptable to the brick manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Prior to the start of masonry construction,the Contractor shall
verify:
1. That foundations are constructed with tolerances conforming to the requirements of
AC1 117
2. That reinforcing dowels are positioned in accordance with the Project Drawings.
3. If stated conditions are not met, notify the Architect/Engineer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean all reinforcement by removing mud, oil, or other materials that will adversely affect ..
or reduce the bond at the time mortar or grout is placed. Reinforcement with rust, mill
scale, or a combination of both will be accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or
MASONRY 04200-10
..r
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3. Air Content: Maximum 18 percent.
4. Aggregate Ratio: No less than 2.25 and no more than 3.5 times the sum of the separate
volumes of cementitious materials.
C. Masonry mortar mix: Factory blended masonry cement/sand mix proportioned to produce
masonry mortar complying with the property specifications in ASTM C 270 for the
specified type of masonry mortar.
1. Quikrete Packaged Masonry Mortar Mix.
a. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type S.
b. Sand: Mason's sand, ASTM C 144.
D. Accessory materials:
1. Water: Clean and free from deleterious acids, alkalies,and organic matter.
2. Admixtures: Complying with ASTM 1384 or ICBO-ES Evaluation Report 3759.
E. Mixing:
1. Mixing procedure: Add factory pre-blended dry materials to water in mortar mixer and
mix for 3 to 5 minutes.
2. Re-tempering: Use mortar within 2 hours of initial mixing. Re-temper mortar that has
stiffened because of evaporation of water from mortar by adding water and blending as
frequently as needed to restore required consistency.
3. Cold weather: Follow National Concrete Masonry Association recommendations for
cold weather construction.
2.8 GROUT
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. The Quikrete Companies; One Securities Centre, 3490 Piedmont Road, Suite 1300,
Atlanta, GA 30305; tel: (404) 634-9100.
2. Approved equal.
B. Applications: See paragraph 3.05/H for locations of coarse or fine grout use.
C. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi,
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1019 at slump of 8 to 10 inches as measured by
ASTM C 143.
D. Grout Mix: Factory blended hydraulic cement based product containing aggregate and
portland cement, blended cement, or a mixture of portland cement and fly ash
proportioned to produce grout complying with ASTM C 476 for the specified type of
grout;
04200-9 UNIT MASONRY
AM
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Pre-molded control joint strips: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash
block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
1. Polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade,
Designation PVC-63506.
B. Bond breaker strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
C. Membrane flashing(concealed):
1. Perm-A-Barrier fully adhering, self-sealing flashing consisting of 32 mil of highly ..
adhesive rubberized asphalt bonded to a 8 mil high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film to produce an overall 40 mil thickness as manufactured by W.R.
Grace and Company, Connecticut.
D. Flashing accessories:
1. Surface conditioner to be latex-based Perm-A-Barrier surface conditioner as
manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company, Connecticut.
2. Termination mastic to be bituthene mastic as manufactured by W.R. Grace and
Company, Connecticut for use in sealing membrane terminations.
E. Weep slots:
1. Rectangular plastic weep holes#342 (3/8" x 1-1/2" x 3-1/2") as manufactured by
Hohman& Barnard or approved equal.
F. Block insulation: Insulation shall be `Korfil' block insulation as manufactured by
Concrete Block Insulating Systems, Inc. (508) 867-4241. The expanded polystyrene
insulation shall be individually molded to have a density of 1.0 pcf and shall conform to
ASTM C578 standards, Type 1.
2.7 MORTAR
A. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. The Quikrete Companies; One Securities Centre, 3490 Piedmont Road, Suite 1300,
Atlanta, GA 30305; Tel: (404) 634-9100.
2. Approved equal.
B. Masonry cement mortar: Type S Mortar: Mix to the Property Specifications of ASTM C
270:
1. Compressive Strength: 1800 psi,minimum, at 28 days for laboratory mixed mortar
with a flow of 110 plus/minus 5 percent.
2. Water Retention: 75 percent, minimum.
MASONRY 04200-8 ,,,,
in
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
2.3 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Acceptable manufacturer: A. Jandris& Sons, Inc., 202 High Street, Gardner, MA 01440,
tel: (508) 632-0089.
B. Moisture controlled exterior load bearing ground face block units conforming to ASTM
C-90, Grade N-1.
1. Color: GF-5200.
2. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long(15-5/8"
actual) x 8" high(7-5/8" actual) and thickness indicated on drawings.
3. Provide special shapes as required, and as shown on the Project Drawings.
2.4 STANDARD CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A A. Moisture controlled exterior load bearing block; Type I, Grade N, light weight aggregates,
shall comply with ASTM C-90-96A.
1. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16"long (15 5/8"
actual) x height and thickness indicated.
2.5 MASONRY REINFORCEMENT
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Hohmann& Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, N.Y. 11788; tel: (516)234-0600.
2. Dur-O-Wal,Aurora, IL 60504; tel: (800) 254-8958.
B. Veneer anchors for drywall construction with metal studs: Reinforcement shall be
fabricated from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82 with smooth 9 ga. cross
rods butt welded not more than 16"o.c. to deformed 9 ga. side rods.
1. Acceptable product: Hohmann& Barnard DW-10 Series.
a. Anchor: DW-IOHS; 6" long with 3 5/8"vertical adjustability; 14 gauge thickness.
b. Self-drilling self tapping screws: Standard size#10-16 x 1 '/2"hex washer head.
c. Wire tie: Vee wall tie.
2. Finish: Hot dip galvanized conforming to ASTM 153, Class B2.
C. Masonry anchoring system(to structural steel framing):
1. Acceptable products: Hohmann& Barnard#360 Gripstay channels and#365 Bent
Gripstay Achors.
2. Finish: Hot dip galvanized conforming to ASTM 153, Class B2.
04200-7 UNIT MASONRY
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Above 100° F or Fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, at least
above 90° F/with a three times a day until the masonry is three days old.
wind greater than 8 mph
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Provided chases and openings as required under other sections and/or contracts as sized
and located on the drawings.
B. Cooperate with other sections in setting built-in items. Use special care in setting units so
that built-in items are true,plumb, and level.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All masonry materials shall be new, of sizes, shapes, colors and texture indicated.
Masonry shall be free from chips, cracks or other defects which would impair the strength,
appearance or permanence of the construction. 00
B. Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind
required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. „
C. Provide special shapes as required for a complete job including U-blocks for beams and
lintels,jambs, special shaped sills, and other special conditions.
2.2 BRICK—NOT USED
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Richtex Corporation, Columbia, SC; tel: (803) 786-1260
a. #242 "Red Semi-Smooth." •»
2. Palmetto Brick Company, Cheraw, SC; tel: (803) 537-7861
a. "Dark Red Smooth." A0
3. Tri-State Brick& Tile Company, Inc., Jackson, MS; tel: (601) 981-1410
a. "Red Smooth."
B. Face brick:
1. ASTM C-216-92C, grade SW,type FBS.
2. Dimensions: 3-5/8" x 2-1/4"x 7-5/8".
3. Provide brick similar in texture and physical properties to those available for inspection
at the Architect/Engineer's office.
4. Do not exceed variations in color and texture of samples accepted by the
Architect/Engineer. *^�
MASONRY 04200-6 �+*
w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
rw RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
46
20 to 25° F Same as above, plus use heat sources on both sides of the
masonry under construction and install wind breaks when
ow wind velocity exceeds 15 mph.
Below 32° F Same as above,plus provide an enclosure for the masonry
under construction and use heat sources to maintain
temperatures above 32° F within the enclosure.
D. Cold weather masonry protection requirements:
Mean Daily..Temperature Protection Requirements
32 to 40° F Protect completed masonry from rain or snow by covering
with a weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours after
construction.
25 to 32° F Completely cover the completed masonry with a weather
resistive membrane for 24 hours after construction.
20 to 25° F Completely cover the completed masonry with insulating
blankets or equal protection for 24 hours after construction.
Below 20° F Maintain masonry temperature above 32° F for 24 hours after
construction by enclosure with supplementary heat, by electric
heating blankets, by infrared heat lamps, or by other
acceptable methods.
E. Hot Weather Masonry Preparation and Construction Requirements:
Ambient Temperature Construction Requirements
Above 100°F or Maintain sand piles in a damp, loose condition. Maintain
temperature of mortar and grout below 120° F. Flush mixer,mortar transport► above 90° F with a container, and mortar boards with cool water before they come
wind greater than in contact with mortar ingredients or mortar. Maintain mortar
8 mph consistency by re-tempering with cool water. Use mortar
within 2 hours of initial mixing.
Above 115°For Same as above,plus materials and mixing equipment are to be
above 105° F with a shaded from direct sunlight. Use cool mixing water for mortar
wind greater than and grout. Ice is permitted in the mixing water as long as it is
8 mph melted when added to the other mortar or grout materials.
F. Hot Weather Masonry Protection Requirements:
Mean Daily Temperature Protection Requirements
04200-5 UNIT MASONRY
o
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ow
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. .w
B. Store brick off ground to prevent contamination by mud,dust or materials likely to cause
staining or other defects.
C. Cover materials when necessary to protect from elements.
D. Protect reinforcement from elements.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Protection of work:
1. Wall covering:
a. During erection, cover top of wall with strong waterproof membrane at end of day
or shutdown.
b. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress.
c. Extend cover minimum of 24 inch down both sides.
d. Hold cover securely in place.
2. Load application:
a. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building
masonry columns or walls.
b. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry columns
or walls.
B. Staining:
1. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted.
a. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with face of such masonry.
b. Protect all sills, ledges, and projections from droppings of mortar,protect door
Jambs and corners from damage during construction.
C. Cold weather masonry construction requirements:
Ambient Temperature Construction Requirements
25 to 40° F or Do not lay masonry units having a temperature below 20° F.
masonry units below Remove visible ice on masonry units before the unit is laid in
40° F the mortar. Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar and
grout temperatures between 40° F and 120° F. Maintain
mortar above freezing until placement.
MW
MASONRY 042004 am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. Samples:
a. Furnish not less than five individual brick as samples, showing extreme variations
'* in color and texture.
b. Furnish two samples of each type of architectural concrete masonry unit specified.
2. Test reports: Test reports completed by an independent laboratory for each type of
building and facing brick are to be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
Test reports shall show:
a. Compressive strength.
b. 24-hour cold water absorption.
c. 5-hour boil absorption.
d. Saturation coefficient.
e. Initial rate of absorption(suction).
3. Manufacturer's data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following:
a. Reinforcement.
b. Anchors and ties.
c. Mortar and grout.
d. Control joint materials.
e. Flashing and weeps.
f. CMU insulation inserts.
4. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit to Architect/Engineer certificates attesting
compliance with the applicable specifications for grades,types, or classes included in
W these specifications.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockup:
1. Approximately 4 feet long by 4 feet high with 1'-0"return, showing the proposed color
range, texture, bond,mortar and workmanship. All brick shipped for the sample shall
be included in the panel.
2. When required, provide a separate panel for each type of brick or mortar.
3. Do not start work until Architect/Engineer has accepted sample panel.
4. Use panel as standard of comparison for all masonry work built of same material.
5. Do not destroy or move panel until work is completed and accepted by Owner.
B. Masonry construction shall conform to the requirements of Chapters 1 through 8 of ACI
530/ASCE 5/TM 402.
04200-3 UNIT MASONRY
MW
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE OR
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
a
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01950 - Construction Testing and Inspection
B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel •
D. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry
E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
1.4 REFERENCES
A. A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI A41.1: Building Code Requirements for Masonry /
�6 M
2. ANSI A41.2: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry
3. ASTM A153: Zinc Coating(Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
4. ASTM A641: Zinc-Coated Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire
5. ASTM C90: Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
6. ASTM C126: Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid
Masonry Units
7. ASTM C129: Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
8. ASTM C140: Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
9.' ASTM C144: Aggregate For Masonry Mortar
10. ASTM C 150: Portland Cement
11. ASTM C207: Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
12. ASTM C270: Mortar for Unit Masonry
13. ASTM C476: Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry Aw
14. ASTM C578: Preformed, Cellular, Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
15. ASTM E514-74: Water Permeance of Masonry am
B. National Concrete Masonry Association: Tek Manual for Concrete Masonry Design and
Construction Am
C. Brick Institute of America: Technical Notes on Brick Construction
we
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300:
..
MASONRY 04200-2 MW
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 042U0 UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes, types and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Face Brick
2. Architectural concrete masonry units.
3. Standard concrete masonry units.
4. CMU insulation inserts.—N/A
5. Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories.
6. Through-wall flashings.
7. Mortar and grout.
8. Control and expansion joints.
9. Built-in items supplied by other trades.
10. Cutting and patching required for other sections of work.
11. Cleaning masonry and removing surplus material and waste.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
.0 A. Section 05120- Structural Steel
1. Anchorages.
4% B. Section 05500- Metal Fabrications
1. Loose steel lintels.
rr 2. Bolts, anchors and steel inserts.
3. Fabricated steel items.
wr
04200-1 UNIT MASONRY
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
40
40
DIVISION 4-MASONRY
03300-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
c. Cover with damp burlap or with white polyethylene sheet immediately after
screeding and bull floating. Keep burlap moist until the concrete is ready for
finishing. Uncover only a small area at a time,just ahead of the finishers. Begin
curing as soon as possible.
d. Use monomolecular films to reduce evaporation between the various placing and
finishing operations.
7. Postpone each step of finishing (and its inherent reworking of the surface) as long as
possible without endangering results.
8. Discontinue the use of vapor barriers if possible.
PART 4 CONCRETE CONFERENCE
4.1 CONCRETE CONFERENCE
A. Prior to the placing of any floor slabs within the building a Pre-Slab Pour Conference shall
be held. The following persons or their designated representatives shall be in attendance:
1. The Big Y Foods, Inc. Project Manager
2. The Architect
3. The General Contractor and his Superintendent
4. The Concrete Slab Sub-contractor and his foreman
5. The Concrete Supplier
6. The Concrete Mix Designer
7. The Testing Laboratory Representative
8. The Site Sub-contractor and his foreman
B. Record of meeting: General Contractor's representative shall record all decisions made at
the meeting that shall be made a part of the job record.
C. Items to be reviewed, discussed and resolved:
1. Review specifications, concrete mix, floor plans, slab and pour stop details
2. Review plans for floor slopes, depressed slabs and the like. If a conflict exists between
what is considered "good concrete slab practice"and the specifications, resolve all
objections and make final decisions a part of the job record. Limitations imposed by
weather or other special requirements shall be understood by all parties.
D. Review and Inspection: Clarify all specifications, details and application requirements
including what work should be completed before the slab pour operations can begin,as
well as inspection requirements.
END OF SECTION ,fit
CONCRETE 03300-20
.s
+4
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.18 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. Protect finished work as required.
B. Fresh concrete shall be adequately protected from premature drying, heavy rains, flowing
water, and mechanical injury in accordance with ACI 308, 'Curing Concrete.' Provisions
No must be made for maintaining new concrete in a continuously moist condition for at least
seven days after placement.
C. Provide cold weather protection of concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 306.
D. Provide hot weather protection of concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 305.
E. Curing shall immediately follow the finishing operation to prevent rapid drying of the
concrete.
F. Concrete which has not been properly placed, cured, or protected, and which consequently
cracks, shall be replaced or may, at the Architect/Engineer's discretion, be filled with an
approved crack sealer.
G. All foundation walls and footings to receive an approved liquid curing compound if
formwork is removed prior to required 7-day curing time.
H. All flatwork shall be cured for a minimum of 7 days after finishing using heavyweight
burlap, cotton mats, rugs, or waterproof sheet materials. Provide constant moisture on the
surface 24 hours a day. Do not allow any areas to dry within the 7-day period. Do not
apply a chemical curing compound on any slabs to receive resilient tile.
I. If rate of evaporation is expected to exceed 0.2 lbs/ft2 (as determined in ACI 306) during
placement and finishing concrete,the Contractor is to make provisions to reduce water
evaporation to a level below 0.2 Ibs/ft2. Method of reducing water evaporation may
consist of a combination of the following:
1. Dampen the sub-grade.
2. Dampen the aggregates, especially if they are dry and absorptive.
3. Erect windbreaks.
4. Erect sunshades.
5. Cool aggregates and mixing water before mixing.
_ 6. Prevent rapid drying by one of the following:
a. Protect concrete with moisture-retaining coverings during any delay between
placing and finishing.
b. Use a fog spray judiciously above the surface before final finishing and start of
cutting.
03300-19 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.14 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Construction joints shall be located only as herein specified, or where shown on the .m
drawings, or as indicated by the Engineer.
1. Wall Construction Joints: Vertical construction joints shall be provided for all concrete
walls as shown on the drawings or at intervals not exceeding 75 feet for a single pour.
Refer to drawings for joint specified. Provide a 3-day time delay between adjacent
pours for below-grade walls. Provide a 7-day delay between adjacent wall pours in
above-grade, exposed walls. All wall construction joints shall be made only where
indicated on the drawings. Maximum unsupported wall height shall be 25 feet. All
intermediate floor slabs shall be in place before placement of next lift of wall.
2. Slab-on-Grade Construction Joints: Slab construction joints within the building area to
be formed with a metal keyway. See drawings for construction joint layouts.
B. Reinforcement shall be continuous through construction joints unless otherwise specified.
C. Construction joints shall be clean and free of foreign matter and concrete laitance.
3.15 PATCHING
A. Notify Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surface immediately upon removal of forms.
Patch imperfections as directed.
B. Immediately after removing forms, inspect and repair all concrete surfaces and any poor .w
joints, voids, stone pockets, or other surface defects before concrete is thoroughly dry.
Repair shall be in accordance with ACI 301. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or
replace exposed architectural concrete except upon express direction of
Architect/Engineer for each individual area.
C. Permission to repair any surface defect shall not be considered a waiver of the defective
work if the repair does not, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, satisfactorily restore .w
the quality and appearance of the surface.
3.16 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required levels and lines, details, and
elevations.
B. Repair or replace, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, concrete not properly placed or
of the specified type.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed as outlined in this section.
B. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
CONCRETE 03300-18
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
alwr RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3. Groove control joints in concrete to detailed layout. Groover tool shall be Goldblatt
Trowel No. 84389 06125 or equal, with 1 inch deep groove and 1/4 inch radius edge.
Radius edges of walk with 1/4 inch radius edge tool.
4. Where surfaces abut building and vertical surfaces,provide continuous asphalt
expansion joint filler.
5. Provide exposed surface of walks with broom finish.
6. Apply exterior curing compound on finished surfaces immediately after placement.
Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.13 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Do not begin any finishing operation until sufficiently large areas are ready for finishing
so that a variation in color or texture will not be visible. The operation shall be
interrupted only at corners, with no interruption allowed within 50 feet of any entrance.
B. Finish all interior concrete flatwork by screeding and steel troweling to a smooth, even
surface, ready for application of floor finish materials, in accordance with ACI 117 2.2
requirements for flatwork. All concrete shall be trowel finished with Class BX tolerances
except where otherwise noted.
C. Provide adequate protection from the elements and adjacent construction operations.
D. Do not apply dry cement or any other material to the surface of any concrete to absorb
' ► moisture.
E. Provide a pitch to all floor and exterior drains as shown on drawings, and pitch exterior
slabs away from the building as shown on the drawings.
F. Provide depressions in surface concrete to properly allow for floor finish materials.
" G. All interior floor surfaces where finish is exposed concrete shall receive floor hardener as
specified herein. Apply in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations.
► H. Exterior Wall Surfaces: Immediately upon removal of forms,point form tie holes and
other defects flush with surface.
1. Remove fins, and fill honeycombing holes and depressions with 1:2 cement-sand
mortar on exposed interior and exterior concrete surfaces. Before patching, thoroughly
dampen surrounding concrete and apply the bonding compound, "Euco Weld"by the
Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal. Place the patching mortar after the
bonding compound has dried. Carefully damp cure these patches. Cut back
protrusions. Color of patches to match existing.
03300-17 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Ensure that reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed
during concrete placement.
1
D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
Item Coverage
Bars 2 Inch
Walls 2 Inch(Exterior)
Walls 1-1/2 Inch (Interior)
Footings 3 Inch(Against Earth)
Footings 2 Inch(Formed)
Slabs-on-Grade 1 Inch
Slabs-on-Fill 2 Inch
E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do
not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
F. Thoroughly compact concrete during placement operation. Work into corners and angles
of forms and around reinforcement using spades. Use vibrators to compact all concrete
after it is in its final location.
G. Separate interior and exterior slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces with pre-molded joint
filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/4 inch of finished slab surface.
H. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify
Architect/Engineer upon discovery.
I. Do not place concrete footings in standing water or soft material.
J. Place saw-cut control joints as soon as concrete is hard enough to begin saw-cutting
without dislodging aggregate and when the edges of the cut do not ravel. Use 3/16-inch
thick blade, cutting 1/4 into depth of slab thickness. Flush joints immediately. To protect
edges of joint and to allow for curing,joints shall be temporarily filled with sand. Joints
shall not be permanently filled until just prior to completion of the project. Fill all saw-cut "'
joints in concrete slabs which are to remain exposed with joint sealant. Slabs which are to
be covered with tile or carpeting will have joints filled with cement grout flush to slab
surface. Joints to be flush to provide a smooth surface, continuous with adjacent slabs.
See plans for layout of saw-cut joints.
3.12 CONCRETE WALK ,w
A. Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish, free of
open texturing and exposed aggregate. Avoid working mortar to surface. no
1. Bull float directly behind screed before bleedwater appears.
2. Immediately behind bullfloat, drag broom across surface for a rriedium broom finish. *■
CONCRETE 03300-16
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
F. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by this section.
G. Support footing mat reinforcing and grade beam reinforcing on precast blocks to maintain
three (3) inch cover required for concrete cast against earth.
H. Coordinate and place dowels for masonry walls with the Architectural Drawings.
I. Anchor bolts and other embedded items to be placed within ACI tolerances.
J. Welded wire fabric (6 x 6 - W 1.4 x W 1.4 minimum) in slabs on grade to be supported off
of sub-grade with approved support system. Pulling of welded wire fabric in these areas
is not permitted.
K. In sloped slabs, secure reinforcing in position so that the reinforcing is located at a
constant depth in the slab or beam section.
40 L. Welded wire fabric for supported slab on form deck to be supported on approved support
system.
Mr 3.10 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding
46 agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work,drill holes in existing
concrete, insert steel dowels, and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
go
C. Coordinate all work with other trades, including electrical, mechanical, and plumbing.
Verify that all required sleeves, conduits, slab openings, or embedded items are in place
prior to placing of concrete.
D. Coordinate and locate all slab depressions and recesses with Architectural Drawings.
E. Provide 3-inch minimum thick mudmat beneath all concrete footings where indicated
immediately after excavation.
F. Provide slab on grade haunches under all 8-inch CMU walls and thicker for all CMU
walls greater than 14 feet in height as located on Architectural Drawings. Submit drawing
with proposed locations.
3.11 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete
operations.
B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301:
1. Hot Weather Placement:'ACI 301 and 305.
2. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 301 and 306.
03300-15 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 .s
JUNE 17,2005
3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS SHORINGS AND RE-SHORING
A. Notify Architect/Engineer 24 hours prior to removing formwork.
B. If formwork is to be removed before concrete has been properly cured for 7 days,the
newly stripped concrete surface shall be cured in accordance with this section.
C. Construct and remove all formwork, shoring, and re-shoring in conformance with ACI
301 and ACI 307.
D. Remove formwork progressively so that no unbalanced loads are imposed on the r.
structure.
E. Do not damage concrete surfaces during form removal.
F. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against concrete.
G. Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete
surface coloration.
H. Store reusable forms for exposed architectural concrete to prevent damage to contact ..
surfaces.
I. For exposed concrete surfaces, do not reuse wood formwork more than two (2)times. Do
not patch formwork.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL •
A. Inform Architect/Engineer when formwork is complete and has been cleaned to allow for
review. Obtain review 24 hours prior to placing concrete.
B. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect each section of formwork prior to reuse.
C. Coordinate placement and locations of sleeves, bolts, and other embedded items, and «�
verify they are accurately placed and secured against displacement.
3.9 REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION Aft
A. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings.
B. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from .�
alignment or measurement.
C. Place reinforcement to provide for concrete cover specified elsewhere in this section.
D. Unless permitted by the Architect/Engineer, reinforcement shall not be bent after being
embedded in hardened concrete. -�
E. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum of 24 hours prior to time reinforcing can no longer be
inspected due to formwork placement and/or concreting.
CONCRETE 03300-14
on
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
H. Do not install formwork which will interfere with inspection of in-place reinforcing until
after inspection has been completed.
I. Provide smooth form finish, as outlined in Section 10.2.2 of ACI 301, to all exposed
columns and exposed walls. Form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform
texture on the concrete; the arrangement of facing material shall be orderly and
' symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to a practical minimum. It shall be supported
by studs or other backing capable of preventing excessive deflection- see 3.12 for
tolerances. Materials with raised grain,torn surfaces,worn edges,patches, dents, or other
defects which may impair concrete surfaces shall not be used. Tie holes and defects shall
be patched. All fins shall be completely removed.
J. Provide a cast form finish to all concrete which is not exposed.
K. Arrange forms to allow stripping without the removal of principal shores where required
to remain in place.
3.5 FORMWORK ERECTION
A. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be
overstressed by construction loads.
B. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate
openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight-
fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be
apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
C. Align joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of mortar and disfigured appearance
of concrete. Keep form joints to a minimum.
D. Provide chamfer strips on corners of exposed beams and where indicated on drawings.
E. Construct formwork to maintain the tolerances in accordance with ACI 301.
3.6 INSERTS EMBEDDED PARTS,AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through
concrete.
B. Coordinate work of other sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
C. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb.
Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
D. Install waterstops continuous without displacing reinforcing. Heat seal joints to
waterproof.
03300-13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
air
Am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE .w
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
.»
c. Misplacement or eccentricity; 2 percent of the footing width in the direction of
misplacement but not more than 1 inch.
d. Reduction in thickness: Am
1) Plus: 1/4 inch at top.
2) Minus: 0 inches.
7. Variation in steps:
a. In a flight of stairs:
Rise 1/8 inch.
Tread 1/8 inch.
b. In consecutive steps: .**
Rise 1/16 inch.
Tread 1/8 inch.
l..
3.3 FORMWORK DESIGN
A. The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as the construction, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Design all formwork and formwork bracing, shoring, and re-shoring in accordance with
ACI 301 and ACI 347.
C. Design and execute all procedures, sequences and timing of removal forms, shores, and .,
reshores in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347.
3.4 FORMWORK PREPARATION
A. Minimize form joints. Symmetrically align joints, and make watertight to prevent leakage
of mortar.
B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping, so that concrete is
not damaged during its removal.
C. Obtain Architect/Engineer's approval for use of earth forms; hand-trim sides and bottoms
of earth forms; remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete.
D. Do not mix different form materials for same construction. .r
E. Patch all surface defects in reused form materials to ensure clean finish.
F. Discard form materials which cannot be patched to the satisfaction of the
Architect/Engineer.
G. All form materials for exposed surfaces shall be of good quality with minimal prior use at
the start of work to ensure a good quality finish.
CONCRETE 03300-12
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
aeiw
H. Specified slumps for proposed pump mixes shall not be exceeded at the discharge of the
pump.
4W I. Foundation Mudmats: Use lean concrete mix providing 2500 psi compressive strength at
28 days.
J. Use water-reducing admixture only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify lines, levels, and measurements before proceeding with formwork.
B. Verify that anchors, seats,plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete
are accurately placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Contractor shall set and maintain concrete formwork to insure that final concrete lines are
within the tolerance limits listed below:
1. Variation from the plumb in lines and surfaces of piers and walls; 1/8 inch per 10 feet
but not more than 1/4 inch.
2. Variations from the level or grades of slabs indicated on the drawings:
a. In 10 feet 1/8 inch.
b. In any bay or 20 foot maximum 1/4 inch.
c. In 40 feet or more 1/4 inch.
3. Variations of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related
position of columns,walls and partitions:
a. In any bay or 20 foot maximum 1/8 inch.
b. In 40 feet or more 1/4 inch.
4. Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, floor openings and wall openings; 1/4
inch.
5. Variations in cross-sectional dimensions of piers, columns and in thickness of slabs and
walls:
a. Plus: 1/4 inch.
b. Minus: 1/8 inch.
6. Variations in the plan dimensions of footings:
a. Plus: 1 inch.
b. Minus: 0 inch.
03300-11 CAST—IN—PLACE CONCRETE
ow
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 ""
JUNE 17,2005
Compressive Strength (28 days) 3000 psi
Aggregate Size (maximum) 3/4-inch
Air Entrainment (exterior exposure) 6 percent
Maximum Slump 4 inches
Sacks of Cement (minimum) 5-3/4 sack/cu.yd.
Water 6 gallons/sack (max.)
C. Provide concrete for slabs on grade and structural slabs with the following characteristics:
Unit/Normal Concrete Measurement
Compressive Strength (7 days) 2800 psi
Compressive Strength (28 days) 3500 psi
Aggregate Size (maximum) 3/4-inch
Maximum Slump 4 inches; 3 inches w/super plasticizer *�
Sacks of Cement (minimum) 5-3/4 sack/cu.yd.
Water 6 gallons/sack (max.)
D. Provide concrete for sidewalks and driveways with the following characteristics:
Unit Measurement t**
Compressive Strength (7 days) 3200 psi
Compressive Strength (28 days) 4000 psi
3/4-Inch Crushed Stone 1080 lbs. ..
1/2-Inch Crushed Stone 720 lbs.
Sand 1300 lbs.
Air Entrainment(exterior exposure) 5-7 percent
Maximum Slump 3 inches
Sacks of Cement(minimum) 7 sack/cubic yd.
Water 6 gallons/sack(max.)
Water/Cement Ratio 0.44
E. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301, 3.8 by Method
1, trial batches or Method 2, field test data. ""
F. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. Calcium chloride Aw
may be used only with written consent of Architect/Engineer.
G. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by ••
Architect/Engineer.
.r
CONCRETE 03300-10
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
sir
2. Anchors shall be 3/16" diameter mill galvanized triangular anchors with 12 gage
galvanized steel dovetail. Anchor shall extend 3 inch minimum into masonry.
E. Bond Breaker: Provide a bond breaker at locations shown on the drawings which conform
to one of the following:
r 1. Bituminous impregnated fiberboard (1/8" minimum width)ASTM D 994.
2. Polyethylene sheet(8 mil) ASTM D 2103.
3. Preformed joint filler(1/4" minimum width)ASTM D 1751.
F. Curing and Sealing Compound:
1. Curing and sealing compounds shall conform to ASTM C309, Type 1,Class A.
Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft/gal.
2. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC)rating of 350
mg per liter.
3. The curing and sealing compound must be compatible with subsequent finishes.
Adhere to manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Available products, subject to compliance with the project requirements that may be
incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. A-H 3 Way Sealer, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc.
c. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc.
e. CS-309, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
G. Integral Hardener: Provide the following hardeners as manufactured by L&M
me Construction Chemicals, Inc. (Note: Areas scheduled to receive the following hardeners
shall be moist cured).
1. "Emery Plate"Non--Metallic Shake on hardener.
a. Application Rate: I lb. Per Is.f.
H. Sealing Compound: Provide "Seal Hard" (transparent sealer)as manufactured by L&M
Construction Chemicals, Inc.; apply two (2) coats.
2.8 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Provide concrete of the following characteristics for footings and walls:
Unit/Normal Concrete Measurement
Compressive Strength (7 days) 2400 psi
03300-9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
so
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
.e
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
G. Vapor Barrier: 10-mil polyethylene. N.
H. Structural Plates and Angles: ASTM A36, of size and shape indicated in contract
documents. Hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A525; 2.5 .o
oz./sq. ft.
2.6 ACCESSORIES/REINFORCEMENT
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type or acceptable patented system.
MP
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete. Conform to CRSI 'Manual
of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction'. so
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307.
2.7 ACCESSORIES/CONCRETE ~`
A. Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,
water-reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive go
strength of 2400 psi in 2 days and 7000 psi in 28 days.
1. Embeco by Master Builders, Co.; Ferrolith G. by Sonneborn Building Products; or
Vibro-Foil by W. R. Grace Company.
B. Joint Filler: Pre-molded asphaltic type, 1/2-inch thick; equal to serviced asphalt joint «.
filler(Code 1301) by Grace Construction Products.
C. Joints:
1. Expansion joint material shall be Dylite as manufactured by Cooper Scorbord of Dow
Chemical Company and shall conform to ASTM D-1752 Type II.
2. Construction joints shall be metal load transferring type; 20 gage galvanized steel,
ASTM A-525 shaped to form a continuous tongue and groove load transferring key
between concrete slabs,punched for doweling, including stakes and splice plates.
Available manufacturers include: ""
a. Jahn Div. Of Superior- Screed Key
b. Cardinal Mfg. Co. -Form-A-Key
c. Vulcan Metal Products - Vulco Screed Joint
3. Control joints shall be sawcut.
D. Inserts:
1. Slots and inserts shall be standard types to engage anchors supplied under other .»
divisions. Slots shall be dovetail type, 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel minimum with
fillers.
CONCRETE 03300-8
Aw
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
�1
C. Admixtures: ASTM C 494, latest edition. Available products, subject to compliance with
the project requirements that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Type A: Water Reducing Admixture:
a. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co.
b. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co.
c. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
d. Metco W.R. Metalcrete Industries
2. Type B: Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture:
a. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co.
c. Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc.
d. Plastiment, Sika Corporation
3. Type C: Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture:
` a. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co.
w c. Possutec 20, Master Builders, Inc.
4. Type D: High Range Water-Reducing Admixture:
a. Super P, Anti-Hydro Co. Inc.
b. Eucon 37, Euclild Chemical Co.
c. WRDA 19 or Daracam, W.R. Grace & Co.
d. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
2.5 ACCESSORIES/FORMWORK
A. Form Ties: Removable, snap-off metal type of minimum working strength of 3,000 psi
when assembled; free of defects and will leave holes no larger than 1" in concrete surface.
40
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture,
or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
C. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Wood strips type; size shown on drawings; maximum
possible lengths.
D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through-Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required; of strength and
character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
E. Pre-molded Joint Filler: 1/2-inch thick,pre-molded asphaltic board complete with
anchorage.
F. Formed Construction Joints: Minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel.
03300-7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
No
B. Lumber: Douglas Fir species minimum construction grade, with grade stamp clearly
visible or as required for strength.
C. Steel: Minimum 16 gage, well-matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of A.
concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
2.2 MATERIALS/REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade billet steel deformed bars.
B. Concrete slab reinforcement:
1. Welded Wire Fabric: ANSI/ASTM A185 plain type in flat sheets.
2. Fiber Mesh: 100%virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fiber with no reprocessed olefin
materials; 3/4 inch long(1.0 lbs. per cubic yard).
C. Smooth dowels: ASTM A615, 60 ski yield grade billet steel plain bars.
2.3 MATERIALS/CONCRETE
A. Cement: ASTM C150, normal -Type I, air entraining-Type IA Portland type, with low
alkali content. Only one brand of cement shall be used for all concrete to be left exposed
so that an even coloring is assured for all such surfaces.
B. Sand and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. Grade according to ACI recommendations.
Fineness modules(FM) shall not vary by more than 0.15 from FM used in mix design.
C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other
materials detrimental to concrete.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Calcium chloride will not be permitted as an admixture. All admixtures will be subject to
approval of the Architect. Use of other admixtures requires written approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
B. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other required admixtures. Entrain not less than 3 percent nor more than 6 percent air by
volume. Available products, subject to compliance with the project requirements that may
be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co.
2. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace& Co.
3. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc.
4. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows;Inc.
CONCRETE 03300-6
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Contractor, at the Contractor's expense and as directed by the Architect/Engineer's
representative,to conduct further curing of the concrete represented by questionable
specimen and/or to modify the mix for future work.
H. Results of 28-day tests:
1. If the average strength of any set of 28-day test specimens is less than the requirement
of the specification, all concrete represented by this test shall be classified as not being
in conformance with the drawings and specifications and subject to the provisions of
the paragraph 'Defective Concrete.'
I. In addition to the cylinder tests mentioned above, if there exists any evidence of faulty
workmanship on the part of the Contractor, violation of contract documents, or likelihood
of concrete having been damaged by frost, impact, or vibration, core and/or load tests may
be required. These tests are to be performed at the Contractor's expense under the
direction of the Architect/Engineer and shall conform to the ACI Code 318 and the ASTM
Standards C42, C 174, and C803. If core and/or load tests indicate placement of concrete
below specification,the provisions of paragraph'Defective Concrete' shall apply.
J. An accurate daily record of the locations in which concrete is placed shall be maintained
by the Contractor. He shall furnish a certified copy of this record weekly to the
Architect/Engineer.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 0 13 00:
1. Product data: Submit product data for specified products.
a. Concrete mix designs.
b. Admixtures.
c. Hardener& sealers.
d. Reinforcement materials.
e. Accessories.
2. Shop drawings: Submit concrete reinforcement shop drawings showing layout,bends,
lengths and splices. Show location of all construction joints and openings through
concrete structures. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structures." Shop drawings shall not be reprints of contract
drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS/FORMWORK
A. Plywood: Douglas Fir exterior grade A-C; sound,undamaged sheets with straight edges
and with visible APA grade stamp; minimum 5/8-inch thickness.
03300-5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE do
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
am
ordered by the Architect/Engineer or his representative when the material or structure so
tested fails to comply with the contract documents.
A"
B. Testing firm will take cylinders,measure air entrainment,and perform slump tests in
accordance with ASTM C31, C 172, C231, and C 143.
C. Compression tests shall be made in a laboratory in accordance with ASTM Standard C39. .i'
D. Not less than four (4) 6-inch x 12-inch test specimens and one (1) simultaneous slump test
shall, except as herein noted, be made for each 50 cubic yards or less of each class of
concrete used in any one day's operation unless, under direction of the Architect/Engineer,
additional samples are needed.
1. One concrete test cylinder will be tested at seven (7) days; two tested at 28 days; one
reserved for a 56 day test if directed by the Engineer and in accordance with ASTM
C39.
2. Air content and one slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders made.
3. For concrete cast during cold weather, an additional cylinder is to be cast. This „
cylinder is to be cured at the site under the same conditions as the in-place concrete is
cured. Cylinder should be tested at 28 days in conformance with ASTM C39.
4. Where concrete is pumped, temperature, air entrainment, and slump shall be measured
before pumping and prior to any plasticizer admixtures in accordance with ASTM
C172.
5. At the discharge of the pump, testing firm will take cylinders, measure temperature and
air entrainment, and perform slump tests.
E. Samples of concrete for test shall be at least one cubic foot in volume, shall be taken from
the mixer, and shall always be within fifteen (15) minutes of removal from the mixer.
Portions of the sample used for air entrainment tests shall be discarded and in no case ,..,
remixed with the remainder of the sample or used for a slump or compression test
specimen.
F. All test samples and results of corresponding slump tests shall be delivered to the AN
laboratory on the day following casting. During the transportation to the laboratory, test
samples shall be adequately protected from temperature extremes and shall be carried in
.p
such a manner that they do not roll, bump, or jar against one another. All test samples
shall be suitably identified in such a manner so that no doubt can ever exist as to what job,
concrete, slump, or date they represent. Ap
G. Results of seven-day tests:
1. It shall be the responsibility of the testing laboratory to indicate on the seven-day test .»
report whether or not the concrete as tested is expected to meet the specifications.
2. In the event that the seven-day test indicates the possibility or probability of a 28-day
strength below specification, the Architect/Engineer's representative may require the
CONCRETE 03300-4 ..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Con 6 rm to ACI 301, 315, and 318.
D. Inspection service to inspect all reinforcing placement for its conformance to the contract
documents. Inspection service to report to Owner and Architect/Engineer before
placement of concrete if placement does not conform to contract documents.
E. Contractor to cooperate with the reinforcing inspection service and the Architect/Engineer
to ensure that reinforcing is placed properly. Contractor to notify inspection service and
Architect/Engineer 24 hours prior to time reinforcing can no longer be inspected due to
formwork place and/or concreting. Contractor to rectify reinforcing placement errors that
are identified by the inspection service and/or Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to
the Owner.
F. Obtain materials from same source throughout the work.
G. Testing: Tests for compressive strength in accordance with the ASTM Standard Method
C39. If 28 day cylinder tests are low or if 7 day tests indicate probability that 28 day
results will be substandard, adjust the mix proportions. If the strengths fail to meet the
requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 4, the Architect/Engineer may require, at the
Contractor's expense, the following:
1. Tests in accordance with the 'Standard Method of Securing, Preparing, and Testing
Specimens from Hardened Concrete for Compressive and Flexural Strength,' ASTM
C42.
r 2. Load tests for that portion of the structure where the questionable concrete has been
placed. Such tests shall be in accordance with the provisions of ACI 318, Chapter 20.
3. In the event that concrete does not test satisfactorily, the Owner will order the work
removed or strengthened properly at the Contractor's expense.
4. General contractor shall provide facilities/conditions to obtain optimum curing of test
4! cylinders between 60-80°F for the initial 48 hours, summer or winter.
H. Flat and level slabs: Ff>35 /FI>30 will be used for slabs on grades which are to receive
resilient tile and these values will be used as minimum tolerances. If any area fails to
meet minimum tolerances,that portion of the slab will be removed and replaced to meet
minimum tolerances. Repair of the slab in lieu of replacement may be allowed at the sole
discretion of the owner. N/A.
I. Method of placement and finishing shall be submitted by the Contractor along with the
certification of the finishing sub-contractor. Include proof by the finishing sub-contractor
that he has been and is able to meet the projects Ff and Fl requirements. N/A.
1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. General testing and taking of cylinders for cast-in-place concrete shall be done by a
testing laboratory employed by the Owner. Contractor shall pay for any additional testing
03300-3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 .w
JUNE 17,2005
5. ACI-305 1'Hot Weather Concreting ..
6. ACI-306: Cold Weather Concreting
7. ACI-308: Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete .W
8. ACI-315: Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
9. ACI-318: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete .m
10. ACI-347: Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
so
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI/AWS DIA: Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
No
2. ANSI/ASTM A82: Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
3. ANSI/ASTM A185: Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
..
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A615: De-formed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement am
2. ASTM-A36: Steel
3. ASTM C33: Concrete Aggregate
..
4. ASTM C94: Ready-Mixed Concrete
5. ASTM C150: Portland Cement
6. ASTM C171: Specifications for Waterproof Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
7. ASTM C260: Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
8. ASTM C494: Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
9. ASTM C685: Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing
D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI):
1. CRSI: Manual of Practice
2. CRSI-63: Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcement
3. CRSI-65: Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications, and
Nomenclature
E. PS-1: Construction and Industrial Plywood
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347.
B. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard
Practice and Documents 63 and 65.
CONCRETE 03300-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction",and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
options, locations, sizes, types, and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Concrete formwork, including shoring, bracing, anchorage, and openings for other
trades.
2. Footings and foundation walls, including retaining walls.
3. Concrete reinforcement and accessories, including reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric,
chairs, spacers, supports, including vertical masonry wall reinforcing.
4. Slabs on grade inside and outside the building; slabs on metal decks, walks, docks,
platforms.
5. Grouting of leveling plates.
6. Concrete placement, vibrating, finishing, curing, saw cutting, and joint construction
and installation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01950 - Construction Testing and Inspection
B. Section 02200 - Structure Excavation, Trenching and Backfill
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute(ACI):
1. ACI-117: Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
2. ACI-301: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
3. ACI-302.1: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Finishing
4. ACI-304: Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
we 03300-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
In
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
I
±0
DIVISION 3--CONCRETE
40
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031 .r
JUNE 17,2005
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. All buildings,paved areas, walkways, utilities and other site improvements shown on the
Drawings have been demolished and removed from the property under a separate contract.
Verify existing conditions in the field and report any discrepancies to the Engineer in
writing prior to commencing construction.
1.6 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Install all soil erosion and sediment control devices and measures prior to commencing
construction and maintain such structures throughout construction period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Haybale Stakes: Hardwood - minimum of three (3) feet long, 2"x 2"nominal Size. .�
B. Silt Fence Stakes: Hardwod - Min. of 4' long, 2" x"2"nominal size.
C. Silt Fence - Mirafi Envirofence -three (3) feet high or approved equal.
D. Haybales.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - SILT FENCE WITH HAYBALES
A. Locate silt fence and haybales as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Firmly set stakes to the depth indicated on the Drawings.
C. Excavate and install silt fence via"toe-in"method as indicated on the Drawings. ••
D. Maintenance:
1. Inspect silt fence and haybales periodically and after each storm.
2. Remove accumulated sediment periodically and when directed by Owner/Engineer
and/or regulatory authorities.
3. Repair any damaged control measures immediately.
E. Removal and clean-up: .�
1. Remove silt fence and haybales at completion of the Work or when directed by the
Owner/Engineer.
2. Restore disturbed areas to finish surface indicated on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
SITE WORK 02246-2
In
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 02246 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete
all of the following:
1. Install protection and control devices to prevent soil erosion sediment release from site.
2. Maintain, repair and replace erosion control devices and measures as required.
3. Remove erosion control devises and measures when no longer required.
4. Remove and dispose of collected sediment and debris.
*" 1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Earthwork - Section 02200.
B. Demolition—Section 02050
C. Site Preparation—Section 02100
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Part I Contract Requirements and Part II General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. Refer to other divisions of these Specifications, other Sections in this Division, and
Drawings for related work which may affect the work of this Section.
C. The Contract Drawings indicate and show limits of construction for this project. These
Specifications(refer to Table of Contents) specify material and work requirements for this
project. Both are complimentary to each other, and both shall be followed to properly
complete the Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings as outlined in the General Requirements for all control methods
outlined below. Approval shall be obtained prior to ordering.
1. Silt Fence.
2. Stakes
3. Haybales
02246-1 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. Complete grading operations after the building has been finished, utilities installed, site
improvements constructed, and planted areas cleaned and finished at required grades.
C. Install sufficient grade stakes to witness correct lines and grades.
END OF SECTION
no
40
02220-9 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,
AND BACKFILL
IIN III
ow
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE MW
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
am
it is placed. Fill that is too wet for proper compaction shall be disked,harrowed, or
otherwise dried to a proper moisture content for compaction to the required density. If the
fill material cannot be dried within 24 hours of placement, it shall be removed and .0
replaced with drier fill. Fill that is too dry for proper compaction shall receive water
uniformly applied over the surface of the loose layer. Sufficient water shall be added to
allow compaction to the required density. Alternatively, Contractor may increase am
compactive effort provided the stated 95 percent degree of compaction is achieved. Fill
shall be placed in horizontal layers. Where the horizontal layer meets a natural rising
slope, the layer shall be keyed into the slope by cutting a bench. am
G. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels, and elevations.
H. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural
settlement and compaction.
I. Backfill simultaneously on each side of foundation walls to equalize soil pressures.
J. Backfill of footing (placement of gravel and/or stone)must occur as soon as possible
following footing placement.
K. Backfill building area compacted to 95% of mod. Optimum density (ASTM-1557-D).
Material within 6-feet of building finished grade must be kept within 2 points of optimum. ..
3.8 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. The Contractor shall take every precaution to guard against any movement or settlement
of existing or new construction, utilities,paving, walks, light standards, piping, conduit,
etc., and shall provide all bracing, sheet piling, lagging, sheeting, shoring, or earth berms
necessary in connection therewith. The Contractor shall be responsible for the strength
and adequacy of all bracing and shoring and for the safety and support of such
construction, utilities, etc., and for any movement, settlement, damage, or injury thereto.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Soil compaction testing:
1. Compact each lift to achieve the required percentage of Modified AASHTO laboratory
density(ASTM D1557, Method Q. op
3.10 SURPLUS MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. wo
B. Leave stockpile areas completely free of all excess fill materials.
3.11 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove from the site and dispose of all debris and unsuitable excavated material. ..
SITE WORK 02220-8 ..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
E. When%complete, request the Architect/Engineer to inspect excavations. Correct
unauthorized excavation as directed at no cost to the Owner.
F. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated sub-soil from site in accordance with excavation
requirements.
' 3.6 DE-WATERING
A. The Contractor shall provide at his own expense adequate pumping and draining facilities
to keep the excavated area sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as
not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbances of
underlying natural ground.
B. Promptly remove by approved methods water rising from seepage into excavation or
resulting from rainfall. Groundwater levels shalt be maintained at all times at least one
*M foot below bottom of excavations.
C. Should the Engineer determine that, in his opinion,the Contractor's de-watering
,o procedures (or lack of them) is causing disturbance to the sub-grade or otherwise
interfering with the quality of the placement of fill, the Contractor shall cease further work
until he has modified his de-watering procedures and equipment to the satisfaction of the
ON Engineer.
D. The drainage of all water resulting from pumping shall be arranged so as not to cause
damage to adjacent property. The arrangement shall also satisfy requirements of the local
environmental or conservation authority.
3.7 BACKFILLING
A. Stockpile fill materials in area(s) designated by Owner.
40 B. Do not start backfilling operations until building drainage system and utility trenches have
been inspected.
40 C. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground
surfaces are not in a frozen condition.
D. Do not backfill over existing sub-grade surfaces which are porous, wet, or spongy.
E. Compaction Standards: Contractor will arrange his work so that the Engineer has access
to each lift of fill to make necessary observations and tests. The degree of compaction for
40 to
fill shall be at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined by ASTM Test
Method D1557C.
r F. Work Procedures During Fill Operations: Protect fill area by grading to drain and
providing a smooth surface which will readily shed water. Grade the surface of the areas
in such a manner as to prevent ponding of surface runoff water in areas to receive
compacted fill. Each layer of fill shall be compacted to the specified density the same day
44 02220-7 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,
AND BACKFILL
.e
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
J. Removal of boulders or buried rock in excess of 2 cubic yards may be authorized as an
extra; otheriwork is deemed to be within the scope of this section.
K. All topsoil, subsoil and grubbing must be removed in fills beneath the structure.
3.4 ROCK EXCAVATION
A. Definition: Rock is defined as ledge, stone or hard shale, concrete or masonry structures
which require drilling or blasting for removal, and boulders larger than one (1) cubic yard
in volume encountered in trench excavations.
B. Measurements: Rock shall be stripped for measurement before proceeding, and no rock
that is excavated or loosened before measurement will be allowed or paid for as rock.
Measurement and payment, therefore, shall be by the number of cubic yards required to
bring the excavation to the required surface or grade as shown on the drawings. In rock
excavation, 18 inches will be allowed outside the footing lines in the vertical planes; 24
inches outside the footing lines where drains are required. Submit cross-sections and
certification of quantities by a New Jersey registered land surveyor or professional
engineer.
C. Blasting: When explosives are used,work shall be executed by experienced powderman
or persons who are licensed or otherwise authorized to use explosives. Explosives shall
be stored, handled, and used in accordance with local regulations and the "Manual of
Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America,
Inc. The Structural Engineer shall be notified of scheduled blasting. Any damage to
existing or new construction caused by the use of explosives shall be corrected at the
Contractor's expense.
.R
D. Shelving: If rock surfaces supporting footings should be encountered, such surfaces shall
be leveled off to a slope not exceeding one(I") inch per foot, unless otherwise indicated
on the plans. *•
3.5 TRENCHING
A. Excavate for mechanical and electrical service within building lines as indicated. Ensure
trenching, within building lines, does not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay
for any foundation.
B. Excavate in accordance with lines and grades.
C. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation of services and to allow for
inspection. Trim and shape trench bottoms, and leave free of irregularities, lumps, and
projections.
D. Do not disturb soil within drip line of existing trees that are to remain. If it is necessary to
excavate through roots,perform work by hand and cut roots with a sharp ax.
SITE WORK 02220-6
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Soils from the proposed detention pond excavation will not be suitable for use under
structures.
2.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION
A. Barricades and warning devices shall be in accordance with governing codes and
regulations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATIONS AND LAYOUT
A. Establish extent of excavation for foundation by area and elevation; designate and identify
datum elevation.
B. Set required lines and levels.
3.2 UTILITIES
A. Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring
in work area. Coordinate with local authorities all work around existing utilities and
respective utility companies for other utilities as required.
B. Protect utility services uncovered by excavation as required by the local authorities and
local utility companies.
3.3 EXCAVATION
40 A. Excavate subsoil in accordance with lines and levels required for construction of the work,
including space for forms, bracing and shoring, foundation drainage system, application of
damp-proofing, and to permit inspection.
B. Do additional excavation only by written authorization of the Owner.
C. Machine slope banks.
D. Hand trim excavations and leave free from loose or organic matter.
E. When complete, verify soil bearing capacities, depths, and dimensions.
F. Excavations carried below indicated depths will not be permitted except when authorized
by the Architect/Engineer.
G. Fill unauthorized or over-excavated areas under structure-bearing surfaces with
compacted structural fill or concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. Excavations are not to interfere with normal 45-degree bearing splay of any foundation.
I. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated sub-soil from site.
02220-5 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,
AND BACKFILL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE l 7,2005
B. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods as
required to sustain excavated areas.
C. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions,and discontinue work in area until
Owner provides notification to resume work.
D. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from frost.
E. Grade around excavation to prevent surface water run-off into excavated area.
F. Sub-grade Protection: In spread footing areas, Contractor will take every precaution
during final stages of excavation to prevent disturbance of the natural soil at final sub-
grade level. Such precautions shall include, but not be limited to, keeping equipment off
final sub-grade during the last foot of excavation and using excavating buckets without
teeth. Granular fill or sand-gravel fill shall be placed and compacted as soon after
excavation as practical, but in no case shall final excavation be allowed to stand overnight. ..
G. Proof-rolling: Immediately after placement of the initial lift of fill over the natural
ground, proof-roll the top of this lift and the underlying natural ground by making two (2)
passes with the approved compaction equipment. Areas found to be weaving or otherwise
unsuitable under this effort shall be stabilized as specified by the Engineer.
1.8 BEARING SOIL APPROVAL
A. Notify Architect/Engineer when designated footing depths are reached.
B. Do not proceed if suitable bearing is not encountered at the depth indicated on the
drawings.
C. Suitability of soil bearing shall be determined by an independent geotechnical engineer
employed by the Owner.
..
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS
An
A. Structural Fill: Angular, bank run or crushed natural stone; free from shale, clay, friable
materials, and debris, graded within the following limits:
up
Sieve Size Percent Passing
3.5" 100 ""
'/4 It 50 to 100
#4 25 to 75
B. The fraction passing the 44 sieve shall have less than 10%passing the#200 sieve.
Material shall be compacted to at least 95%of modified optimum density
(ASTM.1557.D).
SITE WORK 022204 „�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1
A. Excavation Support System
1. The size and location of any street, utilities, or buildings, etc., affecting or affected by
the support system shall be shown in plan and section.
2. The support system shall be shown in plan, elevation, and section.
3. The drawings shall show material specifications(including welding).
4. The drawings shall give details for the structural elements, sequence of assembly of
structural elements in conjunction with stages and levels of excavation,methods of
jacking or pre-stressing struts, design loads for both the full and partial excavation
conditions, and anticipated loads on struts during and after installation of the system.
The sequence of removal of bracing in conjunction with backfilling will be indicated.
5. Computations shall be submitted with the drawings. Such computations shall be
legible, complete, and well organized and shall indicate design criteria,pressure
diagrams, stress computations, and whatever other details as may be necessary to
clearly demonstrate the rational basis for the design.
6. Both drawings and calculations shall be certified by a professional engineer registered
in the state of Connecticut.
7. Earth slopes for construction excavation shall not be steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1.0
vertical.
8. Excavation and removal of existing foundation elements may be required prior to
installation of support system members in some locations.
9. Do not remove any of the excavation support system unless authorized by the
Architect/Engineer.
B. Fill Materials
I. Submit minimum three samples of each type of fill material to be used. Forward
samples to appointed testing laboratory, packed tightly in containers to prevent
contamination. Retain one sample for on-site comparison.
2. If recent test results are available for fill materials to be used, disregard samples
submission and submit such test results to the Architect/Engineer. Such test results are
to clearly indicate types of materials and composition, hardness, compactibility, and
suitability for proposed usage.
1.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect bench marks, monuments, other reference points, existing structures, roads,
sidewalks,paving, curbs, and overhead and utilities against damage from equipment and
vehicular or foot traffic.
02220-3 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,
- AND BACKFILL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 am
JUNE 17,2005
B. Site Specific/Excavation, Fill & Backfill: am
i
1. All existing fills shall be removed from within building footprint and from beneath
foundations and replaced with controlled fill. The controlled fill shall conform to ""
below and shall extend laterally outside the foundations by a distance equal to the
depth of fill below the foundations.
2. There shall be a minimum of 2 feet beneath floor slabs and 3 feet beneath foundations. .m
The sub grade under slabs on grade(prior to fill replacement) shall be compacted
surficially to at least 93% of modified optimum density. The 4 inch of material so
directly beneath slabs on grade shall be with 3/4 inch minus processed aggregate base or
3/8 inch crushed stone.
%Passing Sieve Size
100 3.5"
50-100 3/4"
25-75 #4 •�•
3. The fraction passing the #4 sieve shall have less than 15%passing the#200 sieve.
Material shall be compacted to at least 95%of modified optimum density (ASTM
1557-D).
4. On site soils generally do not conform to this gradation.
1.4 COMPACTION TESTING
A. Testing of compacted fill materials will be performed by an independent soils laboratory
or geotechnical engineer employed by the Owner in accordance with Section 01950.
Testing will be performed so as to minimize interference with the work.
B. When work of this section or portions of work are completed,notify the testing laboratory ..
to perform density tests. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results
have been verified.
C. If during progress of work tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified
requirements, notify Engineer as to direction to proceed. If required by Engineer,
Contractor will remove defective work, replace, and re-test at no cost to Owner.
D. Ensure compacted fills are tested before proceeding with placement of surface materials.
1.5 SURVEYS AND LAYOUT WORK
A. Examine existing and finish grades as shown on grading plan and excavation, and fill as ..
indicated on plans and elevations. Protect and maintain site boundaries and project limits
during construction. If disturbed, destroyed, or exceeded, replace as directed.
B. Establish all layout work (line and grade) in the field. Employ a registered land surveyor, ,.
subject to approval by the Owner.
SITE WORK 02220-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT No.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILL
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual" apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
40 the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
4" options, locations, sizes,types, and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Building excavation, backfill, and compaction.
2. Stockpiling of reusable materials.
3. Excavation for utility.
4. Protection of utilities.
5. Shoring and bracing of excavation.
6. Removal of unsuitable materials.
7. Rock excavation.
8. De-watering of excavation.
9. Testing laboratory services.
44
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400- Quality Control
B. Section 01950- Construction Testing and Inspection
C. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
D. Division 15 - Excavation for Utilities and Mechanical Systems—N/A
E. Division 16 - Excavation for Utilities and Electrical Systems
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
AASHTO Method T-180.
02220-1 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,
AND BACKFILL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3. All environmental controls shall be performed in accordance with all applicable rules
and regulations of local, county, state and federal agencies having jurisdiction.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner will retain a Registered Soils (Geotechnical) Engineer to perform on-site
observations and testing during this phase of the construction operations. Services of the
Soils Engineer will include, but not be limited to,the following:
1. Observations during excavation and backfill within building areas and utilities, and
before placing concrete foundations.
2. Soil compaction tests under all footings,pavements and concrete slabs on grade.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
W A. Upon completion of work, remove tools, equipment, excess materials, litter, debris, and
temporary controls from the premises and leave areas in a broom clean, neat, orderly and
safe condition.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Conduct operations to ensure the safety of all persons.
B. Conduct operations to prevent damage to buildings, structures, and facilities to remain.
W C. Avoid interference with the use of adjacent buildings, areas or properties, and avoid
interruption of free passage to said facilities.
00, D. Repair damage caused by work performed in excess of that required. Return structures
and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of work.
aA END OF SECTION
02200-13 EARTHWORK
e
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs for making all laboratory tests
required to obtain the characteristics of the materials, including gradation tests and
determination of moisture-density relationships, shall be paid for by the Owner.
6. Vibratory compaction equipment, whether plate-type or roller, shall be furnished with a
vibrating surface at least 24 inches in width and capable of operating at a minimum of
2,000 blows per minute. Equipment not specifically designed as vibrating compaction .�
equipment will not be permitted.
7. Surfaces to be compacted shall,unless otherwise specified, be compacted using the
approved vibratory compactors to obtain the required percentage of compaction. A
complete pass shall consist of the entire coverage of the surface area to be compacted
with one trip of the equipment forward and back. Each trip of the equipment shall
overlap the previous trip by at least 2 feet.
8. Dumping, spreading, preparing and compacting of several layers of fill material across
the site may be performed simultaneously, providing there is sufficient total area to
permit these operations to proceed in different areas on the fill. The compaction
operation,however, shall be confined, until completed,to one area adequate in size for ,.
establishing an orderly pattern of rolling and compaction.
9. No rolling equipment shall be used to compact materials within 4 feet of the vertical
faces of any concrete walls or utility pipes. Plate vibratory tampers shall be used in
these restricted areas and in other areas too confined to satisfactorily use rolling
equipment.
10. It is the intent of these compaction requirements that the minimum in-place dry density
of the compacted materials will be equal to or greater than the minimum percentages
specified herein. Additional watering of the fill material and/or passes of the specified
or equivalent equipment will be required if the minimum percentages of ASTM in-
place dry densities as specified are not obtained with the initial comparative effort.
I. DUST, EROSION AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
1. Dust control shall be maintained constantly throughout the construction period and
shall be accomplished by the uniform application of calcium chloride at the rate of 1'/z
lbs./sq. yd. by means of a lime spreader or other approved method. Water shall also be
used for dust control and applied by sprinkling with water trucks with distributors for
that purpose as required or directed by the Soils Engineer to control dust.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for exercising every precaution to prevent erosion
and siltation of lower elevations and existing drainage systems and water courses •
throughout the construction period. All damage caused by inadequate erosion control
measures shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. Erosion control, siltation of
lower elevations and existing drainage systems shall be effectively controlled by the
construction and continual use of baled hay or straw, earthen dams or filter fabric
barriers as required and as directed by the Soils Engineer.
SITE WORK 02200-12 ...
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Within to 3' in lawn areas 90%
Below to 3' in lawn areas 85%
Fill slopes steeper than 4:1 92%
3. Methods: The compaction guidelines given below are stated to provide minimum
compaction standards only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his obligation to
achieve the above-specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort is
necessary. Reference is made to the following table for layer thickness,equipment,
and number of passes.
Maximum Loose Lift Minimum Number of Passes
'Thickness
Compaction Method Max. Stone Below Less Below Less Critical
Size* Structures& Critical Structures& Areas
Pavement Areas Pavement
GRANULAR FILL: SAND GRAVEL
Hand-operated vibratory plate 4" 6" 8" 4 4
or light roller in confined
on areas
Hand-operated vibratory drum 6" 10" 12" 4 4
rollers weighing at least
1,000lbs. in confined areas
Light vibratory drum roller 8" 12" 18" 4 4
minimum weight at drum:
8000#; minimum dynamic
force: 10,000#.
Medium vibratory drum roller 8" 12" 18" '6 6
minimum weight at drum:
10,000#minimum dynamic
force: 20,000#
*And no more than two-thirds(213)loose lift thickness
4. All percentages of compaction specified herein shall be related to the maximum dry
density at the optimum moisture content as established by ASTM Standard D 1557-
Method C and verified in the field by ASTM Standard 1556-68. Prior to placing,at
least one laboratory test shall be made on a representative sample of each of the fill
materials proposed to be furnished for the earthwork operations to determine gradation
and moisture-density characteristics. These tests shall be made by the Soils Engineer.
5. All soil samples proposed to be used for fills, refills, and backfills shall be delivered to
the soil consultant by the Contractor in 50 pound sacks at least 7 calendar days in
4" advance. All costs for obtaining,transporting and delivering soil samples to the Soils
02200-11 EARTHWORK
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..�
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
7. Do not excavate to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures may be expected,
unless footings or slabs can be poured immediately after the excavation has been
completed. Protect the excavation from frost if placing of concrete is delayed. Where
footings and slabs are exposed to freezing temperatures they are to be protected to
prevent frost penetration into the soil upon which they rest.
8. Protect fill area by grading to drain and providing a smooth surface which will readily
shed water. Grade the surface of the areas in such a manner as to prevent ponding of
surface runoff water in areas to receive compacted fill.
9. Each layer of fill shall be compacted to the specified density the same day it is placed.
10. Fill that is too wet for proper compaction shall be disked, harrowed;or otherwise dried
to the proper moisture content for compaction to the required density. If the fill
material cannot be dried within 48 hours of placement,it shall be removed and
replaced with drier fill at no cost to the Owner.
11. Fill that is too dry for proper compaction shall receive water uniformly applied over the
surface of the loose layer. Sufficient water shall be added to allow compaction to the
required density at no cost to the Owner. so
12. Fill shall be placed in horizontal layers. Where the horizontal layer meets a natural
rising slope, the layer shall be keyed into the slope by cutting a bench. ..
13. Crushed stone shall be spread uniformly by acceptable methods over the areas required
to be covered so that the required thickness after compaction shall be obtained. The
material shall be thoroughly consolidated by vibratory tampers,hand tamping or other "m
approved means, to the final compacted grades as required. In no case shall the
crushed stone be placed in excess of 12 inches for each lift before compaction and shall
be compacted as specified herein.
H. COMPACTION
..
1. Fills, refills and backfills within the new building, and pavement areas, beneath all site
structures and the various areas listed below shall be compacted to not less than the
following specified ASTM maximum dry densities as determined by ASTM D-1557- am
78 Method C. Allow the Soils Engineer time required to make necessary observations
and tests.
2. Compaction Requirements:
Areas Min,, of
Compa cfQn
Below footings 95%
Below site slabs, utility structures& 95% -►
pavement base courses
Below pavement base courses 95%
Trench backfill 90%
SITE WORK 02200-10 ■M
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE l7,2005
1. Provide shoring, sheeting, and/or bracing of excavations as required to assure complete
safety against collapse of earth at side of excavations. Alternatively, lay back
excavations to a stable slope.
2. Comply with local and state safety regulations and with the provisions of the
Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA).
G. PLACING FILL
1. Prepare locations for fills, refills and backfills in an approved manner by removing all
excess, decomposable, solid waste and unsuitable materials or debris as specified
herein. The base or other surfaces of any fills,refills or excavations which have been
allowed to weather and which, in the opinion of the Soils Engineer, are unsuitable shall
be removed and replaced with crushed stone or sand-gravel or shall be dried,
roughened or scarified, and then compacted with at the minimum number of passes as
specified in Section 3.10, using a suitable vibratory compactor, as directed, before any
additional fills or refills are placed on them.
2. Except as otherwise specified for compacted sand-gravel, ordinary fill and crushed
stone, all fills, refills, backfills and site grading from grades existing after removal of
topsoil and/or unsuitable materials shall be made with granular fill.
W 3. Base course for structures,pavements, slabs and bedding material for utilities shall be
made with 12" crushed stone or sand-gravel, or as specified.
4. Proofrolling: Prior to placing the initial layer of fill over the natural ground, proof-roll
the exposed natural ground, above the groundwater table elevation, by making two (2)
complete passes with the approved compaction equipment.
5. Sand-gravel, granular, ordinary and demolition fill materials shall be placed by
depositing in horizontal layers not exceeding the maximum loose lift thickness as
specified herein before compaction and, unless sufficiently moist as spread, shall be
* wetted to the optimum moisture content of the material in such manner as to secure the
uniform moistening of all portions of each layer. Each layer shall be compacted by
suitable vibratory compactors or tampers, (as previously approved in writing by the
Soils Engineer), which will secure the required minimum degree of compaction with
the minimum number of passes as specified. No other type of equipment shall be used
for compaction, except as specifically designed as vibrating compaction equipment.
6. Materials used in refills and backfills shall be deposited carefully to avoid injury to
structures, and only material free of a maximum stone size which is no larger than two-
,-, thirds (2/3)the maximum loose lift thicknessto a maximum of 8 inches shall be placed
within 6 inches of any structure, conduit or pipe. For a depth up to at least 1 foot over
the top of the conduit or pipe, the granular material used shall be free from stones. The
space between the structure, conduit or pipe and the sides of the excavation shall be
packed full by hand, tamped and thoroughly compacted.
40
02200-9 EARTHWORK
..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE *w
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
am
D. UTILITY EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
1. Perform utility excavation of all materials, fill and backfill, and compaction required dw
for the various utilities in the building area, roads and appurtenances thereto, and for all
site grading. Existing surface material of a granular nature may be selectively utilized
as fill as approved by the Soils Engineer. This selected material shall be placed and
compacted as specified herein, including proof rolling and compaction of the subgrade
as specified.
2. Trench widths shall be sufficient to permit proper installation of utilities, and bottoms
of trenches shall be evenly graded. Excavations below required depths shall be refilled
with sand-gravel and compacted, as specified herein. Where trenches are excavated
through existing/in-place rock-fill, they shall be over excavated by twelve (12) inches
and refilled to the required grade with three-quarter(3/4)inch compacted crushed stone
prior to placing pipe bedding material. Immediately after trench excavations have been
carried to the required grades, the exposed surface of the existing bottom shall be
cleaned of all loose disturbed materials. Where the trench bottom is below the water
level or within saturated earth materials, all trench bedding shall be made with three-
quarter(3/4) inch crushed stone. Pipe bedding shall consist of a minimum of 12 inches
of crushed stone or sand-gravel, or as specified. Pipe beds shall be rounded to
accommodate the bottom quadrant of the pipe and bell holes shall be excavated to
provide full support and uniform bearing for the entire length of the pipe barrel. .�
3. After piping and conduits have been bedded, installed,tested, inspected, and approved
by the Architect, sand-gravel shall be carefully compacted in 6-inch layers, around and
to a level 1 foot above the top of the piping and conduits. The remaining excavation
shall be backfilled with approved granular materials from on-site excavations,
compacted in 1-foot layers loose measure.
E. SITE DEWATERING, DRAINAGE AND EROSION CONTROL
1. Provide adequate pumping equipment(including standby) and drainage facilities to "IR
keep the excavated site areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff
so as not to adversely affect site construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance
of underlying material.
2. Comply with all state and local requirements. Utilize all necessary precautions during
construction to insure minimal erosion and siltation including temporary drainage
swales and temporary pipe to direct drainage from disturbed areas to eliminate erosion
and siltation on the lower areas of the site and on adjacent properties. Provide hay
bales and crushed stone. Check dams where required to eliminate erosion and siltation
into off-site areas.
3. Periodically remove accumulations of silt from erosion control areas and drainage „
outfalls during construction operations as necessary to maintain the function of these
areas as a siltation trap.
F. SHEETING, SHORING AND BRACING
SITE WORK 02200-8 .�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
00 EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3. Excavate in a manner that minimizes disturbance of natural ground. If directed, alter
construction procedures to reduce subgrade disturbance. Excavate areas excessively
■s disturbed to undisturbed firm ground and backfill with properly compacted structural
fill and/or proofroll to the Soils Engineer's satisfaction at the Contractor's expense.
4. Where excavation is required, including excavation to specified subgrade elevations
and excavation of unsuitable existing subgrade material, refill shall be compacted
structural fill material, as specified.
5. After the Engineer has approved the condition of the surface of the subgrade materials
within the building areas, the structural fill shall then be placed and compacted in lifts,
as hereinafter specified,to subbase. The fill shall be placed relatively level across the
entire building areas, irrespective of future excavation for localized depressions such as
trenches, pits, truck docks and the like.
C. EXCAVATION
1. Excavation shall be performed to elevations and dimensions indicated plus sufficient
space to permit erection of forms and shoring, drains, masonry and the inspection of
foundations.
2. If suitable bearing is not encountered,the Architect shall be notified immediately in
writing. The work shall not proceed further until instructions are given.
3. If organic soils, brick or concrete masonry, concrete slabs, footings, foundations,utility
structures, manholes,boulders in excess of 12 inches or rock are encountered at the
required elevations, they shall be removed and replaced with compacted structural fill
or crushed stone, as directed by the Soils Engineer,to the elevation of the subgrade.
4. Protect bottoms of all excavations from frost and from water from whatever source.
Foundation units, footings or slabs shall not be placed on frozen ground nor saturated
materials. Excavations shall not be made to the full depth indicated when freezing
temperatures may be expected, unless the footings or slabs can be poured immediately.
The bottoms so excavated shall be protected from frost and water if placing of concrete
is delayed.
5. Over excavation of earth, brick or concrete masonry, concrete slabs, footings,
foundations, utility structures, manholes,boulders or rock below and within the
indicated limits for building footings shall be refilled with compacted structural fill.
6. Control and pitch the grading to prevent water from running into the excavated areas of
the building or to prevent damage to other structures or work already accomplished.
7. Furnish all pumping and other dewatering equipment(including standby) necessary to
keep excavated areas dry during construction. Water shall be handled and disposed of
as described below.
8. A working mat, at least 12 inches thick, of crushed stone as herein specified will be
required where structural excavations are carried below water level or to or within
! saturated earth materials.
02200-7 EARTHWORK
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Visit the siteand become thoroughly familiar with the nature and location of the work, the
general andlocal conditions. Identify the impacts upon transportation, disposal,handling,
and storage'of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and
uncertainties of weather, ground water table or similar physical conditions at the site. .�
D. Confirm the nature of subsurface materials to be encountered, the character of equipment
and facilities needed prior to and during the prosecution of the work and all other matters "
that can in any way affect the work
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Obtain and pay for all permits and bonds, as required, for the execution of the work and
perform all work in strict accordance with the requirements of all agencies having
jurisdiction.
B. Make specific arrangements with all local and state authorities having jurisdiction over the
work to insure that all work is performed in conformity with their requirements.
C. Secure all necessary municipal, county and state permits prior to the start of construction
and furnish proof of compliance the completed work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. UNSUITABLE OR EXCESS MATERIALS
1. Excavate unsuitable material encountered within three feet (3') below finished grade
• within the new building, new pavement, new sidewalks or new slabs. The Soils
Engineer shall determine if unsuitable materials encountered at or below these
elevations within the building or paved areas shall be removed. .�
2. Follow a construction procedure that permits visual identification of subgrade
materials. In the event groundwater is encountered, the Soils Engineer may require
that the open excavation be limited to a size that can be handled by the Contractor's
chosen method of dewatering and allow visual observation of the placement of gravel,
crushed stone and/or backfill in the dry bottom trench.
3. If subgrade materials become loose and saturated, place a six-inch(6")to twelve-inch
(12") layer of crushed stone over the natural underlying soil to stabilize areas which
may become disturbed due to surface runoff, subsurface seepage pressures and to ■"
expedite pumping.
B. EARTHWORK IN THE NEW BUILDING AREA
1. Conform to a specified sequence of excavation, compaction, backfilling, and filling as
required for fill, backfill and completion of the subgrade.
2. The upper limit of the subbase is herein defined as the top surface of compacted
structural fill extending from a maximum level twelve (12) inches below the bottom of
new finished floor slabs.
SITE WORK 02200-6
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
L. Pea Stone shall be double washed uniformly graded stones having a minimum particle
size of 1/8 inch and a maximum particle size of 1/2 inch and it shall be free of ice, snow,
roots, rubbish, and other deleterious material
M. All refills and fills elsewhere shall be made with suitable granular materials which shall be
acceptably graded, containing sound stone, gravel and sand without, in the opinion of the
Soils Engineer,having excessive percentages of silts or clays or being too wet for proper
placement. They shall be satisfactorily free from vegetation,masses of roots or individual
roots, loam peat, muck, or other organic or undesirable matter of any nature whatsoever.
2.2 USE OF MATERIAL
A. Sand-Gravel shall be used for the base course below the new floor slab and foundations of
the new building.
B. Granular Fill shall be used below the base course for compacted structural fill, backfill
and fill within the lateral limits of the new building, except as stated above.
C. Ordinary Fill shall be used for compacted fill,backfill and refill within the limits of new
pavement below the base course and within grass areas, except as stated above.
D. Crushed Stone shall be used as a stabilizing layer for excavations within new building and
parking areas, for utility trenches where indicated, saturated areas at or below the water
table and in accordance with the requirements of this Section, at the discretion of the Soils
Engineer.
E. Sand-Gravel or Select Backfill shall be used for backfilling trenches.
F. Pea Stone shall be used above the crown of pipe in leaching trenches and Washed Stone
shall be used below the crown of pipe in leaching trenches.
G. Free draining fill shall be used for base course below pavement.
H. Any material above the water table and below the base course which may become wet or
saturated by surface runoff, subsurface seepage, or precipitation shall be removed and
replaced with dry Granular Fill or crushed stone within the new building area and with dry
Ordinary Fill or crushed stone within the new pavement areas.
MR PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
40
A. Inspect the premises to verify existing conditions potentially affecting the work.
B. Observe existing facility operations that are to continue at all times during construction
and identify requirements to ensure the safety of persons and property to ensure
maintenance of access and parking.
00
02200-5 EARTHWORK
aw
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
aw
i
Sieve Size Percent Passing
2 inch 100
1-1/2 inch 95-100
1 inch 35-70
3/4 inch 0-25
G. Dense Graded Crushed Stone for Sub-base shall consist of durable crusher run coarse
aggregates derived from rock or boulders and fine aggregates of natural sand or stone
screenings. Coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear by the Los Angles test of
nor more than 45. The composite material shall be free from ice and snow, sand, clay,
loam, or other deleterious material. The crushed stone shall be uniformly blended and
conform to the following requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
2 inch 100
1 1/2 Inch 70-100
3/4 Inch 50-85
No. 4 30-55
No. 50 8-24
No. 200 3-10
H. Free Draining Fill shall consist of clean,natural aggregate sand and gravel material free of
loam, trash, snow, ice, frozen soil or other deleterious material well graded and conform
to the following requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passin'
3 inch 100
No. 4 30-80 .W
No. 40 10-50
No. 200 <5
MM
I. Sand shall be clean, grains of durable quartz or other hard, durable rock, free from loam or
clay, surface coatings, and deleterious materials. Sand shall conform to ASTM C 33-86 .�
for fine aggregate having a maximum particle size of 3/8 inch.
J. Select Backfill for trenches shall consist of existing, on-site granular soil free of ice, snow,
roots, rubbish, and other deleterious material. The maximum particle size shall be 2
inches and no more than 10 percent of the material shall pass the no. 200 sieve.
K. Washed Stone shall be double washed uniformly graded stones having a minimum
particle size of 3/4 inch and a maximum particle size of 1 1/2 inch and it shall be free of
ice, snow,roots,rubbish, and other deleterious material
SITE WORK 022004
aM
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
[1] Four(4)inches where placed as base below slabs, two (2)inches where placed as
base below pavement; and elsewhere two-thirds(2/3)the loose lift thickness as specified
herein.
[2] The amount passing the No. 100 sieve should be between 40 percent and 70 percent
of that amount passing No. 40 sieve.
Fill used within 12 inches below floor slabs shall meet or exceed the requirements of
Sand-gravel.
D. Granular Fill shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish, and other deleterious or
organic matter. Granular fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size,,,, s Percent I~'iner,by
Weight-
2/3 of the loose lift 100
thickness 8"max)
No. 10 30-95
No. 40 10-70
No. 100 0-15
E. Ordinary Fill shall be friable soil containing no stone greater than two-thirds (2/3) loose
lift thickness. The material shall be essentially free of trash, ice, snow,tree stumps,roots,
and organic materials. It shall contain less than 20 percent passing the No. 200 size sieve
and exhibit an overall plasticity index no greater than 5.
F. Crushed Stone shall consist of durable crushed rock or durable crushed gravel stone, free
from ice and snow, sand, clay, loam, or other deleterious material. The crushed stone
shall have a maximum percentage of wear as determined by the Los Angeles Abrasion
Test(AASHTO-T-96) of 45% except as follows. Crushed stone for Class I Bituminous
Concrete, 5,000 psi concrete, and prestressed concrete shall have a minimum percentage
of wear of 30%. The crushed stone shall be uniformly blended and conform to the
following requirements:
3/4" Stone
Sieve Size Percent Passing
1 inch 100
3/4 Inch 90-100
1/2 Inch 10-50
3/8 Inch 0-20
No. 4 0-5
1-1/2" Stone
02200-3 EARTHWORK
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ...
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.4 REFERENCES
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. 00
B. Examine the drawings and all other sections of the specification for requirements affecting
the work of this Section. owl
1.5 SUBMITTALS
ow
A. Submit for approval test data and certification indicating conformance of materials to the
specifications.
B. Submit samples of all materials for testing as required by the Owner. A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
aw
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Earth materials for use as fills shall be described below. All soil materials proposed for
importing to the site shall be clean, newly borrowed, mineral soil materials from approved
borrow sources, free of any contamination. Materials from construction sites or other
noncommercial borrow sources shall not be imported to the site without prior approval "
of the Geotechnical Engineer. All materials being imported to the site shall not contain
detectable amounts of oil and/or hazardous materials as defined by the Massachusetts
Contingency Plan (CMR 40,000).
B. Processed materials (including onsite glacial till and processed on-site construction
materials) consisting of a mixture of two or more soil types (such as sand and crushed
stone) or crushed concrete, or other crushed construction materials (such as brick or
concrete) are acceptable for use as fill provided they meet the applicable gradation
requirements presented below.
C. Sand-Gravel shall consist of hard, durable sand and gravel, and shall be free from ice and
snow, roots, sod, rubbish, and other deleterious or organic matter. It shall conform to the aw
following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size. Percent Finer by Wei' t
See Note 100
'/2" 50-85
No. 4 40-75
No. 10 30-60
No. 40 10-35 .►
No. 100 5-20
No. 200 2-10
SITE WORK 02200-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 02260 EARTHWORK
PARTI GENERAL
4. 1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete
all the following:
1. Excavation, fill, backfill, refill and subgrade preparation, including compaction, for
buildings, foundations, sitework,pavements and utilities.
2. Hauling of fill materials, hauling and lawful disposal off-site of excess or unsuitable
materials.
3. Trench excavation, bedding and backfill for all buried pipe including compaction.
4. Dewatering, sheeting, shoring and bracing of excavations.
5. Dust, erosion and environmental controls.
6. Rough grading, fine grading(to±0.10 foot), and compaction of existing materials, fill,
�. bases,backfills and refills.
7. Crushed stone for site structure foundations, site work, utility systems, dewatering,
control of water and saturated material as specified herein.
8. Removing,backfilling and compacting voids which may be encountered.
9. Excavation and legal off-site disposal of unsuitable or materials and backfilling with
gravel.
Within the site boundaries,there exist a variety of materials designated to be
demolished and removed. These materials consist primarily of building structures and
foundations, concrete pads, asphalt pavements, masonry, and utilities. These materials
may be used for materials specified under Section 02200, provided they are processed
to meet specified gradations.
1.2 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Items of related work specified in other Sections include the following.
1. Demolition- Section 02050
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Owner will employ a soils test laboratory for earth operations. At least three (3)
working days'notice must be given by the Contractor before earthwork can begin. All
work done in advance will be removed and recompacted as specified herein at no
additional cost to the Owner.
02200-1 EARTHWORK
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
3.5 BACKFILL%
A. Backfill trenches and excavations resulting from work under this Section in accordance
with Section 02200, EARTHWORK.
END OF SECTION
A
SITE WORK 021004
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
constructions or improvements, the existing construction and improvements shall be
completely removed in their entirety, unless specifically indicated to remain.
3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clear materials specified herein to the limits shown and remove from the site.
B. Remove stumps and roots completely in all proposed paved or built areas and to 18"
minimum below grade where lawn is to be installed; 3'-0" minimum in areas designated
' for shrubs, 4'-0" minimum for trees.
3.3 SALVAGE
A. Salvage indicated material or materials determined to be suitable for reuse, including:
grates, frames or other metal castings and miscellaneous parts of inlets and manholes;
hydrants in functional condition; light poles; wood and metal fences; signs; curbing; and
other miscellaneous site items as indicated on the Drawings. Stockpile items to be
salvaged in off-site location, as designated by the Owner..
B. Care should be taken not to damage any equipment item or accessory during dismantling
operations and subsequent stockpiling and/or storage. Any damage shall be the
Contractor's responsibility.
3.4 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL
A. Prior to starting general excavation, strip all topsoil within areas to be occupied by
structures, pavements, steps, lawns,planting and trenches,as well as all areas to be
regraded, or used for construction operations for later use in topsoiling and finish grading.
Stockpile areas for topsoil shall be as indicated on Drawings, or as directed by the
Landscape Architect. Should the topsoil be stockpiled in any area without prior approval
of the Landscape Architect,the Landscape Architect may direct the Contractor to relocate
such stockpile to another portion of the site, and the Contractor shall do so at no additional
cost to the Owner.
B. Do no stripping without clear understanding of existing soil,planting and site conditions
to be preserved.
C. All loam encountered during the stripping operation,regardless of depth, shall be
excavated, stockpiled and covered on the site, where directed. Areas having greater
depths of loam than reasonably anticipated shall be stripped of all loam and ordinary fill
shall be used to bring such areas to the rough grade level. All other stripped material
which can be classified as fill under other Sections shall be used or stockpiled for re-use in
rough grading or backfill.
D. Surplus topsoil and fill not required to fulfill the requirements of the Contract shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and legally
disposed of.
02100-3 SITE PREPARATION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. Damage or loss to site improvements shall be at the risk of the Contractor from and after
the date of Contract execution, and no such damage or loss shall relieve the Contractor
from any obligation under the Contract.
C. Disposal: Dispose of cleared, grubbed, and removed material off the site. Burning of
materials on the job site will not be permitted. off location, designated by the Owner and
Landscape Architect.
D. Traffic: Conduct operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with
the normal use of corridors,public ways and other adjacent facilities. Do not close or
obstruct traffic ways, corridors, streets, walks or other used facilities without the written
permission of the Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Protection: Prevent injury to persons and damage to property. Immediately repair
damaged property to its condition before being damaged.
F. Shoring and Bracing: Provide adequate shoring and bracing to prevent uncontrolled
collapse or damage to existing structures or utilities.
G. Dust and Noise Control: Take effective measures to prevent windblown dust and to
control noise to avoid creating a nuisance. Avoid creating ice hazards in freezing weather.
H. Utilities: Maintain all utilities except those requiring removal or relocation. Keep utilities
in service and protect from damage. Do not interrupt utilities serving used areas without
first obtaining permission from the utility company and the Owner. Provide temporary
services as required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FENCING
A. Reference drawings for construction fencing materials and details. '"
2.2 STOCKPILE COVER
A. Reinforced polypropylene tarps, resistant to ultraviolet radiation.
B. Secured with ropes and anchors, as required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish completely and legally remove from site and dispose of properly.
Proceed with demolition systematically.
B. Demolish all existing above and below grade improvements except those indicated to
remain. Wherever areas of new construction are shown to go over or encompass existing ..,
SITE WORK 02100-2 aw
ON
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
NO RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 02 1(0 SITE PREPARATION
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS and 'SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS as part of
this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by,work of this Section. Cooperate
with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Perform all work required to complete the work of the Section, as indicated. Such work
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
B. Clearing, grubbing, and disposing of vegetation, including bushes, brush,trees, stumps,
roots, rubbish, refuse, trash and debris within the indicated limits.
C. Protection from injury to or defacement of trees and other vegetation and objects indicated
or designated to be preserved.
D. Coordination of disconnection and capping of utilities and/or removal or relocation of
utilities and utility poles, as needed.
E. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil
F. Installation of construction fencing.
1.3 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
OF A. Earthwork
B. Storm Drainage
' C. Planting. N/A.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. General: The Contractor shall visit and accept the site as he finds it, and shall inform
himself of the character and the type of site items to be removed. The Owner assumes no
responsibility for the actual condition or structural adequacy of any existing construction
to be demolished.
02100-1 SITE PREPARATION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
O. If asbestos materials, or materials suspected to contain asbestos, are encountered during
construction, demolition, or cutting and patching, immediately cease work in the affected
area and immediately notify both the Owner and Architect. The Owner or Architect will
investigate these materials, and determine the method for removal, disposal, or
encapsulation.
P. If asbestos materials are disturbed,removed, disposed of, or encapsulated without written no
authorization from the Owner or Architect or in a manner not in accordance with the
written authorization, the Contractor and Subcontractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold
harmless the Owner and Architect against any loss, damage, or liability arising, or
resulting from, such unauthorized improper acts of the Contractor and Subcontractor; and
further, the Owner and Architect shall not responsible for any such loss, damage or
liability arising, or resulting from the Contractor's or Subcontractor's acts.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING a*
A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials
from site. Remove protections and leave areas in a neat, orderly and safe condition. .R
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Conduct operations to ensure the safety of all persons.
B. Conduct operations to minimize impact and ensure the safety to existing traffic.
C. Conduct operations to prevent damage to buildings, structures, and facilities to remain. ..
D. Avoid interference with the use of adjacent buildings, areas or properties, and avoid
interruption of free passage to said facilities.
E. Repair damage caused by demolition performed in excess of that required. Return
structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective
demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective
demolition work.
END OF SECTION
.w
as
aw
SITE WORK 02050-4 a
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. Ensure that demolition does not interfere with access to or maintenance of traffic on
adjacent public sidewalks and roadways. Existing roadways and sidewalks are to remain
open until construction is complete.
C. Avoid disturbing asbestos or other hazardous materials and report their presence to the
Architect.
D. Remove from the premises and legally dispose of all demolished items at once as the work
progresses. Provide the Owner with the location of the final disposition of salvaged
materials. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
E. Unless otherwise noted, all demolition materials become the Contractor's property. None
is to be reused in the permanent construction unless specifically indicated.
F. Maintain all active utilities traversing or proximal to the project site in operating condition
and protect manholes, catch basins, valve boxes and other appurtenances. Repair damage
to any such utility, due to work under this Contract, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
G. Provide temporary utility services during construction to avoid disruption of existing
utility service, in a manner acceptable to governing authorities. Where concrete slab is to
be removed, it may be broken out.
'0 H. For all utilities designated to be removed and not to remain in service, entirely remove all
utility structures and lines.
I. For all utilities designated to be abandoned and not to remain in service, remove utility
structures to 5 ft. below finished grade and break the bottom slab of utility structures into
pieces having a maximum dimension of 1 foot. Plug utility lines at both ends and at
intervals not to exceed 100 feet with concrete plugs having a minimum dimension of three
times the pipe diameter.
J. Torch cutting of steel containing lead and its compounds in its primer and/or paint is
prohibited.
K. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection with respect to
noise, air pollution, water pollution, lead containment and removal and all other
requirements.
L. Utilize environmental controls including water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and
other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest
practicable level. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable
conditions such as ice, flooding and pollution.
M. Minimize noise during demolition.
N. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures on-site is prohibited.
02050-3 DEMOLITION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. Propose methods that minimize the amount of dust and noise generated during demolition.
C. Provide documents signed and sealed by a structural engineer registered in the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts indicating all required shoring or bracing of excavation.
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. The Contract Documents make no representations concerning the actual condition of the
items to be demolished.
Am
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS 00
A. Concrete for plugging utility lines shall be 3,000 psi concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION No
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect the premises to verify existing conditions potentially affecting the work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Obtain and pay for all permits and bonds, as required, for the execution of the work and
perform all work in strict accordance with the requirements of all agencies having
jurisdiction.
B. Make specific arrangements with all local and state authorities having jurisdiction over the
work to insure that all demolition is performed in conformity with their requirements.
C. Secure all necessary municipal, county and state permits prior to the start of construction
and furnish proof of compliance of the completed work.
D. Before starting demolition,perform all necessary work involved in connection with the
discontinuance or interruption of any public private utilities or services or any component .*
of said utilities or services
E. Notify and coordinate with the Owner, utility companies, Massachusetts Highway . .
Department, Police Department, Fire Department and Public Works Department including
gas, electricity, steam, refrigeration, telephone, telegraph,police signal, fire alarm, water,
sanitary sewer, storm, drainage and other systems which will be affected by the work to be ..�
performed under this Contract.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide temporary barricades, temporary construction fence and other forms of protection
as required and as indicated to ensure safety and prevent injuries due to demolition work.
SITE WORK 02050-2
9W
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete
all clearing and grubbing, demolition, removal, and lawful off-site disposal of structures,
utilities and appurtenances, curbing, walks,pavement, and miscellaneous items.
B. Demolition shall extend to the lines and limits indicated on the drawings and as specified
therein, or of not otherwise indicated or specified, to the lines and limits of new work.
w
C. Shore, brace, secure, and stabilize excavations.
D. Coordinate the salvaging of any tagged trees or shrubs with the Architect.
E. Remove and/or abandon utilities to be discontinued in use or as indicated on the drawings.
* 1.2 RELATED WORK
A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other sections of this
specification.
1. Earthwork- Section 02200
2. Soil Erosion& Sediment Control— Section 02246
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ensure that demolition, shoring, and bracing the plugging or removal of utilities, and
removal of leaching fields is performed by properly licensed subcontractors having at
least 5 years experience in the respective type of work.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.
B. Examine the drawings and all other sections of the specification for requirements affecting
the work of this Section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval a detailed demolition schedule setting forth the methods, schedule,
and sequence of operations for demolition and construction and show how it is
coordinated with all other aspects of the job. Include in the schedule coordination
requirements for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as required. Do not
begin work until the schedule has been approved by the Architect.
02050-1 DEMOLITION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 02010 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Subsurface exploration/investigation has been made at project site.
B. A complete report was provided under separate cover dated April 21, 2005.
C. The report is not a warranty of subsurface conditions; Owner and Architect will not be
responsible for interpretation or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor.
D. Contractor is responsible to review reports and to visit and examine the site. Contractor is
cautioned to examine this data before preparing his proposal. The Owner will not
entertain claims for extra cost based on allegations of lack of knowledge of soil
conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMPLIANCE
44
A. Comply with all recommendations contained in the report as well as satisfying any other
conditions that may exist on the site in order to properly prepare the site to support
structures called for.
B. Contractor shall perform any additional subsurface investigations necessary to completely
familiarize/satisfy himself as to existing conditions in order to comply with paragraph `A'
above.
END OF SECTION
02010-1 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
DIVISION 2-SITE WORK
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
1.4 GENiRAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. Cooperate with the testing agency and provide access to the work.
B. Provide incidental labor, equipment, materials and facilities to obtain, handle, store and
cure samples at the site or at the source of products to be tested and/or inspected.
C. Notification of testing agencies and Architect at least 24 hours prior to expected times for
operations requiring testing or inspections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
1
01950-3 CONSTRUCTION TESTING AND INSPECTION
00
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..�
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
"assistant" inspectors/technicians may perform specific inspection functions under the
direct supervision of a certified inspector/technician.
3. Inspectors and technicians for all welded fabrications and connections shall be AWS
Certified Welding Inspectors. Non-certified "assistant" inspectors/technicians may
perform specific inspection functions under the direct supervision of a certified
inspector/technician. All welding inspections shall be performed in accordance with
AWS-"Structural Welding Codes", latest editions.
4. Inspectors and technicians for bolted connections shall be well versed in the
"Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts" and "Commentary" as published in AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction
-Allowable Stress Design, Ninth Edition". Only inspectors experienced in applying
the requirements of the Specification noted shall be employed on this Project.
C. Testing and inspections for compliance shall be checked against the Contract Documents,
i.e., Drawings, Project Specifications and Addendas and approved shop drawings.
Perform tests and inspections in coordination with the General Contractor and in a timely
manner so as to provide the General Contractor sufficient time to repair or replace non- ..
conforming materials or work. Notify the General Contractor's superintendent and the
Architect immediately when non-conforming materials or work is discovered so that the
General Contractor can have such materials or work repaired or replaced in a timely
manner.
D. Re-test or re-inspect all materials and work found not to conform with the requirements of .,.
the Contract Documents until such non-conforming materials and work are acceptable to
the Architect. Testing agency to note in its reports when re-tests or re-inspections were
performed. .,
E. Additional sampling, testing and inspections may be required, at the direction of the
Architect, if it appears that the materials or work does not conform to the requirements of ,
the Contract Documents. This additional sampling, testing and inspections shall be at the
cost of the General Contractor when non-conforming materials or work is verified through
sampling, testing or inspection.
F. All sampling,testing and inspection reports shall be certified. The testing agencies shall
be responsible for sending copies of all sampling, testing and inspection reports, within 48
hours of performance, to the Architect, Structural Engineer, General Contractor, Owner
and local Building Official.
G. Testing, inspection and sampling in the shop or field shall not relieve the General
Contractor of their responsibility to furnish satisfactory materials and workmanship, and
the Architect reserves the right to reject any materials and workmanship at any time
before final acceptance of the Project, when, in the opinion of the Architect, the materials
or workmanship do not conform to the Contract Documents.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01950-2 ..
go
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE l7,2005
SECTION 01950 CONSTRUCTION TESTING AND INSPECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials,tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings and specifications to
00 determine quantities, options, locations, sizes,types, and details of work described in this
section, including but not limited to the following:
1. The Owner shall retain independent testing and inspection agencies to perform
sampling, testing and inspections and submit reports in accordance with BOCA section
1705.0—"Special Inspections," 1996 edition.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control Procedures
w�►
B. Section 02200- Structure Excavation, Trenching and Backfill
C. Section 03300- Cast-in Place Concrete
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The testing agencies retained shall have inspectors and technicians which satisfy the
experience, certification and registration requirements defined herein. In addition,the
testing agencies retained shall have at their immediate disposal, all sampling, testing and
laboratory equipment(maintained in good working order and properly calibrated)
necessary to perform the work defined herein.
B. All field inspectors and laboratory technicians engaged in the Project shall be competent
and experienced in the task they are to perform.
1. Earthwork inspectors and technicians shall be professional geotechnical engineers
registered in the state in which the Project is located. Non-registered "assistant"
inspectors/technicians may perform specific inspection functions under the direct
supervision of a registered geotechnical engineer.
2. Concrete inspectors and technicians shall be certified in accordance with ACI's
Certification Program and the state in which the Project is located. Non-certified
01950-1 CONSTRUCTION TESTING AND INSPECTION
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.19 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each
section in addition to that used for construction of work. Coordinate with Owner, deliver
to project site, and obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.20 POST-CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
A. Prior to expiration of one year from date of substantial completion, Architect/Engineer
will make visual inspection of project in company with Owner and Contractor to
determine whether correction of work is required, in accordance with provisions of
General Conditions.
B. Architect/Engineer will promptly notify Contractor in writing of any observed
deficiencies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
00
00
01700-9 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
D. Part 1: Directory- listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer
and Contractor.
E. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions - arranged by Specification Divisions. ..
For each Specification Division, give names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
subcontractors and suppliers. List:
1. Appropriate design criteria.
2. List of equipment. .�
3. Parts list.
4. Operating instructions.
5. Maintenance instructions, equipment.
6. Maintenance instructions, finishes.
7. Shop drawings and product data.
8. Warranties.
F. Arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing maintenance or operations to meet
with Owner's personnel at project site to provide basic instructions needed for proper
operation and maintenance of entire work. Include instructions by manufacturer's .r
representatives where installer is not expert in the required procedures. Review
maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare parts and materials, lubricants,
fuels, identification system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning, and similar procedures ..
and facilities. For operational equipment, review demonstration start-up, shut-down,
emergency operations, noise and vibration adjustments, safety economy/efficiency
adjustments, and similar operations. Review maintenance and operations in relation to
applicable warranties, agreements to maintain bonds, and similar continuing
commitments. N/A.
1.18 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Provide duplicate, notarized copies. Execute Contractor's submittals and assemble
documents executed by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide table of
contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover.
B. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For equipment put into use with
Owner's permission during construction, submit within ten (10) days after first operation.
For items of work delayed materially beyond date of substantial completion,provide '
updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of
warranty period.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01700-8 .«.
4W
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
,f„ RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
40
1.14 RECORD SPECIFICATION
A. During progress of the work, maintain two (2) copies of specifications, including addenda,
change orders and similar modifications issued in printed form during construction, and
mark-up variations(of substance) in actual work in comparison with text of specifications
and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of
options, and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be
readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing
+r information and product date where applicable.
1.15 RECORD MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT DATA
A. During progress of the work, maintain one copy of each product data submittal, and mark-
up significant variations in the actual work comparison with submitted information.
Include both variations in product as delivered to site and variations from manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed
products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later
date by direct observations.
B. Note related change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications.
1.16 RECORD SAMPLES
A. Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, Architect/Engineer(and Owner's
40 personnel where desired) will meet with Contractor at site and will determine which(if
any) of submitted samples maintained by Contractor during progress of the work are to be
transmitted to Owner for record purposes.
B. Comply with Architect/Engineer's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and
delivery to Owner's sample storage space.
C. Dispose of the samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials
unless otherwise indicated or directed by Architect/Engineer.
1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide data for:
1. Products specified in individual specification sections.
2. Mechanical equipment and controls -Division 15. N/A.
3. Electrical equipment and controls - Division 16.
B. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch three-ring side binders
with durable plastic covers.
C. Provide a separate volume for each system, with a table of contents and index tabs for
each volume.
01700-7 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
.1!
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE Am*
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
no
conditions such as excavation and foundations;field test reports, inspection certificates,
manufactur/er's certificates, and miscellaneous record information on work which is
otherwise recorded only schematically or not at all. Label each record document No
"PROJECT RECORD" in one (1)-inch high printed letters.
B. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition, and do not use record documents for
construction purposes. Store documents in files and on racks in temporary field office.
Keep separate from those used for construction.
C. Record documents shall be available at all times for inspection by Architect/Engineer and
Owner.
D. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required information Aft
has been recorded on the documents.
E. At contract closeout, submit documents to the Architect with transmittal letter containing .w
date,project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of
Contractor.
F. After contract closeout, the Architect shall prepare a set of record drawings showing
significant changes in the Work made during construction based on marked-up prints,
drawings, and other data furnished to by the Contractor to the Architect. These record
drawings shall be provided to the Owner in an electronic format agreed upon by both
parties.
1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During progress of work maintain two (2) sets of contract drawings, shop drawings, and
any special drawings with mark-up of actual installation which vary substantially from the
work as originally shown. Contractor will provide one set of mylar sepias and one set of
prints.
.r
B. Mark whatever drawing is most capable of showing actual physical condition fully and
accurately.
C. When shop drawings are marked-up, mark cross-reference on contract drawings at
corresponding location.
D. Mark with erasable color pencil, using separate colors where feasible. to distinguish
between changes for different categories of work at same general location.
E. Mark-up important additional information which was either shown schematically or
omitted from original drawings. Give particular attention to information on work
concealed which would be difficult to identify or measure and record at a later date.
F. Note alternative numbers, change order numbers, and similar identification.
G. Require each person preparing mark-up to initial and date mark-up. �»
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01700-6 ..�
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
F. Clean transparent materials including mirrors and window/door glass to a polished
condition,removing substances that are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace
ft broken glass.
G. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes including metals, masonry,
stone, concrete, painted surfaces, plastics, tile, wood special coatings, and similar surfaces
to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, stains, films, and similar noticeable distracting
substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of
exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.
H. Wipe surface of electrical equipment clean.
Not I. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults,manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
J. Clean concrete floors in occupied spaces broom-clean.N/A.
K. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces. N/A.
L. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting
from water exposure. N/A.
M. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if air conditioning units were operated without filters
during construction. N/A.
N. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction, and as specified
in Section 15600. N/A.
O. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency.
P. Clean project site (yard and grounds), including landscape, development areas, of litter
and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains,
No petro-chemical spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted
nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
Q. No burning or disposal of rubbish at the job site will be permitted.
1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record copies are defined to include those documents or copies relating directly to
performance of the work, which the Contractor is required to prepare or maintain for
Owner's records, recording the work as actually performed. In particular,record copies
show changes in the work in relation to the way in which shown and specified by original
contract documents; and show additional information of value to Owner's records, but not
indicated by original contract documents. Record documents include newly prepared
drawings (if any are specified), marked-up copies of contract drawings and shop
drawings, marked-up copies of specifications, addenda and change orders,marked-up
product data submittals, record samples, field records for variable and concealed
01700-5 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 r
JUNE 17,2005
1.8 EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS AND RELEASE OF LIENS .�
A. The Contractor shall submit the following documents as evidence of payments and release
of liens with the final application for payment:
1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims: AIA G706.
2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA G706A.
3. Contractor's release or waiver of liens.
4. Separate releases of waivers of liens for subcontractors, suppliers, and others with lien
rights against property of Owner,together with list of those parties.
5. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: AIA G707.
B. All submittals shall be duly executed before delivery to Architect/Engineer.
1.9 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Contractor shall submit final application in accordance with requirements of General and
Supplementary Conditions and as herein before specified.
1.10 FINAL CERTIFICATE OF PAYMENT
A. Architect/Engineer will issue final certificate in accordance with provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Should final completion be materially delayed through no fault of Contractor,
Architect/Engineer may issue a semi-final Certificate of Payment in accordance with
provisions of General Conditions.
1.11 FINAL CLEANING
A. General cleaning during progress of the work is specified in General Conditions paragraph
3.15.
B. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 2
through 16 respectively. Employ experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final
cleaning of the work at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of work
to normal "clean" condition expected for a first-class building cleaning and maintenance
program.
C. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspections. ,.
D. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-
exposed interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces.
E. Remove labels that are not required as permanent labels.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 017004
�t
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
AI! �
H. Architect/Engineer will re-inspect work.
1
1.6 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to requesting Architect/Engineer's final inspection for certification of final
acceptance and final payments as required by General Conditions, complete the following,
and list known exceptions (if any)in request:
1. Submit certified copy of Architect/Engineer's final punch-list of itemized work to be
completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise
resolved for acceptance.
2. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, specific
warranties,workmanship/maintenance bonds,maintenance agreements, final
certifications, and similar record documents as specified herein.
3. Complete final clean-up requirements as specified herein, including touch-up of marred
surfaces.
4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials,and similar physical items to
Owner.
5. Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys to Owner,and advise Owner's
personnel to change-over in security provisions.
6. Complete start-up testing of systems, and complete instruction of Owner's
operating/maintenance personnel. Discontinue (or change-over) and remove from
46 project site temporary facilities and services along with constructions tools and
facilities,mock-ups, and similar elements.
40 1.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Within ten(10)days following receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been
completed, including "punch-list" items from earlier inspections,Architect/Engineer will
re-inspect the work. Upon completion of re-inspection, Architect/Engineer will either
notify Contractor in writing of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required
ft for final acceptance or request Contractor submit evidence of payments, release of liens,
and final application for payment as an indication of final acceptance.
AP B. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send second
written notice to Architect/Engineer certifying that work is complete, and
Architect/Engineer will re-inspect work.
C. Should Architect/Engineer be required to perform second inspection because of failure to
work to comply with original certifications of Contractor, Owner will compensate
Architect/Engineer for additional services and deduct amount paid from final payment to
Contractor,
0*
01700-3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1. In progress payment request coincidental with or following first date claimed, show .r
either 100 percent complete for portion of work claimed as "substantially complete," or
list incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete. ,..
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements, if any.
3. Submit updated final statement, accounting for additional (final)changes to the
contract sum and as follows:
a. Statement shall reflect all adjustments.
b. Original contract sum.
c. Additions and deductions resulting from: Previous change orders, cash allowances,
unit prices, other adjustments, deductions for uncorrected work, deductions for
liquidated damages, bonuses, deductions for re-inspection payments, total contract
sum as adjusted,previous payments.
d. Sum remaining due.
B. Architect/Engineer will prepare final change order reflecting approved adjustment to
contract sum not previously made by change orders.
1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Within ten (10)days following receipt of Contractor's request for substantial completion
inspection, Architect/Engineer will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of
prerequisites not fulfilled.
B. Following initial inspection, Architect/Engineer will either prepare certificate of
substantial completion or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to
issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has
been substantially complete. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch-
list" for final acceptance.
C. Should Architect/Engineer consider that work is substantially complete, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit to Architect/Engineer a list of items to be completed or corrected
as determined by the inspection.
D. Architect/Engineer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion,AIA
G704, complete with signatures of Owner and Contractor, accompanied by Contractor's
list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and amended by Architect/Engineer.
E. Complete work listed for completion or correction within designated time.
F. Should Architect/Engineer consider that work list is not substantially complete, he shall
notify Contractor in writing stating reasons.
G. Complete work, and send second written notice to Architect/Engineer certifying that
project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01700-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART I GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual" apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. Requirements included:
1. Closeout Procedures
2. Final Cleaning
"l' 3. Project Record Documents
4. Operation and Maintenance Data
5. Warranties and Bonds
6. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work
B. Section 01300- Submittals and Substitution Procedures
1.3 DEFINITION
A. Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near the end of contract time
in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract,
occupancy by Owner, and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific
requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 2 through
* 16. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion," and therefore may be
either a single time period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of
the work which have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. That time
40 variation(if any) shall be applicable to other provisions of this section.
1.4 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
ON A. Prior to requesting Architect/Engineer's inspection for certification of substantial
completion, as required by General Conditions (for either the entire work or portions
thereof), complete the following and list known exceptions in request:
01700-1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting
those standards.
B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for
► substitutions. Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically
named.
C. Products specified by naming several manufacturers and products of named manufacturers
meeting specifications: No options and no substitutions allowed.
D. Products specified by naming only one manufacturer: No options and no substitutions
allowed.
E. Product Options: Whenever any products is specified in the contract documents by
reference to the name,trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or
supplier, the Owner, in conjunction with the Architect, shall be the sole judge as to
whether a proposed equal is to be approved. The Contractor shall have the burden of
proving, at his own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Owner and in conjunction
with the Architect/Engineer, that the proposed product meets the necessary criteria in
order for it to be approved.
1.7 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
04 A. Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Architect/Engineer and
Owner.
40 B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and
systems, using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
40
01600-3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or
damage.
C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct, and products are undamaged.
1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals and labels intact
and legible. Store sensitive products in weather tight enclosures. Maintain within Aft.
temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover "*
products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
avoid condensation.
.W
C. Store loose, granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing
with foreign matter.
D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products am
are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.
E. Provide coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and
subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.
F. Take proper fire precautions at all times during storage and installation of flammable and
explosive materials. Do not store styrofoam or cellular polystyrene insulation in or
adjacent to any building.
..
G. The Contractor shall remove all snow and ice as may be required for the proper protection
and/or prosecution of his work.
H. The Contractor shall at all times provide protection against weather(rain, wind, storms,
frost, snow, or heat) so as to maintain all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free
from injury or damage. At the end of the day's work, all new work likely to be damaged 4"
shall be covered.
I. During cold weather the Contractor shall protect all work from damage. If low
temperatures make it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold weather a.
precautions, the Contractor shall cease work and shall so notify the construction manager,
Architect, and Owner.
oft
J. Any work damaged by failure to provide above protection shall be removed and replaced
with new work at the Contractor's expense unless covered by insurance.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 ..
au
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 01660 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual" apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials, tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. Requirements included:
1. Products.
2. Transportation and handling.
3. Storage and protection.
4. Product options.
5. Systems demonstration
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work
B. Section 01400 - Quality Control
C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Operation and maintenance data
1.3' PRODUCTS
A. Products include materials, equipment, and systems.
B. Comply with specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements.
40 C. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a specification section shall be the
same and shall be interchangeable.
D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as
specifically required or allowed by contract documents.
1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged, dry
condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging.
Im 01600-1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE AW
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.18 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
I
A. General Contractor shall erect and maintain a temporary field office on the project site.
Place field office where directed by Owner.
B. Field Office:
1. Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, ventilating and air conditioning
equipment, and equipped with furniture.
2. Provide, in addition, space for project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate
fifteen (15)people.
3. Storage Sheds for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Weather-tight, with heat and ..
ventilation for products requiring controlled conditions, with adequate space for
organized storage and access and lighting for inspection of stored materials.
1.19 PARKING
A. Parking for employees of all contractors shall be limited to areas as designated by the
Owner. Parking will not be allowed on any other portion of the Owner's premises.
1.20 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to substantial
completion inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Restore
existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition. Remove
underground installations to a depth of two feet minimum; grade site as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
sm
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION tw
3.1 NOT USED
..
END OF SECTION
go
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01500-6 ,,.,
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.13 STAIRS
A. Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate for performance of the work and
until permanent stairs are available to replace use of temporary stairs.
B. When permanent stair framing is in place,provide temporary treads,platforms, and
railings for use by construction personnel. Cover finished materials of permanent stairs
which will be exposed to occupants' use with a durable protective covering of plywood or
similar materials so that finishes will be without damage or deterioration at time of
acceptance.
1.14 HOISTS AND MATERIAL ELEVATORS
A. Provide adequate facilities for materials, and do not allow employees to ride hoists or
material elevators which comply only with requirements for materials. Except as r otherwise indicated, selection of type, size, and number of facilities for temporary use at
project site is Contractor's option.
a 1.15 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel and to facilitate execution
of the work: scaffolds, staging, ladders, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, cranes,
chutes, and other such facilities and equipment. Refer to respective sections for particular
requirements for each trade.
B. Maintain facilities and equipment in first-class condition.
1.16 WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site within contract limit lines to drain.
B. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment.
1.17 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
40 A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site.
B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work. Maintain areas free of dust and other
40 contaminants during finishing operations.
C. Streets and drives in the area of construction shall be kept free of accumulation of mud,
sir► clay, gravel, and any other materials which vehicles or equipment may track or scatter
onto these surfaces.
ON D. No burning or disposal of rubbish at the job site will be permitted.
in 01500-5 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031 Aft
JUNE 17,2005
1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE Wo
A. Contractor shall arrange with local telephone service company to provide direct line
telephone and facsimile service to their own field offices and pay all costs for installation, "m
maintenance, removal, and service charges for calls.
1.8 TEMPORARY WATER AW
A. Arrange with utility service company to provide water service required for construction
operations. Extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is available by use of "*^
hoses. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance, removal, and service charges for water
used.
AM
1.9 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain suitable toilet facilities for all construction personnel on site.
Chemical toilets and their maintenance shall meet all Federal, State and local laws, board
of health standards and ordinances.
B. Permanent toilet facilities shall not be used by any construction personnel during the .�
course of the work under this contract.
1.10 FENCING AND BARRIERS
A. Provide, install, and maintain fences, barricades and protective facilities including trench
coverings as required for the protection of the public, to provide for Owner's use of site,
and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction
operations.
Am
1.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to
minimize damage.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
Protect finished floors and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy objects, and storage.
C. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces, lawns, and landscaped
areas.
1.12 SECURITY
A. Provide a security program and facilities to protect new work, existing facilities, and Aw
Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. Coordinate with
Owner's security program. a-
AM
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 015004
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
0 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
i
C. Tempbrary Heat Requirements: (All spaces where work is being done.)
Minimum Temperature Construction Phase or MinimumTemperature During Non-
During Working Hours Operation Working Hours
40°F Masonry construction. 40°F
Placing and curing of concrete.
Protection against freezing.
50°F Seven days prior to and during 50°F
application, setting and curing
of cement and plaster finishes.
60°F All painting, spray glazing and 50°F
gypsum board operations.
70°F Installation of wood and 50°F
resilient flooring; installation
of loose millwork. Receiving
and setting of prefabricated
casework and equipment.
D. Provide ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials;to disperse humidity; and to
prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
E. Temporary weathertight enclosures shall be provided as required during construction to
make the building weathertight and protect the work from freezing or frost damage and as
necessary to ensure suitable working conditions for construction operations of the trades.
1.6 WINTER CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall remove snow and ice within and surrounding the areas occupied by
trailers, storage, field office and the like including all areas affected by the construction
which may impair progress of the work, be detrimental to construction personnel or
impair trucking, delivery or moving of materials at the job site or prevent adequate
drainage at site or adjoining areas.
B. The Contractor shall take special precautions against damage to materials and work
installed in freezing weather, by providing special heat and coverings to prevent damage
by elements. Ground surfaces under footings, pipe lines,masonry, concrete and other
work subject to damage, shall be protected against freezing or ice formation. If low
temperatures make it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold weather
precautions, cease work and notify the Architect.
01500-3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
1.3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS - GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall arrange for and provide specified general services and temporary
facilities as required for completing the work. The Contractor shall pay all costs for
general services and temporary facilities, except as otherwise specified until final
acceptance of the work and remove same at the completion of the work. ..
1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL POWER AND LIGHTING
A. Contractor shall arrange with utility company and pay all costs to provide direct electrical
service to their own field offices and as required for construction of the Work, including
installation,maintenance, removal, and service charges.
B. A temporary lighting system shall be furnished, installed and maintained as necessary to
satisfy the requirements for safety and security. All work shall comply with applicable
provisions of governing codes. Additional temporary lighting shall be installed and
maintained during the installation of any finishes (i.e. floor tile,painting, etc.). Such
additional temporary lighting shall provide a minimum of 30 footcandles of light at the
floor level on a maintained basis throughout the work area.
C. A temporary power distribution system, as necessary to provide adequate power for use of
the various trades, shall be installed and maintained throughout the areas of construction. ••
The temporary power system shall include all outlets, wiring, transformers, panels,
switches, circuit breakers, GFI circuits and other electrical devices as required to provide
necessary distribution and to protect the power supply system.
D. When the permanent power and lighting systems are in operating conditions,they may be
used for temporary power and lighting for construction purposes that
1. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the entire power and lighting systems.
2. All light fixtures shall be cleaned and re-lamped just prior to final acceptance of the ,.
work.
3. The Contractor shall pay all costs for operation, and maintenance of the systems until
final acceptance of the work. AN
1.5 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES HEATING AND VENTILATION
no
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for heating and ventilation required for temporary
use during the course of the Project.
B. Provide temporary heat and ventilation required to maintain adequate environmental
conditions to facilitate progress of the work; to meet specified minimum conditions for the
installation of materials; and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to
temperature or humidity. Required minimum temperatures, once established, shall be
held continuously until next construction phase. Pay all costs of installation,maintenance,
operation, removal, and for fuel consumed. Am
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01500-2 ..
OR
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
0 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. Requirements included:
1. Temporary electrical power and lighting.
2. Temporary enclosures, heat and ventilation.
ft 3. Winter Construction.
4. Telephone service.
5. Temporary water.
6. Sanitary facilities.
7. Fencing and barriers.
8. Protection of Installed Work
9. Security
10. Stairs
11. Hoists and Material Elevators
12. Construction Aids
13. Water Control
14. Cleaning During Construction
+ 15. Field Offices and Sheds
16. Parking
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work
B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout
01500-1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
0 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and
Town Building Inspector, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating
04 compliance or non-compliance with contract documents.
D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment,
tools, storage, and assist as requested.
1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring services.
2. Make arrangements with independent firm, and pay for additional samples and tests
required for Contractor's use.
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be
performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer ten (10)days in advance of
required observations.
B. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers
WA or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions; conditions
of surfaces and installation; quality of workmanship; start-up of equipment; test, adjust,
and balance of equipment as applicable; and to initiate instructions when necessary.
C. Individuals are to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Submit report in duplicate within five (5) days of observation to Architect/Engineer for
review.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
0 A. Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
0, A. Not Used
END OF SECTION
01400-3 QUALITY CONTROL
.w
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ma.
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
aw
F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration,physical distortion, or disfigurement.
..
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Conform to reference standards by date of issue current on date for receiving bids.
B. Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents.
C. Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request ,..
clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the
contract documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.5 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual Specifications Sections for
review.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work.
C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field „
sample has been accepted by Architect/Engineer.
1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
B. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mock-
up has been accepted by Architect/Engineer.
C. Mock-ups are a special form of samples that are too large or otherwise inconvenient for
handling in specified manner for transmittal of sample submittals.
D. Where mock-ups and similar samples are indicated in individual work sections recognized
as a special type of sample, comply with requirements for "samples" to greatest extent
possible, and process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.
1.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.
A. The Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform
special inspections and testing.
B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in *'
Section 01950 -Construction Testing and Inspection and in individual Specification
Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01400-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual" apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. Requirements included:
1. Quality assurance and control of installation.
2. References.
3. Field samples.
4. Mock-up.
5. Inspection and testing laboratory services.
6. Manufacturer's field services and reports.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals and Substitution Procedures
B. Section 01950 - Construction Testing and Inspection
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers,products, services, site conditions,
and workmanship to produce work of specified quality.
B. Comply fully with manufacturer's instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with contract documents, request clarification
from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work, except when more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
40
01400-1 QUALITY CONTROL
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
40
01300-7 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTION
PROCEDURES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE l7,2005
reason the Contractor cannot comply with comments attached,the Contractor shall
notify Architect/Engineer before resubmission.
4. Submit Specified Item: Means that substitution for materials, articles, or process does
not comply with contract documents or provides no advantage to the Owner and has
been rejected in favor of the specified item. Contractor shall "resubmit" shop drawings
to comply with Architect/Engineer's comments.
5. Rejected: Means that submittal does not comply with contract documents, and that
fabrication, manufacture, or construction as submitted must not proceed under any ••�
circumstances. Submittals stamped "Rejected" are not permitted on job sites.
1.12 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Architect/Engineer's
stamp to:
1. General Contractor
2. Jobsite File
3. Record Documents File
4. Subcontractors
5. Supplier
6. Fabricator
1.13 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Should the Contractor desire to substitute another material for one or more shown or 0*
specified by name, apply in writing for such permission; state credit involved, provide
supporting date and samples of both specified material and proposed substitution.
Substitutions which provide no advantage to the Owner will not be considered. Approval ..
of substitutions will be based on the understanding that the Contractor receiving such
approval will be responsible for all costs occasioned by the substitution regardless of by
whom incurred. Lead time requirements alone will not be a sufficient basis for acceptance JW
of a substitution.
B. Make no substitution for materials, articles, or process required under contract unless Am
written approval is secured. Submit names of proposed manufacturers, material men, and
dealers who are to furnish materials, fixtures, appliances, or other fittings for approval as
early as possible to afford proper investigation. No manufacturer will be approved for any "`
materials to be furnished unless he is of good reputation, has ample capacity plant
facilities, and has successfully produced similar products.
dM
C. Contractor shall review all proposed substitutions, shall affix their stamp acknowledging
compliance with the above requirements, and shall include their recommendations
regarding the effect such substitutions will have on the work involved. AM
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01300-6
am
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
0 RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
H. Applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
I. Identification of deviation from contract documents.
J. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.
go K. 3 inch x 4 inch blank space for Architect/Engineer review stamp.
L. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittals, verification of
products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the
information within the submittals with requirements of the work and of contract
documents.
1.10 RE-SUBMITTALS
A. Make re-submittals under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changes
made since previous submittal.
B. Shop drawings and product data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the
W Architect/Engineer.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW
A. Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings, product data, and samples and return
submittals within ten working days. The Architect's stamp will read as follows:
1. Furnish as Submitted: Means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may
proceed providing submittal complies with contract documents. Contractor assumes
sole responsibility for the required compliance. No response is required of the
Contractor.
2. Furnish as Corrected: Means that fabrication,manufacture, or construction may
proceed provided the submittal is amended to comply with the Architect's notations
and the contract documents. The Contractor shall resubmit shop drawings or confirm
in writing that he will amend the shop drawings if so marked on the shop drawing
review stamp. If for any reason the Contractor cannot confirm compliance with
notations, the Contractor shall resubmit as described for submittals stamped
"Rejected."
3. Revise and Resubmit: Means that submittal does not comply with contract document
and that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may not proceed. Contractor shall
"resubmit" shop drawings to comply with Architect/Engineer's comments. If for any
40
01300-5 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTION
40 PROCEDURES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
ow
1.7 SAMPLES
i
A. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials,
products, and units of work both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of MW
work, either for limited visual inspection or(where indicated) for more detailed testing
and analysis.
MW
B. Provide units identical with final condition of proposed materials or products for the work.
Include "range" samples (not less than three units) where unavoidable variations must be
expected, and describe or identify variations between units of each set. Provide full set of "`
optional samples where Architect/Engineer's selection is required. Prepare samples to
match Architect/Engineer's sample where so indicated. Include information with each
sample to show generic description, source or product name and manufacturers, AM
limitations, and compliance with standards. Samples are submitted for review and
confirmation of color,pattern, texture, and "kind" by Architect/Engineer. ow
Architect/Engineer will not "test" samples (except as otherwise indicated)for compliance
with other requirements, which are therefore the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor. .�
C. Submit the number of samples stated in each specification section.
1.8 MOCK-UPS
A. Mock-ups are a special form of samples that are too large or otherwise inconvenient for
handling in specified manner for transmittal of sample submittals. �•
B. Where mock-ups and similar samples are indicated in individual work sections recognized
as a special type of sample, comply with requirement for "samples" to greatest extent ,
possible, and process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.
1.9 CONTENTS OF SUBMITTALS
A. The date of submittal and the dates of any previous submittals.
B. The project title and number.
C. Contract identification.
D. The names of. Contractor
Supplier
Manufacturer .R
E. Identification of the product with the specification section number.
F. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. •W
G. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 013004
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
reports, calculations, instructions, measurements, and similar information not in standard
printed form for general application to several projects.
B. Provide newly prepared information on reproducible sheets with graphic information at
accurate scale(except as otherwise indicated), and with name of preparer indicated (firm
name). Maximum sheet size shall be 24 inches x 36 inches. Show dimensions and note
which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in the work
shovrn. Indicate compliance with standards and special coordination requirements.
C. Identify details by reference to sheet numbers shown on contract drawings and
specification sections, page numbers, and paragraph line numbers. Contract design
drawings shall not be traced or otherwise reproduced for use as shop drawings.
D. Submit 1 reproduction sepia and 5 opaque reproductions of newly prepared shop drawings
to the Architect/Engineer. Where design calculations are required, submit 6 copies.
Submit one copy of all to the Owner simultaneously for their review.
E. Do not allow shop drawing copies without appropriate final "Action" markings by
Architect/Engineer to be used in connection with the work.
F. Indicate on shop drawing whether it is a full or partial submittal.
! ! G. Fabrication and installation of components requiring shop drawings shall not begin until
shop drawings have approval of Architect/Engineer, unless directed otherwise in writing
by same.
H. The omission of any materials from Contractor's plans that are shown on the Architect's
plans or called for in the specifications, shall not relieve the Contractor from the
furnishing of such materials even though the Architect approved the Contractor's shop
drawings.
1.6 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product data includes standard printed information on materials,products, and systems not
specially prepared for this project other than the designation of selections from among
available choices printed therein.
B. Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system, and clearly mark
each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project. Include
manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance
with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements which have
been checked, special coordination requirements, instructions for delivery, storage,
assembly, installation, adjusting, and finishing.
01300-3 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTION
PROCEDURES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ,..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Deliver submittals with the following minimum copies, to the Owner, and ..
Architect/Engineer at the addresses listed on cover of project manual:
1. Architect/Engineer: 6 copies minimum. One (1)copy will be retained by the M`
Architect/Engineer and two (2) copies will be forwarded to the Owner. The remaining
copies will be returned to the General Contractor.
.b
D. Transmit each item under AIA Form G810. Identify project, Contractor, subcontractor,
major supplier, drawing sheet and detail number, and specification action number as
appropriate. Identify deviations from contract documents. Provide space for Contractor ""
and Architect/Engineer review stamps.
E. Submit initial progress schedules and schedule of values in duplicate within 15 days after
date established for commencement of work. After review by Architect/Engineer and
Owner, revise and resubmit as required. Submit revised schedules with every application
for payment, reflecting changes since previous submittal. •�
F. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to work progress. Coordinate
submittal of related items.
G. After Architect/Engineer review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying
changes made since previous submittal.
H. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to
promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
1. Begin no work that requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect/Engineer's
review stamp and initials or signature indicating review.
J. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence as
to cause no delay in the work.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES .�
A. Submit horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major trade or operation to be
performed at the site, identifying first work day of each week.
B. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages
and other logically grouped activities. Show projected percentage of completion for each
item of work as of time of each application for progress payment.
C. Show submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data and samples, and product *
delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and those under allowances.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings include specially prepared technical data for this project including
drawings, diagrams,performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates,patterns,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01300-2 4W
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
cur
SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials,tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings and specifications to
determine quantities, options, locations, sizes,types, and details of work described in this
section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Procedures.
2. Construction progress schedules.
3. Shop drawings.
4. Product data.
5. Samples.
6. Manufacturer's instructions and certificates.
7. Substitutions.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010- Summary of Work
B. Section 01400 - Quality Control
C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout
1.3 PROCEDURES
+fit A. Review submittals prior to submission. Verify field measurements, catalog numbers, and
other information critical to construction or installation. Coordinate each submittal with
requirements of work and of contract documents.
B. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing, at time of submission of deviations in submittals
from requirements of contract documents. Responsibility for deviations from
requirements of contract documents is not relieved by Architect/Engineer's review of
submittals, except when given written acceptance of specific deviation.
01300-1 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTION
PROCEDURES
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
D. Revie,Vv conditions of installation,preparation and installation procedures, and
coordination with related work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
on
ON
01200-3 PROJECT MEETINGS
..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE no
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
am
1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The General Contractor shall schedule and administer project meetings throughout Am
progress of the work at maximum weekly intervals.
B. Make physical arrangements for meetings; prepare agenda with copies for participants;
preside at meetings; record minutes; and distribute copies within three (3) days to the so
Owner, Architect/Engineer,participants, and those affected by decisions made at
meetings.
..a
C. Attendance: General Contractor's Project Manager, and Field Superintendent, major
subcontractors, suppliers, Owner, and Architect/Engineer as appropriate to agenda topics
for each meeting. ••�
D. Minimum Agenda:
1. Approval of minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to work.
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. When required in individual specification sections, General Contractor shall schedule a
pre-installation conference no later than one week prior to commencing work the section.
B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by work of the section.
C. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two r»
days after conference to participants. Owner and Architect/Engineer are to receive copies
of minutes of meeting.
MW
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01200-2
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment,transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. Section includes:
1. Contractor participation in pre-construction conferences.
2. Contractor administration of progress meetings and pre-installation conferences.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010- Summary of Work
B. Section 01300- Submittals and Substitution Procedures: Schedules
40 C. Section 01700- Contract Closeout
1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES
A. Owner, Architect/Engineer, and General Contractor will administer pre-construction
conference for execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement and exchange of preliminary
submittals.
B. Architect/Engineer, Owner, and General Contractor will administer site mobilization
conference at project site for clarification of Owner and Contractor responsibilities in use
of site and for review of administrative procedures.
C. Attendance: Owner, Architect/Engineer and his consultants, General Contractor,prime
subcontractors, and major suppliers if requested by Architect/Engineer.
D. Suggested Agenda: List of major subcontractors and suppliers; projected construction
schedules; critical work sequencing; major equipment deliveries and priorities;project
coordination;procedures and processing of field decisions; proposal requests; submittals;
change orders; applications for payment; adequacy and distribution of contract
documents; procedures for maintaining record documents; use of premises; construction
facilities; temporary utilities; safety and first aid procedures; housekeeping procedures;
and date and time of progress meetings.
01200-1 PROJECT MEETINGS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
ow
C. Non-referenced standards recognized in the construction industry are hereby defined,
except as otherwise limited in contract documents, to have direct applicability to the work,
and will be so enforced for performance of the work. am
D. Publication Dates: Except as otherwise indicated, where compliance with an industry
standard is required, comply with the latest edition and revisions thereof, if any, in effect ,m
as of date of execution of the contract.
E. Copies of Standards: Provide where needed for proper performance of the work; obtain
directly from publication sources.
F. Abbreviations and Names: Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in specifications or
other contract documents they are defined to mean the industry recognized name of trade ow
associations, standards generating organization, governing authority or other entity
applicable to context of text provision. Refer to "Encyclopedia of Associations",
published by Gale Research Company, available in large libraries. "`
PART 2 PRODUCTS
or
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION .s
3.1 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010704 �.
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
E. Page Numbering: Numbered independently for each section; recorded in listing of
sections (Index or Table of Contents) in Project Manual. Section number is shown with
page number at bottom of each page, to facilitate location of text in Project Manual. In all
cases the final page of each section is identified by END OF SECTION.
F. Article and Paragraph Designation: Provided on each page to aid in the rapid
comprehension of each section and for the purpose of facilitating subsequent references to
specific text, for addenda, purchasing, subcontracting, modifications, change orders, and
similar references.
G. Project Identification: The project name is recorded at the bottom of each page to
minimize possible misuse of specifications, or confusion with other project specifications.
H. Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more industry
standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards
or requirements establish different or conflicting minimum or levels of quality, most
stringent requirements(which is generally recognized to be also most costly) is intended
and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the contract
documents(not by way of reference to an industry standard) clearly indicates that a less
stringent requirement is to be fulfilled. Refer to apparently equal but different
requirements, and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent,to
Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
I. Trades: Except as otherwise indicated,the use of titles such as "carpentry" in
specification text, implies neither that the work must be performed by an accredited or
unionized tradesman of corresponding generic name (such as "carpenter"), nor that
specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradesman of that corresponding
generic name.
J. Abbreviations: The language of specifications and other contract documents is of the
+s abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be
appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self-explanatory nature have
been included in the text. Specific abbreviations have been established principally for
lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of
specification requirements with notations on drawings and in schedules.
1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect and are made a
part of contract documents by reference as if copied directly into contract documents,or
as if published copies were bound herewith.
B. Reference standards (referenced directly in contract documents or by governing
regulations)have.precedenge over non-referenced standards which are recognized in
industry for applicability to work.
+0 01070-3 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ...
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
Am
The extent of project site is shown on the drawings, and may or may not be identical with
description of the land upon which project is to be built.
I
G. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "famish" is used to mean
supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation,
etc., as applicable in each instance.
H. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "install" is used to describe
operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection,placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,protecting, cleaning and
similar operations, as applicable in each instance.
I. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "provide" means furnish
and install at said party's expense, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in
each instance. All terms specified shall be "provided"unless specifically noted otherwise.
1.3 FORMAT AND SPECIFICATION EXPLANATIONS
A. The format of principal portions of these specifications can be described as follows;
although other portions may not fully comply and no particular significance will be
attached to such compliance or noncompliance.
B. Sections and Divisions: For convenience, a basic unit of specification text is a "section",
each unit of which is named and numbered. These are organized into related families of
sections, and various families of sections are organized into "divisions", which are
recognized as the present industry consensus of uniform organization and sequencing of
specifications. The section title is not intended to limit meaning or content of the section,
or to be fully descriptive of requirements specified therein,nor to be an integral part of
text.
1. Each section of specifications has been subdivided into 3 (or less) "parts" for
uniformity and convenience (Part 1 - General, Part 2 - Products, and Part 3 -
Execution). These do not limit the meaning of and are not an integral part of text
which specifies requirements.
C. Imperative Language: Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed
imperatively are to be preformed by Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations,
contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities which must be fulfilled
indirectly by Contractor, or, when so noted, by others. These specifications are generally
written in imperative and streamlined form. The words "shall be" shall be included by
inference where a colon(:) is used within sentences or phrases.
D. Section Numbering: Used to facilitate cross-references in contract documents. Sections
are placed in Project Manual in numeric sequence; however,numbering sequence is not
complete, and listing of sections at beginning of Project Manual must be consulted to
determine numbers and names of specification sections in the contract documents.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01070-2
IN
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT No.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 0 1070 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS
PARTI GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA Document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division I "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in
other contract documents, including the drawings which must be recognized as
diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon.
Certain terms used in the contract documents are defined generally in this article.
Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or
exclusive, but are general for the work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another
provision of the contract documents.
B. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of Division I sections. General
Requirements apply to entire work of Contract and, where so indicated,to other elements
of work which are included in the project.
C. Indicated: The term "indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules in the
specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in the contract documents.
Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of
"indicated", it is for the purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation
of location is intended except as specifically noted.
D. Directed, Requested, etc: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed",
"requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", accepted", and "permitted"
mean "directed by Architect/Engineer", "requested by Architect/Engineer", etc. However,
not such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Architect's Engineer's
responsibility into Contractor's area of construction supervision.
E. Approve: Where used in conjunction with Architect's/Engineer's response to submittals,
requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor,the meaning of the term
"approved" will be held to limitations of Architect's/Engineer's responsibilities and duties
40 as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will "approval" by
Architect/Engineer be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill
requirements of the contract documents.
F. Project Site: The space available to Contractor for performance of the work, either
exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project.
01070-1 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE ..
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
C. Obtain copies of standards direct from the publication source when needed for proper
execution of the Work or when required by the contract Documents. Maintain copy at the
job site during progress of the specific work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010104
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
D. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations,orders, and other legal requirements of
public authorities, which bear on performance of the work.
E. Enforce strict discipline and good order among employees. Do not employ unfit persons
or persons not skilled in assigned tasks.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. General Contmactor shall supervise and coordinate work of the various sections of
Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction
elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible;
coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,
connecting to,and placing in service such equipment.
w
C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are
indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes and conduits as
closely as practicable. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
1.7 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. All grades, lines, levels and benchmarks shall be established and maintained by the
General Contractor who shall be responsible for same. It shall be the responsibility of the
General Contractor to employ a licensed surveyor for the purposes of complying with this
project manual. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as
shown on the Drawings and shall report any errors or inconsistencies on the Drawings to
the Architect before commencing work.
1.8 LANDLORD AGREEMENT AND BUILDING OCCUPANCY
A. Throughout the contract documents the term "Owner" is used to represent Big Y Foods,
Inc. in relationship with the Contractor.
40
B. Coordinate construction operations to minimize conflicts with Big Y's Landlord, and to
facilitate Landlord's adjacent shopping center construction operations. Limit construction
0 activities to the site within the limits indicated on the civil drawings.
1.9 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the
standard, except when stricter requirements are specified or are required by applicable
codes.
B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the receipt of bids, except when a specific
date is specified.
01010-3 SUMMARY OF WORK
..
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE am
EK PROJECT N°. 05013031
JUNE 17,2005
so
2. Structural:
a. S001 GENERAL NOTES
b. S100 PARTIAL CANOPY FOUNDATION PLAN am
c. S200 PARTIAL CANOPY FRAMING PLAN
d. S300 TYPICAL FOUNDATION AND MASONRY DETAILS am
e. S301 FRAMING SECTION AND DETAILS
3. Electrical:
o
a. E100a FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN, LIGHTING FIXTURE
SCHEDULE, NOTES & LEGEND
b. E100b FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN Aw
1.3 PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION
A. The name of the project is Big Y World Class Market Retail Canopy Upgrade and is am
located in Northampton, MA. The work of this contract has been identified in the contract
documents by Edwards and Kelcey- Architects/Engineers with the Project Number no
050013.031, and the date of the contract documents is June 10, 2005, unless otherwise
noted.
,w
1.4 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Briefly and without force and effect upon contract documents, work of contract can be
summarized as follows: 4W
1. General construction for an upgraded Hamp Plaza facility as described herein.
B. The scope of the "work" shall consist of all labor, materials and equipment necessary to MP
construct the above identified Project. The work shall consist of but not limited to:
1. Coordination with local utilities, government agencies, and other authorities having
jurisdiction as necessary to allow for an orderly progress of construction.
2. Construction of the retail canopy upgrade and demolition work as required to complete so
the work indicated in the drawings and specifications.
3. Coordination and scheduling of all items of the Work to allow completion within the
allotted time.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES
A. Except as specifically noted,provide and pay for all labor, materials, tools and
construction equipment.
B. Pay legally required sales, consumer, and use taxes.
C. Give required notices.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010-2 ,,,,
OR
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
SECTION 010/0 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART I GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. AIA document A201-1997, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction"; and
Division 1, "General Requirements of the Project Manual"apply to all work of this
section.
B. Provide all plant facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation, supervision,
and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this section and as shown on
the drawings.
C. The work shall include careful examination of the drawings to determine quantities,
e options, locations, sizes, types and details of work described in this section, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Title of Work and Type of Contract.
2. Work by Others.
3. Work Sequence.
4. Use of Premises.
e�
5. Owner Occupancy.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
a A. Sections referenced in the Article "Work By Others."
B. Drawing Index:
1. Architectural:
a. G-001 GENERAL INFORMATION
b. AD100 FIRST FLOOR—ARCH& ELECT. DEMOLITION PLANS
c. A100a FIRST FLOOR PLAN
d. A100b FIRST FLOOR PLAN
e. A 101 a ROOF PLAN
f. A 101 b ROOF PLAN
g. A102a REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
h. A102b REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
i. A200 ELEVATIONS
j. A300 CANOPY SECTIONS &DETAILS
k. A400 EXTERIOR PLAN& SECTION DETAILS
01010-1 SUMMARY OF WORK
BIG Y
NORTHAMPTON,MA
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
EK PROJECT N°.05013031
JUNE 17,2005
DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 07900—Joint Sealers 07900-1-07900-7
DIVISION 8—Doors and Windows
SECTION 08810—Glass 08810-1-08810-8
DIVISION 9—Finishes
SECTION 09250—Gypsum Board 09250-1-09250-14 w'
SECTION 09900—Painting 09900-1-09900-9
DIVISION 16—Electrical
SECTION 16010—General Conditions For Electrical Trades 16010-1-16010-13
SECTION 16050—Basic Materials and Methods 16050-1-16050-34
CONTENTS
Construction Products and Activities
DIVISION 1—General Requirements
SECTION 0 10 1 O—Summary of Work 01010-1-01010-4
SECTION 0 1 070—Definitions and Standards 01070-1-01070-4
SECTION 01200—Project Meetings 01200-1-01200-3
SECTION 0 13 00—Submittals and Substitution Procedures 01300-1-01300-7
SECTION 0 1400—Quality Control 01400-1-01400-3
SECTION 0 15 00—Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500-1-01500-6
SECTION 0 1 600—Materials and Equipment 01600-1-01600-3
SECTION 0 1 700--Contract Closeout 01700-1-01700-9
SECTION 0 195 0—Construction Testing and Inspection 01950-1-01950-3
DIVISION 2—Site Work
SECTION 0201 O—Subsurface Investigation 02010-1-02010-1
SECTION 02050—Demolition 02050-1-02050-4
SECTION 02 1 00—Site Preparation 02100-1-02100-4
SECTION 02200—Earthwork 02200-1-02200-13
SECTION 02220—Structure Excavation, Trenching, and Backfill 02220-1-02220-9
SECTION 02246—Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 02246-1-02246-2
DIVISION 3--Concrete
SECTION 03300—Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-1-03300-20
DIVISION 4—Masonry
SECTION 04200—Unit Masonry 04200-1-04200-17
DIVISION 5—Metals
SECTION 05120—Structural Steel 05120-1-05120-7
SECTION 053 1 0—Metal Roof Decking 05310-1-05310-5
SECTION 05400—Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05400-1-05400-7
SECTION 05500—Metal Fabrications 05500-1-05500-8
DIVISION 6—Carpentry
SECTION 06100—Rough Carpentry 06100-1-06100-7
SECTION 06600—Glass-Fiber Reinforced Plastic 06600-146600-6
DIVISION 7—Thermal and Moisture Protection
SECTION 07210—Building Insulation 07210-1-07210-7
w SECTION 07240—Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems 07240-1-07240-8
SECTION 07464—Vinyl Soffit - 07464-1-07464-5
SECTION 07530—Single-Ply Membrane Roofing 07530-1-07530-10
SECTION 07620—Flashing and Sheet Metal 07620-1-07620-6
J
PROJECT ANUAL FOR:
WORLD CLASS MARKET
RETAIL CANOPY UPGRADE
AT
*� HAMP PLAZA
COOKS AVE.
NORTHAMPTON, MA
EK PROJECT N°. 050013031
Progress: June 3, 2005
Issue for Permit: June 17, 2005
Prepared for:
Big Y Foods, Inc.
2145 Roosevelt Avenue
Springfield, MA 01102
Prepared By:
EDWARDS AND KELCEY
343 Congress Street
Boston,MA 02210